My-T-Soft User`s Guide - Innovation Management Group

My-T-Soft User`s Guide - Innovation Management Group
My-T-Soft®
for Windows
Indestructible Keyboards and
Indispensable Utilities
Version 1.79
User’s Guide
My-T-Soft®: for Windows; Indestructible Keyboards and Indispensable Utilities; Version 1.79; User’s Guide
IMG Real World Press
179 Niblick Road #454
Paso Robles, CA 93446
1-800-889-0987 (US & Canada)
+1-818-701-1579
+1-818-936-0200 (fax)
Website: http://www.imgpresents.com
To report errors, please send a note to ts@imgpresents.com
IMG Real World Press is a division of Innovation Management Group, Inc.
My-T-Soft, Version 1.79, 9/17/2012
Copyright © 1993-2012 by Innovation Management Group, Inc.
Production/Editing/Composition/Indexing/Publishing: IMG Real World Press
Notice of Rights
All Rights Reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced or transmitted in any form by any means, electronic, mechanical,
photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of the publisher. For information on obtaining
permission for reprints, excerpts, or other uses, please contact ts@imgpresents.com
Trademarks
My-T-Mouse®, My-T-Pen®, My-T-Touch® and My-T-Soft® are registered trademarks of Innovation Management Group, Inc.
Any other product name, service, or company identified within the book is used for informational or editorial purposes only,
and with no intention of infringment of any trademark. No such use is intended to convey endorsement or other affiliation with
this book.
Notice of liability
The information in this book is distributed on an "As is" basis, without warranty. While every precaution has been taken in the
preparation of this book, IMG Real World Press shall not have any liability to any person or entity with respect to any loss or
damage caused or alleged to be caused directly or indirectly by any information contained in this book or the product(s)
described. The publisher takes no responsibility for any errors or omissions.
ISBN 978-0-557-96957-9
Table of Contents
Part I. Getting Started....................................................................................................vii
1. Quick Start ............................................................................................................ 1
2. Getting Started ...................................................................................................... 3
My-T-Soft User’s Guide .................................................................................. 3
Using this Guide .............................................................................................. 3
What is My-T-Soft? ......................................................................................... 4
Why do I need My-T-Soft?.............................................................................. 5
Features............................................................................................................ 6
What You Need................................................................................................ 7
Installing / Un-Installing My-T-Soft................................................................ 7
Starting My-T-Soft .......................................................................................... 9
Licensing Information ..................................................................................... 9
License Manager ........................................................................................... 10
Tutorial and Standard Settings....................................................................... 15
My-T-Soft Setup ............................................................................................ 16
General Information on My-T-Soft Setup............................................ 17
Commonly Asked Questions ......................................................................... 19
Customer Support.......................................................................................... 21
Product Catalog ............................................................................................. 22
Part II. Using My-T-Soft ................................................................................................ 25
3. My-T-Soft Panels ................................................................................................ 27
General Operation ......................................................................................... 27
Tool Bar Panel and Keys ............................................................................... 27
Control Panel and Keys ................................................................................. 28
Keyboard Panels and Keys ............................................................................ 29
Windows Control Panels and Keys................................................................ 30
Macro Panels and Keys ................................................................................. 32
Calculator Panel............................................................................................. 32
Quick Help Panel........................................................................................... 33
System Information Panel ............................................................................. 33
Magnifier Panel ............................................................................................. 34
Touch Panel ................................................................................................... 34
4. My-T-Soft Menu ................................................................................................. 37
My-T-Soft Menu............................................................................................ 37
5. My-T-Soft Setup.................................................................................................. 41
My-T-Soft Setup - Overview ......................................................................... 41
Help ............................................................................................................... 42
Change My-T-Soft Configuration.................................................................. 43
My-T-Soft Panel Selection Dialog Box ............................................... 46
Operation Options................................................................................ 47
Interface Settings ................................................................................. 50
iii
Key Options ......................................................................................... 51
My-T-Soft Special Handling Dialog Box ............................................ 53
My-T-Soft Panel Motion Dialog Box .................................................. 56
My-T-Soft Size Selections Dialog Box................................................ 57
System Information Display Dialog Box............................................. 58
My-T-Soft Colors Dialog Box ............................................................. 58
My-T-Soft Background Colors Dialog Box......................................... 60
Fonts..................................................................................................... 61
Select Keyboard Layouts............................................................................... 63
Keyboard Layouts & Windows............................................................ 67
Advanced Notes on Keyboard Layouts................................................ 67
Build-A-Macro .............................................................................................. 73
Information on Advanced Macro Editing...................................................... 75
Add-A-Macro Dialog Box ................................................................... 76
Delete-A-Macro Dialog Box................................................................ 76
Document Macro Dialog Box.............................................................. 77
Document All Macros Dialog Box ...................................................... 78
Documentation File Save Dialog Box ................................................. 78
Macro Key Dialog Box ........................................................................ 79
Macro Panel Dialog Box...................................................................... 80
Macro Zoom Dialog Box ..................................................................... 82
Macro Select Dialog Box..................................................................... 84
Active Window Dialog Box ................................................................. 84
Configure your Mouse Buttons ..................................................................... 85
Select the Cursor and Icon............................................................................. 87
Exit My-T-Soft .............................................................................................. 89
6. My-T-Soft Logon Utilities .................................................................................. 91
My-T-Soft Logon Utilities Overview ............................................................ 91
My-T-Soft Logon Utilities for Windows Vista / 7......................................... 91
Setup / Configure Logon Utility .......................................................... 92
Configure Automatic Logon for Windows Vista / 7 ............................ 96
Part III. My-T-Soft Technical Documentation ............................................................. 99
7. Advanced User Notes........................................................................................ 101
Advanced User Notes & Information.......................................................... 101
Final Release Notes ..................................................................................... 101
Important User Notes .................................................................................. 103
Technical Notes ........................................................................................... 104
Application Notes........................................................................................ 105
Windows Developers ................................................................................... 107
About this product ....................................................................................... 107
Customer Suggestions ................................................................................. 109
8. Files & File Notes & Installation Information .................................................. 111
My-T-Soft Files & File Notes & Installation Information .......................... 111
iv
Installation Information ..................................................................... 117
Deployment Information.................................................................... 119
9. Operation Notes ................................................................................................ 123
My-T-Soft Operation and Release Notes..................................................... 123
EGA Users................................................................................................... 123
Year 2038 Limitations ................................................................................. 123
Windows Menus .......................................................................................... 123
Keyboard Notes ........................................................................................... 124
Build-A-Macro Notes.................................................................................. 125
Memory ....................................................................................................... 130
Command Line Options .............................................................................. 130
Build-A-Board Support ............................................................................... 135
My-T-Soft Button Display........................................................................... 136
My-T-Soft Setup | Configuration | Special .................................................. 136
Windows Notes............................................................................................ 137
Sounds (Advanced Notes) ........................................................................... 137
10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)....................................... 143
My-T-Soft Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI) ................. 143
11. Error Messages and Numbers ......................................................................... 207
My-T-Soft Error Messages .......................................................................... 207
Index............................................................................................................................... 211
v
vi
Part I. Getting Started
General information about this guide, the
product, installation, and getting started
(how to get My-T-Soft running).
Chapter 1 - Quick Start contains details on the fastest way to install & begin using
My-T-Soft
Chapter 2 - Getting Started has more information about this guide, My-T-Soft features,
Installing / Un-Installing, Licensing Information, Standard Settings, using My-T-Soft
Setup, Commonly Asked Questions, and information about Customer Support.
Chapter 1. Quick Start
Install My-T-Soft
There are various ways to obtain IMG software, including (but not limited to):
•
Web based / Internet download from IMG’s web site
(http://www.imgpresents.com/demo.htm)
•
Shipped CD / DVD physical media - IMG Product Disc
•
Download ISO image file and burn IMG Product Disc CD / DVD
•
USB Flash Drive (pre-installed or installed from USB media web download)
•
Single file install (from local network / internet / other media)
•
IMG on-line account
Note: IMG Software is built by product and major version with minor releases. There
is only 1 unique build, but can be packaged / delivered / obtained in various ways.
When unlicensed, the software acts as a demonstration / evaluation copy, and
operation will be limited in length or run-time or capabilities. Once licensed (typically
via License Key and Serial Number, or OEM / Company-wide / Enterprise licensing),
the software will operate with no limitations.
Recommendation: The quickest and easiest method for obtaining IMG software is
to download the current version from IMG’s web site
(http://www.imgpresents.com/demo.htm). Download, then run the file to install. Test,
review, play with, and verify the software meets your needs and requirements. When
ready to purchase, go to the IMG License Manager, and click on the "Purchase
License Now" button. If working on a machine without internet access, use the
Standard or MSI single file download, or use a Product Disc option. Separately,
purchase the license for the product directly on the website - once you have your
License Key and Serial Number, you can install and license the software.
The following outlines a standard retail Product Disc based install. For other options,
refer to notes and details available at the source. In general, the approach is to install the
software, then license the software. The Product Disc Installation Assistant provides an
easy way to accomplish these two tasks.
•
In Windows, insert the CD or DVD - the AutoRun feature will load the Installation
Assistant - you may Install a licensed product , Install other product demos, or view
Release Information. If you have a Certificate of Authenticity, enter your License
Key, Serial Number, and Name to Install and automatically License.
1
Chapter 1. Quick Start
•
If AutoRun is not enabled:
•
In Windows, Click on the Start Button
•
Select Run
•
Select D:SETUP, or type D:SETUP (or E:SETUP if CD/DVD drive E:, etc.)
•
Press (ENTER) or click on OK
•
In Windows Vista / 7, you may not have the Run Option - select Computer, your
CD/DVD drive, and open Setup
•
Answer the questions and follow the instructions on your screen
Warning
Server Installation (Terminal Server / Terminal Services)
Note:When installing on a server, for proper operation, you
MUST install the software from the Control Panel | Add/Remove
Programs icon.
Note: You may also Un-Install My-T-Soft by running SETUP.EXE After My-T-Soft has
been properly installed. (My-T-Soft Setup will ask you if you wish to Un-Install.) This
has been provided as a convenience to the user. It is recommended that you use the
Control Panel | Add/Remove Programs Icon to remove My-T-Soft.
Start My-T-Soft
Click on the Start Button, and open the Start Menu.
Select (All) Programs, then Select My-T-Soft. The My-T-Soft menu will have selections
corresponding to the icons in the group. Select My-T-Soft to begin operation.
The My-T-Soft Welcome will automatically run after install. The Tutorial and this
manual can be used to learn all the features and capabilities of My-T-Soft.
2
Chapter 2. Getting Started
My-T-Soft User’s Guide
Version 1.79
9/17/2012
A Utility for Windows
Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a
commitment on the part of Innovation Management Group, Inc. The software described
in this document is furnished under a license agreement or nondisclosure agreement. The
software and documentation may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of
this agreement. It is against the law to copy the software on any medium except as
specifically allowed in the license or nondisclosure agreement. The purchaser may be
allowed to make a back-up copy. No part of this manual or guide may be reproduced or
transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including
photocopying, recording, or information storage and retrieval systems, for any purpose
other than the purchasers personal use, without the express written permission of
Innovation Management Group, Inc.
This manual and product represent over 19 years of on-going development, testing, and
support. There are numerous legal, license, and cross-license agreements associated with
the end product. Licensed users of the software are one of the most important aspects of
the entire process that brings this manual and product into existence. Please be respectful
of all parties involved.
Trademarks:
Microsoft Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
My-T-Mouse®, My-T-Pen®, My-T-Touch® and My-T-Soft® are registered trademarks of
Innovation Management Group, Inc.
Patents:
This product was produced under U.S. Patent No. 4,725,694.
Copyrights
My-T-Soft Copyright © 1993-2012 Innovation Management Group, Inc.
My-T-Soft User’s Guide Copyright © 1993-2012 Innovation Management Group, Inc.
All Rights Reserved. Software Subject to Restricted Rights.
3
Chapter 2. Getting Started
Using this Guide
This guide is a comprehensive collection of details, notes, and information about
My-T-Soft. Portions are incorporated within the product itself, and it is also available in
various forms (e.g. printed, on-line, PDF, etc.).
Important User Information
This guide is for users who are familiar with Windows, its basic concepts, and how to
operate within Windows. If you are not, the information you may need to fully utilize
My-T-Soft and this guide may be limited. You may wish to review Windows help,
tutorials, and other available information on using and operating Windows before
continuing using this guide.
Product Versions
In order to address various customer needs and requirements, there are numerous
versions, customizations, and special releases available. This guide is created from a
single source, and can contain references and information about other versions,
capabilities, and features that may NOT be represented in the version you are using. In
some places within this guide, there may be mentions of other supporting software that
are part of the IMG family of products.
•
Build-A-Board - customizable keyboard layout generator with support for multiple
platforms
•
CrossScanner - complete Windows access from a single-switch (for users who can’t
use standard input devices)
•
Joystick-To-Mouse - enables point and click operation within Windows from a
joystick or gaming device
•
Touchright Utilities - right-click access for touchscreens and other pointing devices
Specific notes for these and other products may be found within this guide.
Conventions used within this guide
Note: Notes and other additional information will be indicated in this way
Warning
Special and other important details to pay close attention to will
appear this way
4
Chapter 2. Getting Started
What is My-T-Soft?
My-T-Soft provides on-screen keyboards, buttons, and utilities that allow Pens,
Touchscreens, and other pointing devices to operate Windows Vista / 7 without the need
for a physical keyboard or membrane panel. This product is the culmination of over 19
years of on-going development, customer support & feedback, and meeting the needs of
users throughout the world.
My-T-Soft Software is intended to provide all the functionality of a keyboard without
using a keyboard, thus allowing the user to remain on the primary input device at all
times. With most applications being driven by the Graphical User Interface (GUI) point
& click approach, My-T-Soft completes the user / operator interface with its heads-up
display and is ideal for users who need to go to the keyboard only occasionally.
My-T-Soft is ideal for kiosks, controlled applications, industrial / hazardous
environments, challenged users, or anywhere the Man-Machine-Interface (MMI / HMI)
needs to be intuitive and practical. Using the Operator mode & Show / Hide Key options,
a Supervisor can configure My-T-Soft for secure applications, network logons, password
entry, and various other controlled input situations. My-T-Soft is also a very useful tool
for quick Macros and Windows commands. My-T-Soft has various screen sizes and its
option panels can expand and retract dependent upon your requirements.
Note: My-T-Soft is available in many forms, by many names, and can trace its history
back to My-T-Mouse, originally introduced to the world at Fall COMDEX 1993 (when
COMDEX, i.e. the Computer Dealers Exposition, was the premier trade show for
everything happening in the computer industry - My-T-Mouse was featured as one of
the highlights of the show in a program called "Computer Chronicles" (a well known
series that ran from 1981 through 2002). You can find this archived video [Computer
Chronicles Fall COMDEX 1993] at the Internet Archive (http://www.archive.org)).
There are versions that support Windows 3.0 / 3.1, Windows 95 / 98 / Me, Windows
NT, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Embedded versions
(NT/XP & Windows CE), and all Windows Server versions. Other operating system &
platform support can be found in Build-A-Board, the next generation of the My-T-Soft
software.
Why do I need My-T-Soft?
My-T-Soft is intended to give the user all the functionality of a keyboard without using a
keyboard. Because the software is a user-interface enhancement, and a functional
replacement for a physical keyboard in many cases, the software is used throughout the
world for both simple and complex tasks...
My-T-Mouse is... (the original)
5
Chapter 2. Getting Started
My-Typing-Mouse - The Software That Make Your Mouse a Mouse That Types!
My-T-Pen is...
My-Typing-Pen - The Software That Makes Your Pen a Pen That Types!
My-T-Touch is...
My-Typing-Touchscreen - The Software That Makes Your Touchscreen a Touchscreen
That Types!
My-T-Soft is...
My-Typing-Software - The Software That Types!
Features
6
•
Seamless operation from Mouse, Trackball, Touchscreen, Pen, or any other pointing
device
•
Microsoft Windows Vista / 7 Compatible
•
Workstation / Network Logon Options
•
Developer Tool Kit and Extensions
•
Developer examples of integrating into existing applications
•
Supervisor / Operator Modes
•
Show & Hide Keys
•
Selectable Sizes
•
Realistic 3D graphics
•
Infinite Sizing
•
Support for Build-A-Board layouts - completely customizable user interface
•
11 panels, individually selectable, or create your own with Build-A-Board
•
Great for editing - Quick & Easy!
•
Special Windows Short-cut Keyboard - Power Users Dream!
•
101 & 104 key layouts
•
Multiple Keyboard Layouts with ABC Layout for Non-Typists
•
International support - numerous keyboard layouts from around the world
•
Create Macro Keys & Panels
•
Specific Key & Key Combination Enable / Disable
Chapter 2. Getting Started
•
Attach Executable programs to Keys & Key Combos or Window Activation
•
Includes the Calculator with Calculator Tape & Send Feature
•
Time & Date Display
•
Memory, Disk Space, Resources status Display
•
Completely Configurable for all of your needs
•
Built-In Magnifier
•
Color-code Panels for easy identification
•
On-line Quick Help for First-Time Users
•
Minimizes to a Button for convenient access
•
Once you use it, you won’t want to live without it!
•
Keyboard not required (Just Say No... to your Keyboard.)
•
End-user and Developer Support
What You Need
To run My-T-Soft you need the following equipment (hardware requirements):
•
IBM 80386 or higher or compatible
•
200 mb hard disk space available
•
32 mb memory or higher
•
Windows Vista / 7
•
EGA or higher resolution monitor, VGA or SVGA recommended
•
Any Windows supported pointing device
Installing / Un-Installing My-T-Soft
There are various ways to obtain IMG software, including (but not limited to):
•
Web based / Internet download from IMG’s web site
(http://www.imgpresents.com/demo.htm)
•
Shipped CD / DVD physical media - IMG Product Disc
•
Download ISO image file and burn IMG Product Disc CD / DVD
•
USB Flash Drive (pre-installed or installed from USB media web download)
7
Chapter 2. Getting Started
•
Single file install (from local network / internet / other media)
•
IMG on-line account
Note: IMG Software is built by product and major version with minor releases. There
is only 1 unique build, but can be packaged / delivered / obtained in various ways.
When unlicensed, the software acts as a demonstration / evaluation copy, and
operation will be limited in length or run-time or capabilities. Once licensed (typically
via License Key and Serial Number, or OEM / Company-wide / Enterprise licensing),
the software will operate with no limitations.
Recommendation: The quickest and easiest method for obtaining IMG software is
to download the current version from IMG’s web site
(http://www.imgpresents.com/demo.htm). Download, then run the file to install. Test,
review, play with, and verify the software meets your needs and requirements. When
ready to purchase, go to the IMG License Manager, and click on the "Purchase
License Now" button. If working on a machine without internet access, use the
Standard or MSI single file download, or use a Product Disc option. Separately,
purchase the license for the product directly on the website - once you have your
License Key and Serial Number, you can install and license the software.
The following outlines a standard retail Product Disc based install. For other options,
refer to notes and details available at the source. In general, the approach is to install the
software, then license the software. The Product Disc Installation Assistant provides an
easy way to accomplish these two tasks.
8
•
In Windows, insert the CD or DVD - the AutoRun feature will load the Installation
Assistant - you may Install a licensed product , Install other product demos, or view
Release Information. If you have a Certificate of Authenticity, enter your License
Key, Serial Number, and Name to Install and automatically License.
•
If AutoRun is not enabled:
•
In Windows, Click on the Start Button
•
Select Run
•
Select D:SETUP, or type D:SETUP (or E:SETUP if CD / DVD drive E:, etc.)
•
Press (ENTER) or click on OK
•
In Windows Vista / 7, you may not have the Run Option - select Computer, your
CD/DVD drive, and open Setup
•
Answer the questions and follow the instructions on your screen
Chapter 2. Getting Started
Warning
Server Installation (Terminal Server / Terminal Services)
Note: When installing on a server, for proper operation, you
MUST install the software from the Control Panel | Add/Remove
Programs icon as Administrator.
Note: You may also Un-Install My-T-Soft by running SETUP.EXE After My-T-Soft has
been properly installed. (My-T-Soft Setup will ask you if you wish to Un-Install.) This
has been provided as a convenience to the user. It is recommended that you use the
Control Panel | Add/Remove Programs Icon to remove My-T-Soft.
Starting My-T-Soft
Click on the Start Button, and open the Start Menu. Select (All) Programs, then Select
My-T-Soft. The My-T-Soft menu will have selections corresponding to the icons in the
group. Select My-T-Soft to begin operation.
The My-T-Soft Welcome will automatically run the first time you load My-T-Soft.
The following icons will also be available in the My-T-Soft group:
My-T-Soft Welcome - Opening Welcome, access to tutorial, documents, product
My-T-Soft - runs My-T-Soft!
My-T-Soft Setup - Configuration options
Licensing Information - Displays current license status of My-T-Soft, allows instant
licensing
Install Developer’s Kit - Tool to allow quick installation Developer’s Kit
My-T-Soft Logon Utilities - Setup My-T-Soft for Windows logon, or Auto Logon
Licensing Information
My-T-Soft uses the IMG License Manager to manage the licensed use of this product. If
unlicensed, the product will run as demo (i.e. a demonstration version). In the demo
(unlicensed) mode, My-T-Soft will run for about an hour (or 250 keystrokes), and then
exit, displaying the license manager (announcing that it is unlicensed). You may restart
My-T-Soft up to 100 times (the demonstration period limit). After the demonstration
period is over, My-T-Soft will not operate unless it is licensed. For extended evaluation
9
Chapter 2. Getting Started
and testing purposes, please contact IMG Customer Service for an evaluation license.
Once licensed, the operation will not be limited in any way.
The most common methods of licensing are electronic (web/e-mail based) and by
certificate (Certificate of Authenticity). In both cases, there will be a registered serial
number, and a license key made available once a license has been purchased - these need
to be entered into the IMG License Manager to activate a valid license. For further
details, refer to the IMG License Manager.
Note: There are numerous license schemes (including OEM, site, & enterprise
licenses) available to meet the needs of all our customers. If you have any licensing
questions, please contact Innovation Management Group, Inc. directly.
License Manager
In order to License My-T-Soft, the correct License Key and Serial Number must be
entered into the IMG License Manager, along with some text for the Customer (and
optional Company) text areas. The License Key and Serial Number can be found on the
Certificate of Authenticity, or in the Software Unlock Codes e-mail.
10
Chapter 2. Getting Started
My-T-Soft License Manager - Authentication
The License Key and Serial No. entries are a matched pair, and will work together to
unlock the software. The Customer entry is required (i.e. some text must be entered in the
Customer text area), but is not part of the license unlock process. The Company text area
is optional, and will be shown as the Source when the product is licensed.
To quickly and easily license the software (on a system that has internet access), simply
click on the "Purchase License Now" button. Once connected to IMG’s website, you will
be asked to enter billing information and payment information. Once paid, your order
will be processed, and you will receive a confirmation e-mail and a separate e-mail with
license information. Once the order is fully processed, you can then click the "Retrieve
Purchased License" button to automatically license your system.
System ID Note: The System ID is used to accurately match the Product and
Version you wish to license with the License Information provided. If the system you
wish to License does not have Internet Access, you can use the Copy System ID to
Clipboard to accurately copy the System ID to the clipboard (which can be saved in a
text file or other document and moved to a system that does have Internet Access).
Note: The "Retrieve Purchased License" uses a unique identifier to automatically
11
Chapter 2. Getting Started
license your system (which is only sent if the "Purchase License Now" is used). If you
try this on a different system, or after a system update or re-install (or after a change
to this unique ID), the software will not license automatically. You will either need to
enter the License Key and Serial Number, or go into Additional License Options (see
below) and use your Order Confirmation Number and Order E-mail to retrieve the
license.
Important Note: Be sure to save and/or print your Order Confirmation number (with
Order E-mail), along with your License Key and Serial Number in case you need to
re-license the software in the future (Operating System Re-install, hard disk reformat,
new system, etc.)
Certificate of Authenticity Note: For Electronic Licenses, and Certificate of
Authenticity can be retrieved on IMG’s website:
https://www.imgpresents.com/orders/account/licmanager.htm. This requires a valid
License Key and Serial Number. Once entered, you may view a PDF of the
Certificate, or download the Certificate of Authenticity PDF file (for printing or saving).
My-T-Soft License Manager - Additional License
12
Chapter 2. Getting Started
Options
The Additional License Options section has tools and options to Enter or Paste
Evaluation or Other License Information; Request and Retrieve Evaluation Licenses;
Support Options to View and Delete (Reset) the License file; and a mechanism to retrieve
a Purchased License by entering the Order Confirmation Number and the Order E-mail
address.
Often, interested parties want to review or test the software without the demonstration
license limitations, and to accommodate this, IMG makes available Evaluation Licenses.
These Evaluation Licenses are fully functional licenses, but with a date limit (when the
evaluation date has passed, the software will return back to the Unlicensed,
Demonstration mode).
Evaluation Licenses may be requested at the Product Download pages on the website, or
by using the Request / Retrieve Evaluation License button here. Note that all Evaluation
License requests are reviewed, and Evaluation Licenses must be created by IMG
personnel (generation is not automated).
An Evaluation License sent via e-mail contains a block of text that has the license details
for the License Manager. When sent via e-mail, the text can be copied and subsequently
pasted into the text area here (Paste Text from Clipboard), then saved to enable (set) the
License Information (Save License Info).
13
Chapter 2. Getting Started
Alternatively, if an Evaluation License is Requested, then after processing, it may be
automatically Retrieved directly by clicking the Request / Retrieve Evaluation License
button. Please refer to any additional information provided by the messages shown when
using this approach.
The View Current License File (LICENSE.LIC) button will load the file LICENSE.LIC
from the installation folder. This file contains the actual license information for the
product, or the license information used to validate a License Key and Serial Number.
Note: Because an Evaluation License uses this same file, the Delete (Reset) option
should be used if Licensing the product after using an Evaluation License.
The Delete (Reset) License File (LICENSE.LIC) will remove the existing
LICENSE.LIC, then copy the file LICENSE.ORG to LICENSE.LIC (both in the
installation folder). The file LICENSE.ORG is the "as shipped" license file, and should
be the License File when using a License Key and Serial Number to license the software.
Note: For License Purposes, using the Support Option to Delete (Reset) the License
File is essentially the same as un-installing, then re-installing the software. Because
this option is quicker and simpler, it is the preferred approach to resolve any license
issues. Note that manually copying the file LICENSE.ORG to LICENSE.LIC (in the
installation folder) performs the same operation as this option.
The License Retrieval Option will retrieve License Information from IMG’s Website for
electronically purchased licenses. The Order Confirmation Number and Order E-mail is
required (which appear on the Order Confirmation page provided after successfully
placing an on-line order, and are provided separately via an Order Confirmation E-mail).
Note: For Retrieved Licenses (via Retrieve Purchased License, and via the Retrieve
License Support Option), License Key and Serial Number information is processed
exactly as if this information was directly entered in the Authentication area.
Therefore, all issues that may affect licensing also apply to these automated options
(e.g. License File status, User permissions, etc.)
14
Chapter 2. Getting Started
My-T-Soft License Manager - Licensed Display
When properly Licensed, a screen similar to this will show the License Information for
the product. The display of this indicates that the software is Licensed.
Note: Evaluation licenses also show this screen during the days that the Evaluation
License is valid.
Tutorial and Standard Settings
The My-T-Soft tutorial explains each of the panels and keys available. Following is a
description of the standard settings for My-T-Soft and a brief description of the panels
that are initially displayed. The tutorial and Section II of this manual will explain each
key and panel in detail. The My-T-Soft Tutorial may be run from the My-T-Soft Welcome
window or by selecting Tutorial from the My-T-Soft Menu.
Settings in the standard configuration
Left Mouse button (or pen or touchscreen tap) is set to press a key. Right Mouse button
(if supported by touchscreen / pointing device driver) is for opening the My-T-Soft menu.
The following panels are initially displayed:
15
Chapter 2. Getting Started
The Keyboard Panels
With a document or input window open, a left button click on any key on the alpha panel,
edit panel, and numeric panel, acts exactly like pressing the corresponding key on the
keyboard.
The My-T-Soft Tool Bar
The Tool (top) button when clicked will open and close the My-T-Soft Control Panel,
which gives you access to the keys for the other available panels and actions.
The middle button will pop-up the My-T-Soft Menu
The bottom button will minimize My-T-Soft to either an icon or a button as set in the
configuration.
The My-T-Soft Control Panel
Click on each button to open or close the indicated panel(s). The blue letters indicate an
open panel, black letters a closed panel.
Change the size of My-T-Soft (SzUp, SzDn).
Exit My-T-Soft. (Exit)
My-T-Soft Setup
To run My-T-Soft Setup:
Open the Start Menu, Select (All) Programs, Select My-T-Soft, then select the My-T-Soft
Setup icon in the My-T-Soft Program Group Menu.
OR
From My-T-Soft, click the My-T-Soft menu button on the tool bar and click My-T-Soft
Setup.
OR
From My-T-Soft, open the Main Macro Panel, and click on the button labeled "Setup"
If My-T-Soft is running while you are selecting options from the following setup screens
it will change to the new settings immediately after you click OK to save the changes.
You do not need to restart My-T-Soft to configure it with the new settings. On each screen
you may also choose to click Cancel to exit without saving the new settings.
Once you have created a configuration that you wish to keep, you may wish to save it so
My-T-Soft will re-open in the same configuration and screen position. To save a
configuration or position, open the My-T-Soft Menu, select Current Settings, and select
Save to Save Current Settings (and/or Select Position, Save Current Position). Once
saved, My-T-Soft will always open in the saved configuration until another configuration
is saved.
16
Chapter 2. Getting Started
In the Operator Mode, My-T-Soft Setup will require a password to allow changes. See
Special Handling for information about the Operator Mode.
General Information on My-T-Soft Setup
OK
The OK button will save all your changes.
CANCEL
The CANCEL button will ignore any changes you have made, and restore your previous
configuration.
Pull-down Box
This is a Pull-down Box.
Radio Button
17
Chapter 2. Getting Started
These are a Radio Buttons.
Active Application
The Active Application is always identified as follows:
1. It has the input focus (the blinking cursor).
2. The Caption (Window Title) bar is colored in the highlighted color.
Cursors
This is a Cursor.
Icons
This is an Icon.
Check-Buttons
These are Check-box Buttons.
Panels
18
Chapter 2. Getting Started
This is an example of a My-T-Soft Panel.
Commonly Asked Questions
Compatibility
1. Does My-T-Soft work with all Windows Applications?
Yes.
2. Does My-T-Soft run in DOS?
No, My-T-Soft is a Windows Application, although you may operate DOS applications in
a DOS Window. For example, try the DOS Macro Panel to see the command prompt in a
window.
Display
3. My-T-Soft covers too much of my Window. What can I do?
a) Resize and/or reconfigure My-T-Soft. b) My-T-Soft can be minimized to a button, and
will reside in the upper left corner of your active window. This way you can quickly open
the My-T-Soft window when you need it. c) Set your second or third Mouse Button to
"Look Through My-T-Soft." d) Work with Developer’s Kit to allow on-demand display
4. Why doesn’t My-T-Soft open the way I last closed it?
My-T-Soft always opens and first displays with the settings that are saved. To assure that
My-T-Soft opens the way you desire, configure My-T-Soft and then Open the My-T-Soft
Menu, Select "Current Settings" and then Select "Save Current Settings" from the pop-up
Menu. My-T-Soft will now remember these settings and open with the current
configuration. You can also save the Screen position where My-T-Soft first appears by
Saving Current Position from the My-T-Soft Menu. Note that the Developer’s Kit allows
extrenal control of settings If there are pre-defined configurations & settings that are
controlled externally via another application, then this may override the default action of
the software. Check with your system administrator for more details.
5. My-T-Soft Interferes with my application’s Display. What can I do?
19
Chapter 2. Getting Started
Some Windows Applications do not handle the screen display properly, and don’t expect
any other window to be displayed over the applications’ window. Since My-T-Soft can
display over any window, sometimes a display conflict can occur. Refer to the Advanced
User Information .
My-T-Soft Operation
6. How do I view the Cursor in the Magnifier?
The Magnifier Cursor indicator is Set On in Setup-Configuration-Panels.
7. When I press a key on My-T-Soft it doesn’t do what I expect (or does nothing).
What is the problem? Usually this occurs when the key pressed on My-T-Soft actually
does nothing in the active window, or what you didn’t expect - verify this by using your
computer’s actual keyboard. Remember that only one window can be active at a time, and
the active window receives all keyboard and My-T-Soft keystrokes.
8. Why doesn’t the pause key work?
Due to the nature of the Windows operating environment, most applications can not stop
the operation of the system in an acceptable manner. My-T-Soft actually does send the
proper Windows Keyboard Events, but most applications ignore this key.
9. Why doesn’t the Print Screen Key print the whole screen?
The Print Screen Key on My-T-Soft captures the image of the Active Window. Maximize
the window by pressing MAX on the My-T-Soft Windows Control Panel, and then use
the Print Screen Key.
10. My Macro doesn’t work properly. What is the problem?
The Keystroke macro feature is relatively easy to setup and use, however doing complex
keystroke macros can be tedious. First, verify the keystroke combinations and sequence
by using My-T-Soft to perform the Macro, then verify that the sequence is exactly the
same in the Macro entered. Also, when working with Alt, Control, and Shift keys you
must be extra careful that the down and up keystrokes correspond properly to the way the
application expects the keystrokes. For example, to do an [Alt]-F you must use
[Alt-Down]F[Alt-Up]. It may be necessary to use lowercase letters instead of uppercase
to work properly within certain applications. Note that a My-T-Soft Keystroke Macro
character represents a Key-Down, and Key-Up sequence. Finally, make sure that the Caps
lock is in the same state as the Keystroke Macro recording. Also see notes in the
Build-A-Macro section, and Advanced User Information.
11. Why does My-T-Soft Move its position for certain windows?
My-T-Soft senses the active window. When the active window is a certain type of
window, My-T-Soft will act in certain ways, as configured in the initialization file. For
example, My-T-Soft moves off of Windows Dialog boxes, so the information required by
the application is not obscured by My-T-Soft. All of these settings can be modified, but a
certain level of understanding of Windows is required. Refer to Operation Options and/or
Advanced User Information .
20
Chapter 2. Getting Started
Memory
12. How Much Memory does My-T-Soft use while running?
This depends on your screen display colors (16, 256, etc.), and the current My-T-Soft
configuration. Normal operation requires less than 100K RAM. If My-T-Soft runs slow
or you have memory problems see "System Memory Note" in the Advanced User Notes.
13. Is My-T-Soft a TSR (Terminate and Stay Resident)? [the original product was
released so long ago that this was once a commonly asked question - it is left here for
perspective]
My-T-Soft is a normal Windows Application. Nothing stays resident once My-T-Soft is
Closed.
International Operation
14. What do I need to do to operate My-T-Soft with an International Keyboard
layout?
You must select the desired keyboard display for My-T-Soft and then set the proper
keyboard layout in the Windows Control Panel for proper operation.
15. Does My-T-Soft Translate?
No.
Input Devices
16. Can I Operate my Computer without a Keyboard?
Yes, but special BIOS may be required. Most systems allow your computer to boot-up
without a Physical Keyboard - sometimes this isn’t intuitive, and may require settings for
errors rather than the keyboard. As long as Windows is automatically started, you may
run My-T-Soft on a system without a keyboard.
17. Does My-T-Soft require a Mouse?
No, but My-T-Soft does require at least some type of pointing device that emulates a
mouse to the extent that the user can move the cursor and click on at least one button.
Most Touchscreen and Pen drivers support this type of interface. Contact your
touchscreen or pen manufacturer for more information on compatible drivers.
18. Does My-T-Soft require any special drivers?
No. My-T-Soft works with all standard Windows drivers supplied by all well-known
touchscreen manufacturers / dealers.
19. Does My-T-Soft operate with pens, joysticks, touchscreens, digitizer pads, and
other pointing devices?
Yes, as long as they truly emulate the mouse cursor movement and mouse button clicks.
Contact Innovation Management Group, Inc. regarding My-T-Mouse®, My-T-Pen®,
My-T-Touch® & My-T-Soft®.
21
Chapter 2. Getting Started
Customer Support
My-T-Soft Software is backed by a support staff trained to provide you with fast,
courteous service. Over the years, IMG has astounded individuals at the quality of it
software and its support. So that we can continue to focus our resources on development
and providing high-quality products & support, we do appreciate your assistance in
reviewing the help, manual, and support information available at our website to see if the
problem or question has already been addressed. However, if you need assistance beyond
what the manual, tutorial, help files, and on-line support database provide, please contact
IMG Customer Service:
Innovation Management Group, Inc.
Customer Service
179 Niblick Road #454
Paso Robles, CA 93446
USA
1-800-889-0987 (US & Canada)
+1-818-701-1579
+1-818-936-0200 (fax)
<cs@imgpresents.com>
http://www.imgpresents.com
To open a Technical Support case and create a support ticket, please refer to
https://www.imgpresents.com/orders/support/techsupport.htm.
Please provide, or have the following information ready when you ask for assistance:
22
•
My-T-Soft version number, update level.
•
Registered serial number (or if running demo)
•
Make and Model of your computer.
•
Windows version number, any Service Packs or major updates.
•
A description of the problem.
•
If possible, a list of the steps required to recreate the problem.
•
If you have seen an error code, record and report the number.
•
Additional information may be required, such as monitor type, type of pointing device,
amount of RAM in your system, other software running (anti-virus, spyware, virtual
machine, etc.).
Chapter 2. Getting Started
Product Catalog
Innovation Management Group, Inc.’s Products
Commercial Division Products...
Indestructible Keyboards & Indispensable Utilities!
My-T-Soft® Build-A-Board
The Ultimate Tool for creating and modifying On-Screen Keyboards, buttons, and Panels.
My-T-Soft Family, plus Cross-Platform Support
My-T-Pen® for Windows
On-Screen Keyboards & Utilities for Pen Based Systems
My-T-Touch® for Windows
On-Screen Keyboards & Utilities for Touchsreens
My-T-Soft® for Windows
On-Screen Keyboards & Utilities for any pointing device
My-T-Soft® TS for Terminal Services
On-Screen Keyboards for Terminal Server / Terminal Services
TouchRight Utilities
Right Click Access for Pens & Touchscreens
Assistive Technology Division Products...
Enabling Tools for Special Needs
AT Accessibility Suite
IMG’s Assistive Technology Software with site license options
Joystick-To-Mouse
The Software That Lets You Run Windows With A Joystick!
My-T-Mouse®
The Software That Makes Your Mouse a Mouse That Types! Indispensable & Utilities for
any Mouse or Trackball
OnScreen
Special Features for disabled & impaired users Word Prediction / Word Completion /
Window Control / Scanning
OnScreen with CrossScanner
23
Chapter 2. Getting Started
Complete control of Windows from a single switch! Support for Keyboard, Mouse,
Joystick interfaces
SmartClick
Operate Windows without the need to Press/Click a Button
The Magnifier
Area and Full Screen Magnifier, Cursor Locator, Visual Aids
WordComplete
Word Completion, adaptive word prediction, Word List Management, etc. Type Better,
Type Less - we do the rest!
For further information...
Contact your Local Software Dealer
or
Innovation Management Group, Inc.
179 Niblick Road #454
Paso Robles, CA 93446
USA
1-800-889-0987 (US & Canada)
+1-818-701-1579
+1-818-936-0200 (fax)
<cs@imgpresents.com>
http://www.imgpresents.com
http://www.my-t-mouse.com
http://www.my-t-pen.com
http://www.my-t-soft.com
http://www.my-t-touch.com
http://www.onscreen-keyboard.com
http://www.build-a-board.com
http://www.joystick-to-mouse.com
http://www.themagnifier.us
For International Contacts, please see Web Site...
My-T-Mouse®, My-T-Pen®, My-T-Touch® and My-T-Soft® are registered trademarks of
Innovation Management Group, Inc.
24
Part II. Using My-T-Soft
Description of how to operate and
configure My-T-Soft.
Description of how to operate and configure My-T-Soft.
Chapter 3 - My-T-Soft Panels contains general operation information, along with
specific information about each of My-T-Soft’s panels.
Chapter 4 - My-T-Soft Menu outlines the various options accessible from the
My-T-Soft menu, and provides details on sizing, minimizing, saving, and closing
My-T-Soft.
Chapter 5 - My-T-Soft Setup details all of the configuration options and dialogs
available to configure and setup My-T-Soft.
Chapter 6 - My-T-Soft Logon Utilities covers the specific options available for using
the logon utilities that enable using an on-screen keyboard when logging onto Windows.
Chapter 3. My-T-Soft Panels
General Operation
All features and actions within My-T-Soft are performed by moving the cursor / pointer
over the desired button and single clicking the selected button. My-T-Soft may be
repositioned on the screen by clicking anywhere on the background (anywhere that is not
a button) of My-T-Soft and dragging it to the new screen position.
My-T-Soft can also assign a secondary button (if supported by the hardware driver) to
move My-T-Soft. See My-T-Soft Setup Help for more information on how to change your
Mouse Button Assignments.
Themes
Themes use different key images and backgrounds to create a wide range of looks to the
My-T-Soft layouts. The available themes are based on the ThemeList, which lists
sub-folders that contain images and details on a particular theme. You can change the
current theme to the next available theme via the Advanced Features menu, or (if in use),
the Touch Panel. To modify, add, or get more detailed information on Themes, refer to
the Initialization File entries for Theme, ThemeList, and ThemesFolder.
Tool Bar Panel and Keys
My-T-Soft may be configured to operate in a Supervisor or Operator Mode, which
changes the functionality of the Tool Bar. The Tool Bar may be covered or hidden under a
Custom Logo. Consult My-T-Soft Setup, Special Handling and the Advanced User
Information for Details.
The Tool Bar can also be closed, but this is intended as a developer / integrator function.
From the Current Settings | Panels menu you may individually select panels to open and
close. There is also a manual override, available in Panels. When this is enabled, a 3-click
(1-2-3) click combination will toggle the panel - if opened, it will be closed - if closed, it
will be opened. The original design created the Tool Bar as the one panel that can never
be closed, and it is handled differently than the other selectable panels. Allowing it to
close creates certain usability issues, and in certain cases the Control Panel will be
modified to offer other options when the Tool Bar is closed. If the Tool Bar is closed,
resizing and certain other actions will force the Tool Bar open.
27
Chapter 3. My-T-Soft Panels
The Tool Button opens and closes My-T-Soft Control Panel in the normal / Supervisor
Mode. In Operator Mode, the Tool Button does not function.
The Menu Button pops up the My-T-Soft Menu. It allows you quick access to some of the
frequently used options as well as the ability to run My-T-Soft Help. You may also save
your current configuration & screen position from the My-T-Soft Menu . In Operator
Mode, the Menu Button does not function.
The Minimize Button minimizes My-T-Soft to an icon or a button, based on your current
configuration.
Important Note: Disabling the functionality and/or changing the appearance of the
Tool Bar is possible (often used when in the Operator Mode). The Operator Mode is
an Advanced Function. Consult My-T-Soft Setup, Special Handling and the Advanced
User Information for Details.
Control Panel and Keys
The Control panel allows you to open and close all My-T-Soft panels. Click on each key
to perform the toggle action. Blue (highlighted) letters indicate an open panel, black
letters indicate a closed panel.
28
Chapter 3. My-T-Soft Panels
Click on the Tool Button to activate the Control Panel. To prevent the Operator from
accessing this panel, see My-T-Soft Setup, Special Handling and the Advanced User
Notes for Details.
Keys & Functions
Kybd: opens and closes the alpha keyboard panel
Edit: opens and closes the edit panel
Num: opens and closes the numeric panel
Mag: opens and closes the Magnifier panel
SzUp: steps up the size of My-T-Soft currently displayed If the Tool Bar is closed, this
button will change to become Tool. If Tool is clicked on, the Tool Bar will open.
SzDn: steps down the size of My-T-Soft currently displayed If the Tool Bar is closed,
this button will change to become Hide. If Hide is clicked on, the Control Panel will hide.
If the Control Panel is the only button panel opened, this button will change to become
Swap. If Swap is clicked on, the Tool Bar will open, and the Control panel will close.
Help: opens and closes the Quick Help panel
Info: opens and closes the System Information panel
Win: opens and closes the Windows Controls panel
Macro: opens and closes the Macro panel
Calc: opens and closes the Calculator
Exit: exits My-T-Soft and Closes the My-T-Soft Window
Keyboard Panels and Keys
When you click any of the keys on the Keyboard (Alpha) Panel, Edit Panel, and Numeric
Panel, they will respond exactly like the corresponding keystroke on a physical keyboard.
In order to type with My-T-Soft, another window must be the Active Application and
have the input focus. Windows typically indicate where typed characters will be
displayed by the Caret, or text cursor. This usually is displayed as a flashing bar, although
other shapes may be used.
To use combination keys i.e. Shift, Alt, or Ctrl just click on that key. Your cursor will
change and My-T-Soft will display which key is currently locked. For example, if you
have clicked on the Alt key, the cursor will have the word Alt visible. The lock will be
29
Chapter 3. My-T-Soft Panels
released after you click on a normal key, i.e. A-Z keys. You may carry more than one
combination key at a time.
On some international layouts, the right-most Alt key is treated as the "AltGr" key. When
pressed, this key acts as if both the Ctrl key and the Alt key have been pressed, and the
cursor will indicate this combination state. This additional state (e.g. Ctrl & Alt keys both
pressed) allows access to additional letters and keys.
There are numerous layouts available for the keyboard panel, accessible through
My-T-Soft Setup, Keyboards - See My-T-Soft Setup Help for information on available
panels and how to change the current keyboard layout.
You may also select from some pre-defined (included) Build-A-Board custom layouts. To
create your own layouts, you will need IMG’s Build-A-Board.
Keys may be programmed with commands or Macros. See Key Options in Setup and
reference the My-T-Soft Developer’s Kit for more information.
Windows Control Panels and Keys
Click on each button to perform the action described. The keystroke equivalent is shown
in the [brackets]. Page 1 - Windows Controls Desktop Panel
MENU Opens the control (system) menu of the active window. [Alt][Space]
Prop Properties / Opens the Context Menu (if available) [Shift][F10]
NEXT Go to next window and restore window size. [Alt][Tab]
Yes Yes answer. [Alt][Y]
No No answer. [Alt][N]
Tile Tile the windows/icons. [Shift][F4]
FIND Switches through all open windows. [Alt][Esc]
RSTR Restore the window to its former size. [Alt][Space][R]
30
Chapter 3. My-T-Soft Panels
CLOSE Close the active window. [Alt][F4]
MIN Minimize the active window (to an icon). [Alt][Space][N]
MAX Maximize the active window (full screen). [Alt][Space][X]
Casc Cascade the windows/icons. [Shift][F5]
Find Find the next child window. [Ctrl][Tab]
Enter Enter Key. [ENTER]
Close Close the active child window of an active window. [Ctrl][F4]
Rstr Restore the child window to its former size. [Alt][Space][R]
Max Maximize the child window. [Alt][Space][X]
Pg2 Move to Page 2 of the Windows Controls.
Page 2 - Windows Controls Application Panel
UNDO Undo last command. [Alt-BkSp]
CUT Cut highlighted object to clipboard. [Shft-Del][Ctrl-X]
COPY Copies highlighted object to clipboard. [Ctrl-Ins][Ctrl-C]
PASTE Pastes object from clipboard to active window. [Shft-Ins][Ctrl-V]
PPST Pastes object from clipboard to previous window.
PPSTR Pastes object from clipboard to previous window and returns.
FIND Switches through all open windows. [Alt-Esc]
PREV Goes to previous active window (if available).
CLOSE closes active window. [Alt-F4]
MIN minimizes active window (to an icon). [Alt][Space][N]
MAX maximizes active window (full screen). [Alt][Space][X]
RSTR Restore the window to its former size. [Alt][Space][R]
Find find the next child window. [Ctrl-Tab]
Enter Enter Key. [Enter]
Close Close the active child window of an active window. [Ctrl][F4]
Rstr Restore the child window to its former size. [Alt][Space][R]
Max maximize the child window. [Alt][Space][X]
Pg1 return to page 1.
In order to use the PPST and PPSTR functions, you must do the following:
1. These functions work best when you have two windows on your desktop.
31
Chapter 3. My-T-Soft Panels
2. Use the FIND button to select the second window.
3. Verify that both windows are in sequence by using the PREV key.
4. If both windows switch back and forth, then this feature is available.
5. Highlight some text in Window1 and press COPY or CUT.
6. Use PPST to paste to Window2.
7. Use PPSTR to past to Window2 and return to Window1.
8. This feature will continue to be available, until either Window is closed or another
window receives the input focus.
Macro Panels and Keys
The purpose of the Macro Panel is to give you the capability of defining your own buttons
to launch programs, open other Macro Panels, or create keystroke combinations.
In My-T-Soft, a Macro is a sequence of keystrokes or actions tied to a button. The Macro
is initiated by selecting the button.
The main Macro Panel provided has options preprogrammed to show you the vast
capabilities of this panel. For more information see the User’s Guide, or see My-T-Soft
Setup Help (How to create Macros).
Several Example Macro Panels have also been provided. Macro Panels have the ability to
Auto-Open when the appropriate application becomes the active window. The Auto-Open
feature will only operate if the Macro Panel is open on My-T-Soft, and the My-T-Soft
window is not minimized.
32
Chapter 3. My-T-Soft Panels
Calculator Panel
The calculator is a standard four function calculator. To operate simply press the desired
number, press an operation key, press the next number, and press an operation key or the
total (=) key. You may then send the displayed number to the active window by pressing
the SD (Send) button. While there is a number stored in memory, the calculator’s display
window frame will change color to indicate that memory has a value stored.
Calculator Tape
The Tape key will allow you to run a history of any calculations, just as on paper tape and
then you may save it as a file, print it, or import it to another document. If you want to use
the tape, it must be activated BEFORE any operations are performed. Click on the Tape
button to activate. You may also click on the calculator display window to activate &
deactivate the calculator tape. The calculator tape will automatically close if you close the
Calculator Panel on My-T-Soft. If necessary, you will be asked if you wish to save any
information recorded in the Tape.
The Calculator Tape window has a drop-down File Menu which has options to save the
Tape as file, print, or open a previously saved tape. The drop-down Edit menu has the
standard edit functions - Undo, Cut, Copy, and Paste.
Quick Help Panel
The Quick Help panel appears above the currently displayed panels and describes each
key as it is passed over with the cursor. You may open or close the Quick Help panel from
the My-T-Soft Menu or from the Help button on the My-T-Soft Control Panel .
To assign the Quick Help capability to your macros, see How to create Macros in
My-T-Soft Setup Help.
33
Chapter 3. My-T-Soft Panels
System Information Panel
The information panel appears below the currently displayed panels and shows date,
time, system resources, etc. as chosen for display in My-T-Soft Setup. You may rearrange
the order of the information shown by clicking on any item. This will move that item to
first place on the left in the information panel. If you have more than one hard-drive or a
CD-ROM drive, or if you are operating on a Network , use the up-and-down arrows to
display the current free space of each drive.
Time & Date display depend on International display settings set by the Windows
Control Panel.
Magnifier Panel
The Magnifier will display a magnified view of the area where your Cursor (Pointer) is
currently over. The Magnifier Panel magnifies anywhere on the screen and can magnify
between 1x through 10x (2x default). This is very helpful when My-T-Soft is open as a
small board. You still will be able to select all keys by looking at the magnifier. This is
also an aid to the visually impaired. To select a different magnification, slide the cursor
over the Magnifier panel and click - a menu with 1x to 10x selections will appear - select
the desired magnification with the menu.
If you want to display the Cursor inside the Magnifier, run My-T-Soft Setup and click on
"Configuration" | click on "Panels" | check "Display Cursor" On or Off, and click OK.
Note that this is a reference cursor, not the actual cursor visible on the screen.
34
Chapter 3. My-T-Soft Panels
Touch Panel
Touch Panel
The Touch Panel can be enabled / disabled via the My-T-Soft menu. It is primarily meant
for multi-touch capable devices running Windows Vista or later. It will appear on the
right-hand side of My-T-Soft, unless there is not enough room to display the full touch
panel, and there is room on the left-hand side. The logic determining Touch Panel
location included the entire virtual space (for multiple monitors). When enabled, there
are 4 areas that provide different features:
Change Theme
The multi-color (rainbow) area surrounding the blank key can be touched to change the
current theme (based on the ThemeList and available themes).
Multi-Touch
Touch the Multi-Touch area to enable Multi-touch (when enabled, it will be indicated
35
Chapter 3. My-T-Soft Panels
with lighter colored hand display). Using Multi-Touch allows you to press multiple keys
at the same time, especially useful for Shift or Ctrl functions (or using both hands).
Gestures
Touch the Gestures area to enable Gestures (when enabled, it will be indicated with
lighter colored hand display). Using Gestures enables the following options:
•
Pinch/Zoom - Bringing 2 fingers together in a pinch, will result in a size-down event,
and expanding 2 fingers will result in a size-up event
•
Rotate - 2 fingers, one set, the other rotates around will result in a Change Theme event
•
Pan (press and move) - this will slide the My-T-Soft window, or operate like a standard
click & move if you continue pressing
•
Two-Finger-Tap or Press-and-Tap - this will result in a right-click event (default option
is to open the menu, but the right-click event action configurable via My-T-Soft Setup |
Mouse Buttons)
Flicks
When in the normal mode (no Multi-Touch or Gestures), flick events can be sensed and
processed. The standard setting will use vertical or horizontal flicks to move My-T-Soft
to the edge of the screen, or a diagonal flick will result in a minimize event.
Clear / Dismiss / Recall
The large Green touch area will clear (turn off) the current touch mode (Multi-Touch or
Gestures) and operate in the normal mode (Note: Flicks are supported in normal mode).
If the current mode is currently "normal" (no Multi-Touch or Gestures), then a touch will
move My-T-Soft off-screen. When off-screen, a touch will bring My-T-Soft back
onscreen.
Technical Notes on the Touch Panel: For proper Touch Panel integration with the
system, a system requires Windows Vista or later, a multi-touch display, and requires
the existence of the MultiTouchDLL.DLL in the installation folder. (The
MultiTouchDLL.DLL integrates various features and can be modified via the source
code in the IMG Developer’s Kit).
36
Chapter 4. My-T-Soft Menu
The My-T-Soft Menu will give you quick access to the most used functions of My-T-Soft
and Windows System Menu functions. The default operation of the right mouse button
(i.e. second button) will open this menu when it is clicked over the My-T-Soft window.
My-T-Soft Menu
Size
Clicking on Size will open a pop-up menu. You may select Size Up or Size Down to go
up or go down a single size. Here you can select any of the 12 smaller sizes of My-T-Soft.
The current size is indicated with a check-mark.
When larger than Size 12, you may only Size Up or Size Down.
The Screen-Edge Scroll option will have a check mark when Enabled. When Enabled and
a portion of the My-T-Soft window is off-screen, My-T-Soft will scroll back on-screen
when the cursor (pointer) is held at the extreme edge of the screen. This feature may be
useful for larger sizes. NOTE: Certain pointing devices may not react desirably when this
feature is Enabled - select the Screen-Edge Scroll to clear the check mark and Disable
this feature.
Minimize to Icon
Minimize to Button
The check-mark indicates the way My-T-Soft will be minimized, when you click on the
Minimize Button. Select which way My-T-Soft will look when minimized. Note that the
Icon on Taskbar can only be selected via My-T-Soft Setup. If currently at Button and
Minimize to Icon is selected, the Icon option will be used. By clicking on either selection,
My-T-Soft will be minimized immediately.
My-T-Soft Quick Help
Clicking on My-T-Soft Quick Help will open and close the Quick Help panel. The
check-mark will indicate its current status.
My-T-Soft Help!
Clicking on My-T-Soft Help will open My-T-Soft Help (information in this guide).
My-T-Soft Tutorial
Clicking on My-T-Soft Tutorial will begin the My-T-Soft Tutorial.
My-T-Soft Setup
Clicking on My-T-Soft Setup will open My-T-Soft Setup Window.
Current Settings
37
Chapter 4. My-T-Soft Menu
Note: Saving BOTH the Settings and Position is required for returning to the current
layout when closing & restarting My-T-Soft. Refer to the Developer’s Kit notes for
other configuration options, saving, restoring, etc. Settings refers to the current
panels shown, and the current size (the current, visible layout). Clicking on Current
Settings will open a pop-up menu. Here you can select Save Current Settings, or
Restore Settings.
Save Current Settings: This will save My-T-Soft as it appears. My-T-Soft will always
open with this saved configuration.
Restore Settings: If you have changed My-T-Soft and want to return to the saved
configuration, select Restore Settings.
Panels: Clicking on Panels will open a pop-up menu. This allows you to open and close
individual panels. When the panel is already opened, a check mark will be next to the
Panel. If the panel is opened, and you select the panel from the menu, it will close the
panel. If you select a closed panel from the menu, it will open the panel. From this menu,
you may not close a panel if there is only one panel opened.
Position
Clicking on Position will open a pop-up menu. Here you can select Save Position, or
Restore Position.
Save Position: This will save My-T-Soft’s current screen position.
Restore Position: If you have moved My-T-Soft and want to return to the saved
position, select Restore Position.
Set Position: Clicking on Set Position will open a pop-up menu. From this menu you
may select a screen position for My-T-Soft from the options available.
Close
Clicking on Close will close My-T-Soft.
Advanced Features
Selecting Advanced Features will open a pop-up menu. Here you can access some special
features.
Transparency
Clicking on Transparency... will open a Transparency control window, allowing you to
Enable or Disable this feature. When Enabled, you can set the current Transparency level
by sliding the control - to the left is more transparent, to the right is less transparent (or
opaque). The current Transparency level is used if My-T-Soft is closed and then
re-opened.
Transparency Notes: When Transparency is Enabled, the window interface to
Windows changes (Layered Windows), and the following are known issues:
38
Chapter 4. My-T-Soft Menu
• The Magnifier panel can now magnify images under the My-T-Soft window itself,
providing a more intuitive operation.
• When operating with CrossScanner, CrossScanner’s IconWindow will be displayed
below My-T-Soft. It is strongly recommended that Transparency not be enabled if
using CrossScanner.
Manual Tool Bar Control
Clicking on Manual Tool Bar Control will Enable or Disable this capability - when
checked, you can click 3 times on a blank (non-key) area or border, and toggle the Tool
bar Panel - if open, it will close, and if closed it will open. For further info, see notes in
My-T-Soft Setup | Panels.
Tablet PC Input Panel
Note: Windows XP Tablet PC Versions Only - this interface is not available in
Windows Vista / 7.
When operating on the Tablet PC, My-T-Soft can replace the Tablet PC Input Panel.
Clicking on Tablet PC Input Panel will Enable or Disable this capability. When enabled,
clicking on the "Tablet PC Input Panel" on the task bar will toggle the visibility of
My-T-Soft. When enabled, the My-T-Soft Tablet PC Interface will be running, and will
be in the StartUp group.
Note: You must be an Administrator to fully disable the My-T-Soft Tablet PC Interface
(or have sufficient rights to remove the All Users | StartUp group shortcut). When
Enabled, Exit or Close from the Menu will only hide My-T-Soft and My-T-Soft will not
exit with the Developer’s Kit CloseMTS. To fully close My-T-Soft, first disable the
Tablet PC Input Panel option on the Advanced Features Menu, then select Close
from the My-T-Soft menu. For additional information, refer to the PanelWatch in
Advanced User Notes.
Touch Panel
Clicking on the Touch Panel menu option will Enable or Disable the Touch Panel. The
Touch Panel allows options to toggle touch modes (Multi-Touch / Gestures / Flicks),
change themes, and control the visibility of My-T-Soft.
Change Theme
Clicking on the Change Theme menu option triggers a theme change event, which will
update the current theme to the next available theme (based on the ThemeList).
39
Chapter 4. My-T-Soft Menu
40
Chapter 5. My-T-Soft Setup
My-T-Soft Setup - Overview
My-T-Soft Setup provides an easy interface to change options, settings, and the
configuration for My-T-Soft.
Advanced Notes: The files KEYBOARD.KBF and MYTSOFT.INI contain all of the
configuration information for My-T-Soft. There can also be Keyboard Macro files for
customized Macro panels (e.g. MAC?????.KMF) and WordList files. All of these files
are stored in a location determined by the ConfigPath entry in the MYTSOFT.INI file.
(Refer to the ConfigPath entry in the Initialization file for additional information.) This
location determines if the files are per user or shared, and the required permissions
for normal operation. By default, these files are personalized for each user, and the
specific location can be referenced from the File menu in My-T-Soft Setup. You may
also access the Windows Control Panel from the File menu.
In the File menu, you can access Windows Control Panel, view the current folder
location of the configuration files, Import/Export setting files, and Exit.
•
Run Control Panel - This opens the Windows Control Panel to access system level
properties like Appearance, and available Keyboard Layouts. For most users, the
41
Chapter 5. My-T-Soft Setup
Windows Control Panel not required - it is provided here as a convenience.
•
Show Config File Location - This displays the actual path to the My-T-Soft
configuration files for the current user. Refer to the ConfigPath entry in the
Initialization file for additional information.
•
Export Current User Configuration - When selected, and the operation confirmed,
this will save and compress the current user’s configuration files and place a
My-T-Soft_Settings.zip file on the Desktop. This file can be saved as a backup, or
moved to another system to transfer the configuration from one system to another. If
multiple exports are done, each file name will change by adding a "+" symbol to the
export file name.
•
Import Configuration - This will open a File Selection window to select a
"???_Settings.zip". If selected, and the operation confirmed, the current user’s existing
settings will be overwritten and be replaced with the settings contained within the
selected file. For best results, use settings files from the same product & version, and
perform this operation from My-T-Soft Setup while My-T-Soft is closed
•
Exit - this will Close and Exit My-T-Soft Setup.
In the Options menu, each major Setup section can be accessed, along with Save options
when running My-T-Soft.
When My-T-Soft is running and My-T-Soft Setup is opened, the setting Save Settings on
Exit is checked "On" by default. This synchronizes My-T-Soft with the changes made in
Setup and My-T-Soft. If this option is checked "Off" and My-T-Soft is running while
changing settings, the settings will be saved as normal upon an "OK", but these changes
will not be reflected in My-T-Soft until it is restarted.
•
Save After Move - the current settings and position are saved after the completion of a
move. This can be useful to always preserve the current position while operating
My-T-Soft.
•
Save After Change - this saves the settings and position after a size or panel change.
This can be helpful in preserving the current configuration.
•
Save At Close - the configuration and position will be saved when My-T-Soft is
closed. This ensures that My-T-Soft will always open in the last used configuration.
•
Save At End Session - if Windows is shut-down or the user logs off, the current
settings and position will be saved.
Access to Help and the Help Index (i.e. access to this guide) are available from the Help
Menu.
You may also Check for Updates... from the Help Menu in My-T-Soft Setup.
About My-T-Soft... in the Help Menu provides version and release information about
My-T-Soft.
42
Chapter 5. My-T-Soft Setup
Help
Click on the Help Button.
Help brings up the My-T-Soft Help, which offers various views into this guide. Help
includes help for My-T-Soft, My-T-Soft Setup, My-T-Soft Logon Utilities, and Advanced
Notes. Click the Help Button or click Help on the caption bar menu to access the on-line
help screens for My-T-Soft Setup. Each dialog box in My-T-Soft Setup also has context
sensitive Help available by selecting the Help button.
Change My-T-Soft Configuration
Click on the Configuration Button.
43
Chapter 5. My-T-Soft Setup
Within Configuration, you will be able to set conditions that influence how My-T-Soft
will appear and behave on screen.
Minimize My-T-Soft to...
You can select how My-T-Soft will act when it is minimized.
Title Bar Button - In order to minimize My-T-Soft to a Title Bar Button, do the
following steps:
1. Click on the diamond-shaped Radio-Button with the title "Title Bar Button".
2. Press the OK Button.
My-T-Soft now will minimize to a button, which is always attached to the active
application’s title bar (top caption bar). To restore the window back to full size, click on
the button once.
Note: There are numerous customer requested button size & positioning options see detailed information in Initialization File Documentation.
TaskBar Button - In order to minimize My-T-Soft to a Taskbar Button, do the following
steps:
1. Click on the diamond-shaped Radio-Button with the title "Taskbar Button".
2. Press the OK Button.
44
Chapter 5. My-T-Soft Setup
My-T-Soft now will minimize to a button on the Taskbar. To restore the window back to
full size, click on the button on the Windows Taskbar, or right-click and select restore or
maximize.
Tray Icon - In order to minimize My-T-Soft to an icon in the System Tray, do the
following steps:
1. Click on the diamond-shaped Radio-Button with the title "Tray Icon".
2. Press the OK Button.
My-T-Soft now will minimize to an icon in the System Tray (in the area with the clock &
volume control). To restore the window back to full size, click on the small icon in the
task bar, or right-click and select restore.
Window - In order to minimize My-T-Soft to an floating Window, do the following steps:
1. Click on the diamond-shaped Radio-Button with the title "a Window".
2. Press the OK Button.
My-T-Soft now will minimize to a small floating window. To restore the window back to
full size, click on the window. The minimized floating window can be resized and
positioned as desired - when My-T-Soft is minimized, the last position and size of the
minimized floating window will be used.
Operation Options
This will open an Operation Options dialog allowing you to set your preferences while
using My-T-Soft. These include Reacting to Dialogs and other Windows, Typematic
operation, Keystroke / Click option, Virtual Pointer, Action Button Move, Lower Case
display, Track Pointing Device Input, and Key Border.
Key Options
This opens the Key Options dialog where you can select Keys and Key combos (Ctrl,
Shift, Alt) that may be Enabled or Disabled. Additionally, a Key or Key Combo can
launch an executable. In conjunction with the My-T-Soft Developers Kit, this capability
can be used to create new operational features, such as Minimize after the Enter key is
pressed.
Special Options
This opens the Special Options dialog box where Special handling features for Advanced
users, developers, and integrators can be found. Includes the Supervisor/Operator mode
options, and Custom Logo Feature, along with the ability to react to other windows in the
system as they become active (Special Handling), including the ability to launch a
separate executable.
The six buttons in the middle of the dialog box offer additional configuration options for
My-T-Soft.
45
Chapter 5. My-T-Soft Setup
Panels Select the panels which My-T-Soft displays.
Motion Select the motion of your panels.
Size Select the size of My-T-Soft.
Info Select the information displayed in the Information panel.
Colors Select the colors for each panel.
Fonts Select different character display for My-T-Soft.
Display Options
Display 3D Keys - Check this option On to enable the display of the shaded,
three-dimensional look keys. For resolutions of 256 colors or less, it is recommended that
this option be set Off. My-T-Soft checks the current display capabilities when started, and
may override this option. Note that the 3D keys are only displayed for sizes 8 or higher
(the smaller sizes do not have enough displayed pixels to effectively render the 3-D look).
Show & Hide Keys
This opens My-T-Soft in a special mode that allows keys on the main keyboard panel to
be hidden. This is useful for controlled applications where certain keys or key
combinations need to be unavailable - for example, hiding the Alt key makes Alt-F4
impossible. To hide a key, click on the key - My-T-Soft will be repainted without the key
just selected. To re-display a hidden key, click on the space where the key normally
would appear, and the key will be shown again. To Save the current setting, click on OK .
Select CANCEL to ignore any changes. Select Reset to Show All Keys on My-T-Soft.
My-T-Soft Logon Utilities
In order to logon onto Windows & obtain access to Network resources, the appropriate
logon configuration is required within Windows. There are various options available in
My-T-Soft to display & interact with the logon requirements. This opens the appropriate
configuration options for the Windows platform running. See My-T-Soft Logon Utilities
for more information.
Note: In general, when you make changes within My-T-Soft Setup, the changes are
immediate and reflected by My-T-Soft. However, some display option combinations
may require a restart of My-T-Soft for proper display. The logon options typically
require a restart of Windows.
46
Chapter 5. My-T-Soft Setup
My-T-Soft Panel Selection Dialog Box
My-T-Soft lets you select which panels are open every time you start My-T-Soft.
If you want ALL panels to be open every time you run My-T-Soft, click on the "All
Panels" Check-Button.
To allow manual control of opening & closing the Tool Bar, place a check-mark in the
Toolbar Manual Control. When enabled, a 3-click (1-2-3) click on a non-button (e.g.
border or other non-key area) will toggle the Tool Bar to open if closed, and to close if
opened.
You can click on-and-off each individual panel.
The panels with a check-mark will be open each time you start My-T-Soft.
To Display the cursor within the Magnifier, place a check-mark in the Display Cursor
Check-Button.
Press the OK Button.
If you do not want to save your changes, press the CANCEL button.
47
Chapter 5. My-T-Soft Setup
Operation Options
IMPORTANT NOTE: There are various settings here to change how My-T-Soft
operates. If you are having problems typing, see Interface Settings.
React to Dialogs and other Windows (Window Contention)
This is a global setting for My-T-Soft that will change the internal operation of the
software. If set On, My-T-Soft will move off of dialogs, and react to other Windows
based on Special and Macro Panel settings. If set Off, this sensing & reacting to other
windows in the system will be disabled. For certain types of use, having My-T-Soft
remain in a particular screen location at all times and not affecting other windows in the
system is preferred.
IMPORTANT NOTE: My-T-Soft’s automatic sensing for Special & Macro Panel
options will NOT operate if this is set Off.
Enable Typematic Operation
The automatic typing of a character while a particular key is pressed down for a period of
time requires that Enable Typematic Operation be set On. If set Off, this automatic typing
operation is disabled. Specific settings for Typematic operation can be found in the
MYTSOFT.INI initialization file. See Advanced User Information for more details.
48
Chapter 5. My-T-Soft Setup
No Keystroke until Down and Up Click Completed
My-T-Soft reacts like a physical keyboard, and a Click then Drag motion off of a
particular key results in the down and subsequent release of that key, resulting in a
keystroke being generated. To disable this default action, set the option On. Setting this
option On is preferred by users who do not have precise control over the positioning of
the mouse pointer while a click occurs. When set On, Typematic Operation is
automatically set Off to disable multiple keystrokes of the same key. This the forces the
pointing device to complete the Down & Up Click to generate the keystroke initially
selected by the Down click.
Virtual Pointer in Use
This setting should be set On if a the device used to move the mouse cursor (pointer) is
not a standard mouse, or trackball. Any hardware device that interacts via a "device
driver" with Windows should not be considered a Virtual Pointer (unless the
implementation does not fully emulate a standard mouse [which is more common than
otherwise]). Various Assistive Technology devices such as cameras or lasers that track
the eye, other biometric sensors, or other software based translation interfaces (such as
the MouseKeys in Microsoft’s Accessibilities options) when used should have the Virtual
Pointer setting On. This feature forces My-T-Soft to operate slightly differently for
"Clicks" (button down, button up), and during moving the My-T-Soft window.
Alternate Virtual Interface
This setting should be set on ONLY when there are typing difficulties AND the pointing
device does not activate the down/up display of My-T-Soft buttons. This setting may be
required for software interfaces, and other non-physical approaches to operating the
mouse cursor and generating clicks. Older versions of "Joystick-To-Mouse" will require
this to be set On.
Allow Action Button Move
The setting is default On, and it allows the Action button (as set in My-T-Soft Setup,
Mouse Buttons, Action button) to move the My-T-Soft window by clicking on the frame
or any unused area (Click, drag, then release). If the mouse cursor is not always tracked
accurately, it is recommended that this be set to Off to prevent accidental moves. This
may also be set off to prevent the operator from moving the My-T-Soft window (note that
the second and/or third button must be configured properly to ensure the move option is
unavailable).
Note: This option will be automatically disabled if the Key Border is a non-0 value. If
you want this option enabled, be sure to check the Key Border setting.
Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7 (This setting does not apply, and is disabled)
Track Pointing Device Input at all times
49
Chapter 5. My-T-Soft Setup
This setting is default Off, unless Setup senses a known driver or interface that requires
this setting On. If there are any focus problems (i.e. typing [clicking] on My-T-Soft does
not type [send keystrokes] into the currently active window), then this setting should be
set On to see if it resolves this problem. In general, this setting should be Off if at all
possible. See Advanced User Notes for more information on this setting and how it
affects My-T-Soft operation.
Use Upper Case Characters Always (Keyboard Panel)
By default, lower case characters are displayed on the Keyboard (Alpha) panel, unless the
Shift or Caps lock is engaged. Check this option On to force Upper Case display at all
times.
Key Border (# of pixels inside key edge ignored as key press)
This setting is used to reduce the area of each key that can register a press. For maximum
effect, the default setting is no border area. As the Key Border values increase, the pixels
inside each edge (top, left, bottom, right) are removed from the area of the key that will
react to a click. Because of the differing sizes of the panels and keys, this setting may
affect certain size ranges differently. It is recommended that the particular size for usage
be selected first, and then the desired Key Border be set to match the current size.
Note: My-T-Soft automatically sets the "Allow Action Button Move" to Off when there
is a border in use (greater than 0). This prevents the undesirable move when clicks &
releases are not accurate due to either software driver or operating conditions.
Interface Settings
These are the steps that should be tried if you are having difficulties typing with
My-T-Soft.
1) The following settings are the preferred options:
Virtual Pointer in Use = On
Alternate Virtual Interface = Off
Track Pointing Device Input at All Times = Off
2) If you are working with a Touchscreen or a Pen, and when tapping on My-T-Soft, you
observe the buttons being pressed, but the active application (where you are trying to type
into) becomes inactive, try setting Track Pointing Device Input at All Times to On.
Virtual Pointer in Use = On
Alternate Virtual Interface = Off
Track Pointing Device Input at All Times = On
50
Chapter 5. My-T-Soft Setup
3) If you are working with a virtual, assistive, or another non-hardware pointing device,
and when clicking on My-T-Soft, you do not observe the buttons being pressed, set the
Alternate Virtual Interface to On
Virtual Pointer in Use = On
Alternate Virtual Interface = On
Track Pointing Device Input at All Times = Off
Other Notes
The Virtual Pointer in Use should ONLY be set Off if you are using a physical mouse, or
a device that interfaces like a physical mouse. The device MUST support the
GetAsyncKeyState for the VK_LBUTTON & VK_RBUTTON. In general, there is no
negative aspect to having this setting On even if you are using a physical mouse.
The Alternate Virtual Interface overrides the Track Pointing Device Input at All Times,
so there is never a case where they BOTH would be On.
If you are still having difficulties with My-T-Soft after trying the above, check the device
settings to see if there are other options available - it is possible it is operating in a mode
that is not compatible with other Windows programs. You may also wish to test with a
physical mouse to see if the pointing device is truly emulating a mouse pointer.
If you continue to have difficulties, please contact Technical Support.
Key Options
Key Options offers customization capabilities for keys on the main Alpha Keyboard
Panel and the Edit panel. Keys may be disabled, assigned to other functions, and can be
51
Chapter 5. My-T-Soft Setup
re-mapped using the Launch Key EXE in conjunction with the Developer’s Kit (e.g. the
Esc key could be re-mapped to send Alt-F4).
Select Key
This Drop-Down list allows you to select the specific key you wish to work with. The
number in parentheses is the internal ID used by My-T-Soft for the key’s position. Refer
to the Build-A-Macro Notes for more details on these internal IDs.
Select Key Modifier (Key with...)
This Drop-Down list allows you to select a specific key combination (i.e. Ctrl-Alt-Delete)
for the currently selected Key. All combination options are available. Note that with the
proper setting, you can disable Ctrl-F1, but not F1, or just disable Alt-F4, or Shift-Esc.
Due to the complexity of available applications, each possible option for each key is
given. See the Key Display (below) which is a quick visual aid to see if a particular key
has any enhanced settings.
Key Display
This is a visual aid only. When it is 0 (zero), there are no enhanced key settings in use.
All keys are Enabled, and there is no Launch setting on. Any non-zero display means that
at least one enhanced key setting is selected for the currently selected Key.
Clear
This button will remove all enhanced settings for the currently selected key. All
keystrokes will be Enabled, and any Launch settings will be removed (No Additional
Action will be selected to every possible keystroke). This will not remove the Key EXE
entry, but this is disabled since all Launch settings will be cleared.
Enable Keystroke(s) / Disable Keystroke(s)
This defines the state of the particular key and its current modifier (Ctrl, Shift, Alt). If
Enabled, then My-T-Soft will generate & send the keystroke. If Disabled, then the
keystroke(s) will be removed and no action by My-T-Soft will occur when the particular
keystroke(s) is/are initiated by the user. Note that this action is independent of the Launch
Key EXE capability.
No Additional Action / Launch Key EXE
In general, the No Additional Action for any keystroke is the typical setting. Due to
customer requests, we have added the capability of also initiating other actions tied to
specific Keystrokes. By using the My-T-Soft Developers Kit, these (or any other
developer selected action) can be tied to a particular keystroke or combination. Some of
these requested capabilities are:
- Minimize to button upon Enter (type Enter, then minimize = Enter Key Enabled,
Launch MINMZMTS.EXE)
- Ctrl-Alt-Delete restarts system (Ctrl-Alt-Delete Launches NTRSTART.EXE)
- Alt-F4 cannot close window (Alt-F4 Disabled)
52
Chapter 5. My-T-Soft Setup
- Make F1 run special Application Help program tied to a different key (F1 Key Disabled,
Launch SDSTRMTS.EXE with appropriate alternate keystroke used)
This adds a great deal of flexibility to the general keyboard (similar to the capabilities of
the Macro panels), but it also creates a greater chance of confusion. These should only be
used when implementing a system for only 1 type of use. In general, these settings are
potentially more dangerous then helpful. Wondering why the keyboard disappears
everytime you press Enter is certainly not the end goal of productivity - so please be
extremely careful when using these options, and document any changes for developers to
come and for your users!
Key EXE
This is an Executable file that will be run if the "Launch key EXE" option is selected for
the particular Key Combination. Note you may add command line options, but be sure to
click on OK when you are through editing the selection.
Browse
This button will open a File Open Browse Dialog that will let you explore your system to
select an executable. Because of backward compatibility, only short path & file names are
used.
It is strongly recommended that only Developer Kit EXEs be used.
My-T-Soft Special Handling Dialog Box
53
Chapter 5. My-T-Soft Setup
Important Note: This dialog box contains advanced user options. In general, most
users should ignore these settings.
Select Special Options:
Some Windows applications do not conform to pre-defined Windows standards, or
require special handling to work along with My-T-Soft. Some known applications are
included in the Pull-down box box on the left. On the right, click on a Radio-Button to
select the action each application should perform to work along My-T-Soft. You may add
new Applications by typing the name in the top box on the left. This will add the
Application Name to the list. Once selected, choose one of the options on the right to
indicate how My-T-Soft should react when the selected Application becomes active. To
delete an entry, highlight the entire selection, press the Delete key to remove the text, and
then press Enter to remove the entry from the list.
Minimize to Button
When My-T-Soft overlaps the Application, a "Goto Button" command will minimize
My-T-Soft to a Button.
Minimize to Icon
When My-T-Soft overlaps the Application a "Goto Icon" command will minimize
My-T-Soft to an Icon.
Move Off Application
This will move My-T-Soft below the Application Window. Note that based on window
size and My-T-Soft size, areas may be moved off screen.
Hide
This option currently matches the Minimize to Icon.
Resize
This will move My-T-Soft off the window, and resize the Application so that it occupies
the rest of the screen area above My-T-Soft.
Ignore
This option is meant for the user who may want different actions based on changing
circumstances, and may not want special action during a period of time.
Run EXE
The ability to Run an Executable file adds great flexibility, and should be used in
conjunction with the My-T-Soft Developers Kit. The executable file is run once until
another executable is launched via My-T-Soft (typically when some other window
becomes active that is in the Special Handling list). Primarily this is meant to be used to
position or reconfigure My-T-Soft as different windows become active (different web
pages, different applications, etc.). My-T-Soft only checks the Active window when it is
54
Chapter 5. My-T-Soft Setup
open normally (NOT as an Icon or Button). Also, the React to Dialog and other Windows
in Operation Options can override these settings.
Browse
This button will open a File Open Browse Dialog that will let you explore your system to
select an executable. For maximum compatibility, only short path & file names are used.
When the Run EXE is updated, it is also saved for the currently selected "Application
Window Text". If you wish to modify the entry (e.g. add command line options), you
must then click on OK to save these changes.
Notes on Application Window Text & Advanced Notes
The entire Caption bar (or entire Window Name) is searched for a match, starting in the
order of the Special List. Any part of the window name will match, therefore being
specific is important. This substring match can cause problems, especially if the Window
Text is common, e.g. "Word" will match WordPad, Microsoft Word, WordPerfect, etc.
Because each entry is checked regularly by My-T-Soft, it can affect system operation as
the list grows. This list should be used sparingly with extreme care, and only when using
the Developers Kit within a separate Application is not an option.
Edit My-T-Soft Initialization file:
Pushing this button will allow you to directly edit the contents of the My-T-Soft
initialization file. Caution: Editing the .INI file can cause My-T-Soft to operate
incorrectly! Know what you are editing. Refer to the My-T-Soft User’s Guide section on
the Initialization File for complete coverage of this option.
Return to Installation defaults:
If you would like to return all options to the original defaults, press this button. This will
replace the current initialization file (MYTSOFT.INI) and the configuration file
(KEYBOARD.KBF) with the files from the time of original installation. EVERYTHING
will be reset to the configuration at that time (i.e. the time immediately after installation).
Enable Operator Security
To Enable Operator Security, Check this option on. When Enabled, operation of
My-T-Soft is limited in the following ways:
- The Operator may not operate the Tool Button to access the Control Panel
- The Operator may not open the My-T-Soft Menu
- The Operator may not open Build-A-Macro from the Main Macro Panel
- Access to My-T-Soft Setup is controlled via a Password.
Note: The Default password is PASS. If you decide to change the password, be sure to
record the new password for future reference!
General "Operator Security" Notes
55
Chapter 5. My-T-Soft Setup
Configure My-T-Soft so that the open panels, size, and colors are optimized for the
application. In general, the Control Panel should be closed, as the "Operator Mode" does
not disable the actions of this panel. If the Macro Panel is open, make sure that all Macro
Panel links, launched applications, etc. do not allow the user access to areas that need to
be secure. Once My-T-Soft is configured properly, position the My-T-Soft Window where
desired, and the from the My-T-Soft Menu select Current Settings, Save Current Settings,
and then select Position, Save Current Position. Open My-T-Soft Setup, and Select
Configuration, Special, Enable Operator Mode Security, then select OK. Close My-T-Soft
& My-T-Soft Setup. When My-T-Soft is run in the future, it will appear as configured,
and the user will not be able to modify the configuration without the My-T-Soft Setup
Password. For more detailed coverage of other built-in features, consult the My-T-Soft
User’s Guide.
Disable Operator Minimize
This option will only work if Operator Security is Enabled. If this option is On, then the
minimize button on the Tool Bar will also be disabled. Useful for specific applications,
and in conjunction with the Custom Logo.
Use Custom Logo
If this option is On, My-T-Soft will load an optional Custom Logo Bitmap (.BMP) file
located in the installation directory. This is a developer / integrator option, and specific
details are in the My-T-Soft User’s Guide, Advanced User Information and Logo notes in
the Developer’s Kit. Also see info on IMG’s web site
(http://www.imgpresents.com/imgdev.htm).
My-T-Soft Panel Motion Dialog Box
Panel Motion
56
Chapter 5. My-T-Soft Setup
Choose "Snap-Out Panel" and My-T-Soft’s panels will snap in & out. The new
configuration will be displayed without intermediate displays.
Choose "Slide-Out Panel" and My-T-Soft’s panels will slide in & out. The new
configuration will be displayed with a visual effect of motion.
Press the OK Button.
If you do not want to save your changes, press the CANCEL button.
My-T-Soft Size Selections Dialog Box
The size Dialog box allows you to select which size My-T-Soft will be displayed each
time you start the program.
NOTE: This is not available if My-T-Soft is using a size larger than 12 (infinite sizing).
For sizes larger than 12, you must use SzUp & SzDn from the My-T-Soft Control Panel.
Each of the 12 pictures show the approximate size of My-T-Soft. In order to select a size
for My-T-Soft, do the following steps:
1. Click on the picture of the size you want My-T-Soft to be.
2. Press the OK Button.
If you do not want to save your changes, press the CANCEL button.
NOTE:
57
Chapter 5. My-T-Soft Setup
You can change My-T-Soft’s size also directly from the My-T-Soft Control Panel or
select a new size from the My-T-Soft Menu.
Oversize Window Options
Oversize refers to the state when the My-T-Soft window is wider than the screen display
width. These are the options available here to accommodate the user.
Enable Screen-Edge Scroll
When the My-T-Soft window (keyboard display window) is larger than the actual display
(e.g. My-T-Soft is wider than the screen width), select this option to enable the automatic
scroll when the mouse pointer (cursor) is held at the edge of the screen. If My-T-Soft is
off-screen at that edge, it will automatically scroll completely into view when this option
is checked On.
System Information Display Dialog Box
The System Information Dialog Box allows you to select which options are to be
displayed in the Information Panel:
This is the System Information Panel.
You can click on-and-off each individual Check-Button. The options with a check-mark
will be displayed each time you start My-T-Soft. To Sort the display, either add
individually or click on the item in the System Information window to move the item to
the front of the list (leftmost).
Press the OK Button.
If you do not want to save your changes, press the CANCEL button.
58
Chapter 5. My-T-Soft Setup
My-T-Soft Colors Dialog Box
Select Color Source Select "Use System Colors" to use the Windows scheme (available
in Display Properties, Appearance)
NOTE:
When System Colors are used in conjunction with 3D keys, only pure RGB colors are
allowed. (RGB - Red, Green, Blue - 3 values between 0 and 255 indicating the amount of
Red, Green, or Blue used to "build" a color - this is sometimes referred to as 24-bit color
(3 x 1 byte <=> 3 x 8 bits = 24 bits) - pure RGB means a value of either 0 or 255 (no bits
set, or all bits set)) Due to the shading & desire for a clean appearance, preservation of
the system color is not possible (disable 3D keys to see actual system color). The
following algorithm is used to create a "pure" RGB color: The system color is split into
the 3 RGB components, and then the smallest value is subtracted away from all elements,
leaving 0, 1, or 2 positive values - these then are used to determine use of a solid color
(i.e. value of 255) or no color (i.e. a value of 0). This is used as the "background" of the
shaded keys. In most cases, this is in the same color scheme as the System Colors. You
may adjust the Windows Appearance, "Display 3D keys", or revert back to "Use Panel
Colors" to review the various display options.
Select "Use Panel Colors" to use My-T-Soft Colors. My-T-Soft colors allows you to
customize My-T-Soft by coloring each panel’s keys and buttons.
Panel Colors
In order to color a My-T-Soft panel, do the following steps:
Select Panel to Color
59
Chapter 5. My-T-Soft Setup
1. Choose among the seven panels.
2. Click on the diamond-shaped Radio-Button of the panel you wish to color.
Select Item to be Colored
1. Click on the diamond-shaped Radio-Button of the part of the button you wish to
color. You may also Click on the appropriate area of the oversized button on the right.
2. Click on a color that is provided below (16 colors) to select the color.
3. The item you have selected will change its color, and show you a preview of the in
the oversized button window.
4. Repeat this process for all button parts you want to color.
Once you are finished coloring one panel, you either press OK Button to save, or select
another panel to color. If you select another panel to be colored, the previous colored
panel will change its colors immediately.
Use current Colors on all Panels
If you want your current selected colors to be the colors for all panels, press this button.
Set Panel Colors to Default
If you want to return one or all your panels to their default colors, press this button. To
change one panel back to default colors, do the following steps:
1. Click on the diamond-shaped Radio-Button of the panel you wish to change.
2. Click on "Set Panel Colors to Default" button.
3. The colors will return to default.
To change all panels back to default colors, do the following steps:
1. After completing 1-3 above, press "Use current Colors on all Panels".
2. All panels will change to default colors.
Keyboard Background
To Select Keyboard Background Color
Use the Keyboard Background Button to change the color of the keyboard background &
frame.
60
Chapter 5. My-T-Soft Setup
My-T-Soft Background Colors Dialog Box
This Dialog Box allows you to switch the colors of the My-T-Soft panels. The following
panels will be affected:
1. Alpha Keyboard Panel
2. Edit Panel
In order to select a color for My-T-Soft panels, do the following steps:
1. Click on the picture of the color you want My-T-Soft to be. A black frame will
appear around your selection.
2. Press the OK Button.
If you do not want to save your changes, press the CANCEL button.
61
Chapter 5. My-T-Soft Setup
Fonts
IMPORTANT NOTE:
The Font capabilities of My-T-Soft are limited for a variety of reasons. These limited
options have only been included as a specific solution for a small subset of customers.
Use My-T-Soft Build-A-Board for more complete control over the appearance.
Base / Medium / Large Selections
Sizes 1-6 are the Base sizes. For almost all uses, the MyTMouse font is the best choice.
Medium Sizes are 7-9.
Large Sizes are 10-12.
Select Button for Base / Medium / Large
Each button selects the corresponding size range font. A System Font Selection dialog is
available to select from installed fonts.
Only the (Font) Face Name is preserved.
Character Set for Base / Medium / Large
For MyTMouse, use 22. For most others, 0 is the best choice (ANSI). Symbols use
character set 2. Other choices are:
ANSI_CHARSET = 0
DEFAULT_CHARSET = 1
SYMBOL_CHARSET = 2
MyTMouse = 22
MAC_CHARSET = 77
62
Chapter 5. My-T-Soft Setup
SHIFTJIS_CHARSET = 128
HANGEUL_CHARSET = 129
HANGUL_CHARSET = 129
JOHAB_CHARSET = 130
GB2312_CHARSET = 134
CHINESEBIG5_CHARSET = 136
GREEK_CHARSET = 161
TURKISH_CHARSET = 162
VIETNAMESE_CHARSET 163
HEBREW_CHARSET = 177
ARABIC_CHARSET = 178
BALTIC_CHARSET = 186
RUSSIAN_CHARSET = 204
THAI_CHARSET = 222
EASTEUROPE_CHARSET = 238
OEM_CHARSET = 255
1 Character Size Adjust for Base / Medium / Large
This setting refers to the amount subtracted from the available area of the key (total
pixels) used to display the font character. Even though it strongly affects key displays of
1 character (i.e. alphanumeric keys on the Keyboard (Alpha) panel), it does have some
effect on all buttons displayed. In some ways, this is similar to the Key border concept in
Operation Options - the only use for this value is in calculating the best point size for the
key display.
Select Keyboard Layouts
Click on the Keyboards Button.
63
Chapter 5. My-T-Soft Setup
My-T-Soft can operate with many different keyboard layouts. By selecting the same
keyboard layout that Windows uses, you can synchronize the display on My-T-Soft with
the characters generated in your application.
The main US keyboard layout is called the 101 United States Standard (sometimes called
the QWERTY layout (for the top left row of keys)). To change to a different US
Keyboard layout, do the following:
1. On the right-hand side of the dialog, Select a layout by clicking on its name.
2. Press the OK Button. (If you do not want to change the current layout, press the
CANCEL button).
Some Special US Layouts
Dvorak Standard
Dvorak Left Handed
Dvorak Right Handed
My-T-Easy - alphabetically ordered (ABC) keyboard layout
Note: The special US layouts will only operate correctly with the US Standard layout
selected in Windows.
In order to change the My-T-Soft keyboard layout to another language, do the following
steps:
64
Chapter 5. My-T-Soft Setup
1. Select a language (layout) by clicking on its name.
2. Press the OK Button. (If you do not want to change the selected language, press the
CANCEL button).
Important: This process will only change the My-T-Soft keyboard layout. If you wish
to change your physical keyboard layout, you must change your Windows driver from
the Windows Control Panel (available in Keyboard Properties, Layout).
For proper font display & typing, you may need to set Regional Settings (available in
Regional Settings).
For additional notes, see Keyboard Layouts & Windows and see Advanced Notes on
Keyboard Layouts.
When an International keyboard is selected, My-T-Soft offers the option to run the
Windows Control Panel. On some International layouts, the right [Alt] key becomes a
combination [Ctrl][Alt] keystroke, and may be labeled [AltGr].
Important: Many non-US layouts incorporate an additional key not available on the
101 layouts. In almost all cases, the recommended and supported layout is the 104
layout for any non-US selection. In some cases, only the 104 layout has been
updated.
Additional Keyboard Notes:
Note: Some layouts date back to Windows 3.1/Windows 95. These layouts are
labeled "(old)". For later releases of Windows, these layouts may not match changes
to the current keyboard layouts in Windows. Some layouts may only operate correctly
under Windows 95/98 - refer to the layouts available in your version of Windows to
select which layout to use in My-T-Soft.
The old layouts are included as a reference & reminder that keyboard layouts are not
as consistent as one might believe. Because manufacturers have flexibility in
keyboard layouts (e.g. look at different laptop keyboards), constant changes to the
underlying operating system, and there are no specific international standards that
can be used as a reference, a keyboard layout can only be viewed as snapshot in
time. And for all we know, these "old" layouts may one day be useful again. Refer to
Developer Kit utilities for further information on Keyboard layouts, and refer to IMG’s
Build-A-Board for full keyboard layout customization capabilities.
Asian layouts require fonts for the East Asian languages - on some versions of Windows,
these are not installed automatically - refer to Regional and Language options in Control
65
Chapter 5. My-T-Soft Setup
Panel for adding these supplemental files. Note that the Asian languages may not be
supported at all in certain versions of Windows!
Some layouts are designed for operation in the localized versions of Windows. Arabic,
Greek, Hebrew, Russian, & Central / Eastern European layouts may not correctly display
all characters if a different ANSI code page is in use.
Typical users operate with only 1 keyboard layout, but it is possible to switch between
active layouts for various applications in Windows. To automatically have My-T-Soft
synchronize with changes to the active layout in Windows, refer to the KeyboardSync
utility in the Developer’s Kit.
Select Custom Build-A-Board Layouts
There are a few sample, custom Build-A-Board Layouts available. Additional
Build-A-Board layouts can be created, and when placed in the Installation Folder will be
added to this list. When selected, the KEYBOARD.KBF in the users configuration folder
is replaced with the selected layout. When My-T-Soft is run, the layout is recognized, and
the Build-A-Board compatible run-time (MYTSOFT2.EXE) is used to operate with the
version 2.x keyboard layouts.
Using Build-A-Board Layouts: Custom Build-A-Board layouts are displayed by
MYTSOFT2.EXE (which is a completely different executable program), and as such,
the configuration options documented for My-T-Soft are not referenced or used by the
Build-A-Board based executable. All configuration options available for Build-A-Board
layouts are controlled via Build-A-Board, and contained within the 2.x version layout
file (KeyBoard File (KBF File)). The support for Build-A-Board custom layouts is
available as part of the license to My-T-Soft to add even more flexibility and utility to
66
Chapter 5. My-T-Soft Setup
the My-T-Soft product. However, a separate license for Build-A-Board is required to
obtain all the capabilities of Build-A-Board. For continuity and name recognition, the
trademarked name My-T-Soft is used for both the newer Build-A-Board layouts (2.xx
version) and original software (1.xx version), along with the fully encompassing
My-T-Soft Family.
Keyboard Layouts & Windows
Windows has various Regional & Keyboard Layout settings, and these are best managed
within the Windows Control panel. Changing the Keyboard in My-T-Soft only affects
My-T-Soft. Proper operation of the selected layout may depend on the version of
Windows, your current Keyboard Layout, and Regional (International) settings.
If you wish to change the physical keyboard layout used by Windows, you must change
your Windows driver from the Windows Control Panel (available in Keyboard Properties,
Layout). You may be required to have your Windows CD (or original installation media)
when loading a previously unused keyboard layout.
For proper font display & typing, you may need to set Regional Settings (available in
Regional Settings).
NOTES:
When an International keyboard is selected, My-T-Soft offers the option to run the
Windows Control Panel.
On some International layouts, the right [Alt] key becomes a combination [Ctrl][Alt]
keystroke, and may be labeled [AltGr].
My-T-Soft keyboard layouts include the characters displayed on My-T-Soft and the
low-level keyboard scancodes (scancodes are the hardware level information about which
key was pressed). Most keyboard layouts are similar, but if you experience improper
display or incorrectly typed characters, you must verify the My-T-Soft layout, Windows
Keyboard Properties, and Windows Regional Settings.
Font character set, AltGr handling, and the Lowercase display setting are automatically
updated when required for keyboard layouts selected through My-T-Soft Setup. Refer to
Advanced Notes on Keyboard Layouts for additional documentation.
Font & Character set issues can be referenced in Fonts.
Advanced Notes on Keyboard Layouts
Keyboard Layouts & Specific Notes
Notes:
67
Chapter 5. My-T-Soft Setup
The keyboard language/layout must be changed for the keyboard to type correctly based
on the Windows Keyboard Layout, Windows Regional settings, and the displayed Layout.
Most users operate on one version of Windows, and are used to one keyboard layout.
After selecting the layout when they first configure My-T-Soft, they may never return to
the Keyboard Layout selection again. This is what the objective was for the design &
approach to handling keyboard layouts in My-T-Soft. Changing the keyboard layout in
My-T-Soft only affect My-T-Soft’s display & operation. To synchronize the display and
operation with Windows, both My-T-Soft and Windows must be set to the same layout.
During the various updates in Windows versions, keyboard layouts have changed. Keys
have been moved/added, internal scan codes changed, etc. It is important to note there is
no standards body that determines what a particular keyboard layout should be.
Technically, it is left up to the manufacturer to determine the physical keyboard layout
(e.g. look at different keyboard layouts on laptops/notebooks/desktops). Microsoft must
support these different hardware implementations, and also is involved in layout
modifications (e.g. adding keys, such as the Windows Key). The end result is that the
keyboard layout files must be viewed as dynamic and may be different between one
version of Windows and the next. If you experience a problem with a layout, please
contact technical support, or refer to our Developer’s Corner
(http://www.imgpresents.com/imgdev.htm) for options available.
Regional Settings (Refer to notes below)
Optional = the Regional Settings doesn’t have to change for showing the correct labels.
Suggested = the Regional Settings has to change for showing the correct labels
Char Set numbers has to be changed in My-T-Soft to matching keyboard language/layout.
There are several settings that take affect when the keyboard is selected through
My-T-Soft Setup. The appropriate character set is automatically selected, the status of
whether or not the software should handle the AltGr keystroke is set, and the setting for
whether or not the Lowercase display is allowed on the keyboard panel is set for some
layouts. Because of display issues, these settings have been pre-set for various layouts.
Refer to Advanced User notes and the setting for KeyboardUpdate (in initialization file
description), and see manual setting below for additional details on the actual
implementation.
In some cases, the logic behind the upper/lowercase display causes minor display issues
with certain layouts - these issues are documented under the layout.
Arabic
Char Set = 178
Belarusian
Regional Settings = Belarusian (Suggested)
Keyboard Language/Layout = Belarusian/Belarusian
68
Chapter 5. My-T-Soft Setup
Char Set = 204
Bulgarian
Regional Settings = Bulgarian (Suggested)
Keyboard Language/Layout = Bulgarian/Bulgarian
Char Set = 204
Bulgarian (Latin)
Regional Settings = Bulgarian (Suggested)
Keyboard Language/Layout = Bulgarian/Bulgarian (Latin)
Char Set = 204
Croatian
Regional Settings = Croatian (Suggested)
Keyboard Language/Layout = Croatian/Croatian
Char Set = 238
Czech (Qwerty)
Regional Settings = Czech (Suggested)
Keyboard Language/Layout = Czech/Czech (Qwerty)
Char Set = 238
Czech
Regional Settings = Czech (Suggested)
Keyboard Language/Layout = Czech/Czech
Char Set = 238
Estonian (Code Page might not be fully supported by some version of Windows)
Regional Settings = Estonian (Optional)
Keyboard Language/Layout = Estonian/Estonian
Char Set = 186
Suggested Font: MS Sans Serif
Greek
Regional Settings = Greek (Suggested)
Keyboard Language/Layout = Greek/Greek
Char Set = 161
Hebrew
Char Set = 177
69
Chapter 5. My-T-Soft Setup
Hungarian
Regional Settings = Hungarian (Optional)
Keyboard Language/Layout = Hungarian/Hungarian
Char Set = 238
Irish
Regional Settings = English (Ireland) (Optional)
Keyboard Language/Layout = English (Ireland)/Irish
Char Set = 0
Korean
Regional Settings = Korean
Keyboard Language/Layout = Korean (IME)
Char Set = 129
On the 104 layout, the key above the enter and next to the right-shift appear the same.
The correct letter is displayed in Windows Vista/7, but not in Windows XP. The 2 keys
generate different virtual keys (220 & 226), but both generate the same character.
Latvian (Latin) (Code Page might not be fully supported by some version of
Windows)
Regional Settings = Latvian (Optional)
Keyboard Language/Layout = Latvian/Latvian (Latin)
Char Set = 186
Latvian (Code Page might not be fully supported by some version of Windows)
Regional Settings = Latvian (Optional)
Keyboard Language/Layout = Latvian/Latvian
Char Set = 186
Polish
Regional Settings = Polish (Optional)
Keyboard Language/Layout = Polish/Polish
Char Set = 238
Polish Programmer
Regional Settings = Polish (Optional)
Keyboard Language/Layout = Polish/Polish
Char Set = 238
70
Chapter 5. My-T-Soft Setup
Romanian
Regional Settings = Romanian (Suggested)
Keyboard Language/Layout = Romanian/Romanian
Char Set = 238
Russian
Regional Settings = Russian (Suggested)
Keyboard Language/Layout = Russian/Russian
Char Set = 204
Slovak
Regional Settings = Slovak (Suggested)
Keyboard Language/Layout = Slovak/Slovak
Char Set = 238
Slovak (Qwerty)
Regional Settings = Slovak (Suggested)
Keyboard Language/Layout = Slovak/Slovak (Qwerty)
Char Set = 238
Turkish (F Type)
Regional Settings = Turkish (Optional)
Keyboard Language/Layout = Turkish/Turkish (F type)
Char Set = 162
Turkish (Q Type)
Regional Settings = Turkish (Optional)
Keyboard Language/Layout = Turkish/Turkish (Q type)
Char Set = 162
HOW TO SETUP ADDITIONAL KEYBOARD LAYOUTS MANUALLY
Make sure the My-T-Soft keyboard is closed during these steps!
Step 1) Copy All (or the appropriate) KYBD????.KMF file to the My-T-Soft Installation
folder
\Program Files\MYTSOFT
Step 2) Modify the MYTSOFT.INI file
Important: Refer to the ConfigPath entry in the Initialization file to determine which
MYTSOFT.INI file is the correct file to modify!
71
Chapter 5. My-T-Soft Setup
- My-T-Soft Setup | Configuration | Special Options | Edit Initialization File
- Find the Keyboard=? setting in the [Configuration] section (top of file)
- Change to the appropriate numbered keyboard layout
Layout Numbers
The values 1-96, and 101-196, and any 200+ entries listed are valid, and are related as
follows:
01 = U.S. Standard, 02 = U.S. Dvorak Standard, 03 = U.S. Dvorak Left-Handed, 04 =
U.S. Dvorak Right-Handed, 05 = U.S. My-T-Easy (ABC) Alphabetic Keyboard, 06 =
Belgian (comma), 07 = British, 08 = Canadian Multi-lingual, 09 = Danish, 10 = Dutch, 11
= Finnish, 12 = French, 13 = French Canadian, 14 = German, 15 = Icelandic, 16 = Italian,
17 = Latin American, 18 = Norwegian, 19 = Portuguese, 20 = Spanish, 21 = Swedish, 22
= Swiss French, 23 = Swiss German, 24 = U.S. International, 25 = Hungarian (Old), 26 =
Belgian (period), 27 = Arabic, 28 = Belarusian, 29 = Bulgarian, 30 = Bulgarian (Latin),
31 = Croatian, 32 = Czech (Old), 33 = Czech (Qwerty), 34 = Estonian, 35 = Greek, 36 =
Hebrew, 37 = Hungarian, 38 = Irish, 39 = Latvian, 40 = Latvian (Latin), 41 = Polish
(Old), 42 = Romanian, 43 = Russian (old), 44 = Slovak, 45 = Slovak (Qwerty), 46 =
Turkish (F type), 47 = Turkish (Q type), 48 = Spanish (Mexico), 49 = U.S. Fazekas, 50 =
U.S. Chubon, 51 = Slovenian, 52=Japanese, 53 = Chinese, 54 = Korean, 55 = French
(Belgian), 56 = French (Luxembourg), 57 = German (Austrian), 58 = German
(Leichtenstein), 59 = German (Luxembourg), 60 = Spanish (Argentina), 61 = Spanish
(Bolivia), 62 = Spanish (Chile), 63 = Spanish (Columbia), 64 = Spanish (Costa Rica), 65
= Spanish (Dominican Republic), 66 = Spanish (Ecuador), 67 = Dutch (Belgian), 68 =
Dutch (Netherlands), 69 = Italian (Switzerland), 70 = Norwegian (Bokmal), 71 =
Portuguese (Brazilian), 72 = Spanish (Guatemala), 73 = Spanish (El Salvador), 74 =
Spanish (Honduras), 75 = Spanish (Modern Sort), 76 = Spanish (Nicaragua), 77 =
Spanish (Panama), 78 = Spanish (Paraguay), 79 = Spanish (Peru), 80 = Spanish (Puerto
Rico), 81 = Spanish (Uruguay), 82 = Spanish (Venezuela), 83 = English (Australian), 84
= English (New Zealand), 85 = English (Jamaica), 86 = English (United Kingdom), 87 =
Chinese (Cangjie), 88 = Canadian Multilingual, 89 = Polish, 90 = Polish Programmer, 91
= Thai, 92 = U.S. Plum, 93 = Russian (Cyrillic), 94 = Danish (ABC), 95 = U.S. (Numpad
Enter), 96 = Czech, 97 = Belgian (period), 101-197 are the 104 key layouts matching the
above, 200 = 104 British (1st alternate), 201 = 104 British (2nd alternate), 202 = 104
Hebrew (Alt.), 203 = 104 Chinese (Zhuyin) (Alt.), 204 = 104 Arabic (Alt.)
- Save the file
Step 3) Change the Font / Character Set
- My-T-Soft Setup | Configuration | Fonts
- See above for character set numbers
Step 4) Verify Windows Keyboard Layout & Regional Settings
72
Chapter 5. My-T-Soft Setup
Step 5) Close My-T-Soft Setup, run My-T-Soft
Build-A-Macro
Click on the Build-A-Macro Button.
My-T-Soft lets you create your own Macros to work within Windows and DOS in a
Window. In My-T-Soft, a Macro is a sequence of keystrokes or actions tied to a button.
The Macro is initiated by selecting the button.
A virtually unlimited number of user-defined panels can be created. Each panel can group
keys that support actions such as: Application macros, Commands, Keystroke sequences,
names, addresses, pre-defined paragraphs, letters, and even launch Programs.
Click on the Select Macro Panel Pull-down box to choose an existing panel.
Click on Add A Panel to add a new panel.
Click on Delete Panel to delete the current panel.
Click on Document Panel to create documentation for the selected panel.
73
Chapter 5. My-T-Soft Setup
Click on Document All Panels to create documentation for all Macro Panels.
The selected Macro Panel is displayed on the right. Click on the top button to modify
features & properties of the Macro Panel, and click on any button to create / edit the
Macro triggered by that button. The Main Macro Panel cannot be deleted, however all of
its keys may be changed (except the panel (top) key).
Advanced Notes: The panels included have been setup with various options to help
illustrate the functions available. They may be changed or deleted as you desire.
When running My-T-Soft, clicking the top panel of the Main Macro panel will open
My-T-Soft Setup and go directly to Build-A-Macro. This is useful for fast macro panel /
button changes. Macro Panels may be nested up to ten levels. Clicking on the top
button of a nested panel will return to the previous panel, which is a shortcut for
advanced users. In general, it is better to use a button to indicate the panel to open.
Limitations
There is an upper limit of 2000 characters maintained by the Build-A-Macro section of
My-T-Soft. This amount was arbitrarily selected as enough keystrokes to do just about
any kind of task. Note that one character can result in as many as 10 keystrokes being
required to generate the character via the selected active keyboard layout in Windows.
Therefore it is possible that a large amount of text may overflow the 32000 bytes reserved
for these macros (i.e. 3 bytes per keystroke x 10 keystrokes x 1000 characters). If these
limits are reached during macro operation, the following issues may be relevant:
•
Not all characters may be generated from the saved Macro
•
The Shift, Alt, and Ctrl keys may be in an undefined state.
•
Any additional keystrokes or macros may not operate properly until the Shift, Alt &
Ctrl keys are synchronized to the system.
•
Only characters not represented by the active keyboard layout require may push these
limits - either limit the macro character size to under 500 characters, or select a more
appropriate keyboard layout for the characters required.
Steps to create a new Macro panel and insert a new Macro.
Click on Add a Panel.
In the new dialog box, add a 5 character identifier, for example Word.
In the Macro Panel Description, enter some information for your own use, for example
Word for Windows.
Press the OK Button.
On the right side of the dialog box, a blank Macro panel will appear.
Click on the first button (top left corner).
74
Chapter 5. My-T-Soft Setup
A new dialog box opens. Here you define your Macro Button.
First, enter a key label, for example Open.
Under Key Description [Quick Help], enter what you would like to appear in the quick
help bar on top of My-T-Soft.
Under This Key will... select which option you would like the button to perform.
In this case, you want to launch an application.
Click on Launch an Application.
If you do not know the correct path for your application, find the applications executable
file by using the browse button.
Click on the OK Button.
Verify your action.
Steps to create a keystroke Macro.
•
Press on the next empty button.
•
Under key label, enter "PreVu".
•
Under description, enter "Shows a Print Preview".
•
Click on Activate Keystroke Macro.
•
Click on Zoom.
Here you will create your keystroke Macro.
•
Use the up-and-down arrows to select the appropriate keystrokes.
•
In this case, double-click on Alt-Down to insert the keystroke (i.e. pressing the Alt
button down).
•
Now, double-click on the letter F.
•
Now, release the Alt button by double-clicking on Alt-Up.
•
Finally, double-click on the letter v.
•
This Macro will bring up the Print Preview while running MS Word!
•
Click on the OK Button.
•
Verify your action.
75
Chapter 5. My-T-Soft Setup
Information on Advanced Macro Editing
When working with Macro Panels, there are various advanced options available to
manage the panels, including documenting every detail of the panel (or panels) as a text
file.
Add-A-Macro Dialog Box
Macro Panel ID
Enter a five letter identifier for your new Macro Panel.
This identifier will appear on the top button or your new Macro Panel.
Macro Panel Description
Enter a description for your new panel. This description will appear in the Quick Help
bar when activated.
Click on the OK Button to save the current options.
Click on the CANCEL button to Close the & cancel the Add operation.
Once you have added a panel, it will be automatically selected for editing.
76
Chapter 5. My-T-Soft Setup
Delete-A-Macro Dialog Box
Delete this Macro Panel?
The Macro panel named in the box below Macro Panel ID will be deleted.
Warning
Use with extreme caution. Once the panel is deleted, it cannot be
recovered! Press the OK Button to Delete the Selected Macro
Panel. If you do not want to delete your panel, press the CANCEL
button.
Note: You cannot delete the Main Macro Panel.
Document Macro Dialog Box
77
Chapter 5. My-T-Soft Setup
The documentation will correspond to the selected Macro Panel.
Post to Clipboard
Click on this button to Post the Panel Documentation onto the Windows Clipboard. You
may then paste the textual information into any word processor, or other application that
uses text.
Save to File
This will open the File Save Dialog which will allow you to save the textual Panel
Documentation to a file & save the information to disk.
Press the CANCEL button to Close the Dialog & cancel the documentation operation.
Document All Macros Dialog Box
The documentation contains All Panel documentation for All Macro Panels.
Post to Clipboard
Click on this button to Post the All Panel Documentation onto the Windows Clipboard.
You may then paste the textual information into any word processor, or other application
that uses text.
Save to File
This will open the File Save Dialog which will allow you to save All the textual Panel
Documentation to a file & save the information to disk.
Press the CANCEL button to Close the Dialog & cancel the documentation operation.
Documentation File Save Dialog Box
You may simply enter the name of the file name you wish to save in the File Name box
on the left, or select the file name from an existing file in your system. Once you have
entered or selected the name, click on the OK Button to save the file. Press the CANCEL
button to Close the Dialog & cancel the File Save operation.
78
Chapter 5. My-T-Soft Setup
Macro Key Dialog Box
Key Identifiers
Enter a key label. This label will appear on the key in the Macro Panel. Enter a key
description. The key description will appear in the Quick Help bar.
This key will...
Activate Keystroke Macro
Click on this Radio-Button if you want to create a Macro consisting of keystrokes. Use
the edit box below (Keystroke Macro) to enter your Macro, or press Zoom to use the
Macro Editor. You may use any Windows supported ANSI characters.
Note: As keys are entered, characters are treated as both the press and release
events. Case is preserved, and Caps Lock is assumed OFF when playing back the
macro. Therefore, using lowercase characters is preferred. If a Keystroke macro is
initiated with the Caps Lock on, then the Macro WILL be affected and the end-result
may not be as originally intended!
Open Macro Panel
Click on this Radio-Button if you want to open another panel. Enter the Macro name in
the edit box below (Macro Panel), or press Select to select an existing Macro Panel.
Launch Application
79
Chapter 5. My-T-Soft Setup
Click on this Radio-Button if you want to assign an application to your Macro button.
Enter the application name and path in the edit box below (Application), or press Browse
to select an application. You may also enter a Working Directory, which will be the
current directory used by the Application once it is launched. Short file names are used
for maximum compatibility.
User Notes / Details
You may enter helpful information, notes, or details regarding the settings for this key.
This is used only for reference and will appear on the Panel Documentation.
Cut, Copy, Paste, Undo
These shortcut keys may be used to manipulate the text. This may help you enter
information & interact with other Windows applications.
Copy Key, Paste Key, Clear Key
These shortcut keys may be used to manipulate & operate within My-T-Soft Setup /
Macro Key Editing. For example, you could Copy Key information from an existing
panel to be pasted into another Macro Panel.
Click on the OK Button to save the current options.
Click on the CANCEL button to Close the Dialog & cancel any changes.
Macro Panel Dialog Box
80
Chapter 5. My-T-Soft Setup
When you click on the top button of a Macro Panel in My-T-Soft Setup, you may edit the
Panel settings for the current Macro Panel.
Panel Label
Enter a panel label. This label will appear on the top key in the Macro Panel.
Enter a panel description. The panel description will appear in the Quick Help bar, if it is
open.
This panel will...
Open
Click on this Radio-Button if you want to open this Macro Panel. This means no
additional action will occur when the panel is opened.
Open and launch Application
Click on this Radio-Button if you want to assign an application to this Macro Panel.
Enter the application name and path in the edit box below (Application), or press Browse
to select an application. You may also enter a Working Directory that will become the
current directory when the Application is launched. When accessed, the panel will open
& then automatically launch the application.
Open When Window Active
Click on this Radio-Button if you want your Macro Panel to be open as soon as the
application is opened. Enter the application name in the edit box below Window Name,
or press Select to choose from currently active windows. You MUST take the Window
name from the caption bar of your application. It MUST appear exactly as on the caption
bar. For example, the caption bar title for this help file is "Macro Panel Dialog Box". The
name entered should not have information including a current file name, or open
document. You may also shorten the name to provide additional functionality. For
example, if you enter the name as "Word", the Macro Panel will automatically enter when
the Microsoft Word, WordPad, or WordPerfect is active.
Note: Because of the system memory required for this operation and constant
monitoring, it will affect the system speed!
User Notes / Details
You may enter helpful information, notes, or details regarding the settings for this panel.
This is only used for reference and to appear on the Panel Documentation.
Cut, Copy, Paste, Undo
These shortcut keys may be used to manipulate the text. This may help you enter
information & interact with other Windows applications.
Copy Panel, Paste Panel, Clear Panel
81
Chapter 5. My-T-Soft Setup
These shortcut keys may be used to manipulate & operate within My-T-Soft Setup / Panel
Editing. For example, you could Copy Panel information from an existing panel to be
pasted into a newly created panel.
Click on the OK Button to save the current options.
Click on the CANCEL button to Close the Dialog & cancel any changes.
Macro Zoom Dialog Box
Key Label
Key label will show which button is currently edited.
Key Description
Enter a detailed description (will appear on Quick Help).
In order to create a keystroke Macro follow these steps:
There are six vertical selection lists in the bottom left corner of the dialog box. Select &
double-click to add to the Keystroke Macro.
82
•
Use the up-and-down arrows to select the appropriate keystrokes, then double-click to
enter into the Keystroke Macro.
•
For example, double-click on Alt-Down to simulate pressing the Alt button down.
•
Now, double-click on the letter F.
•
Now, release the Alt button by double-clicking on Alt-Up.
Chapter 5. My-T-Soft Setup
•
Finally, double-click on the letter v.
•
This Macro [Alt-Down]f[Alt-Up]v will bring up the Print Preview while running MS
Word!
You may edit the Keystroke Macro directly in the Edit window. You may wish to refer to
the Advanced User Notes for options & details regarding the keystroke macros.
Reserved words in brackets [ ] will only function properly when typed exactly! They may
be used to indicate combination keystrokes. For example, to execute Ctrl-S it must appear
as [Ctrl-Down]s[Ctrl-Up]. This allows you to execute more than one character with the
combination key depressed.
NOTE: For proper operation, you must have EVERY keystroke required! (Don’t forget
[Enter]) If the macro does not operate as desired, review & verify that each keystroke and
the sequence of keystrokes is accurate. Also make sure that the correct Application is
Active when the Macro is initiated.
There are seven buttons with standard editing options:
CUT - Cuts the highlighted portion of a Macro.
COPY - Copies the highlighted portion of a Macro.
PASTE - Pastes the highlighted portion of a Macro (must be preceded by a CUT or
COPY).
DELETE - Deletes the highlighted portion of a Macro. (UNDO will not recover!)
UNDO - Undoes the previous operation (like a CUT OR DELETE).
SELECT ALL - Selects the whole Macro.
OPTIONS - Changes to a different set of seven editing buttons.
There are seven buttons with advanced editing options (Useful if you are pasting in text
from other applications):
CLEAR ALL - Clears the editing Window, even if nothing is highlighted. (Erases the
entire macro).
CR - Changes carriage returns to [Enter]. (ANSI character 13)
CRLF - Changes carriage return-line feed to [Enter}. (ANSI characters 13 10)
TAB - Changes tab to [Tab]. (ANSI character 9)
STRIP - Strips all ANSI characters. (Removes all non-ANSI characters from text)
ALL - Does all of the above (CRLF, TAB, STRIP)
EDITING - Returns to the previous seven buttons.
The Open and Save buttons are available as conveniences for developers using the
MACROBAT and other IMG utilities. These will use the Zoom Edit screen as an the
Editing area - Open will open, read, and place the contents of a previously Saved Macro
into the Zoom Edit area. The KMF (Keyboard Macro File) format is used.
83
Chapter 5. My-T-Soft Setup
The special selections [Time], [Date], and [Pause] can be used as follows: [Time] and
[Date] insert the current system time as formatted via the System Information panel
(formatted as set in the Windows Regional Settings).
[Pause] inserts an "empty" keystroke in the sequence of keystrokes. This is a special
option along with other specialty macros otherwise undocumented.
Click on the OK Button to save the current options.
Click on the CANCEL button to Close the Dialog & cancel any changes.
Macro Select Dialog Box
Use the up-and-down arrows or your Mouse to select one of the existing Macro panels.
Press Enter, or click on OK Button.
Click on the CANCEL button to Close the Dialog & cancel any selection.
84
Chapter 5. My-T-Soft Setup
Active Window Dialog Box
This list shows all of the current active windows running on your system. You may select
the Window Name from the list. You may wish to modify the name to remove any open
documents, or other information that may change. My-T-Soft must have an exact match
to recognize the need to automatically open the Macro Panel.
Once you have found the name double click on it or highlight your selection & click on
the OK Button. Press the CANCEL button to Close the Dialog & cancel the Select
operation.
Browse Programs Dialog Box
This opens the My-T-Soft Browse that allows you to select from available programs on
your system. Short file names are used for maximum compatibility. Once you have found
the name of the program to run double click on it or highlight your selection & click on
the Open Button Press the Cancel button to Close the Dialog & cancel the Browse
operation.
Configure your Mouse Buttons
Click on the Mouse Buttons Button
85
Chapter 5. My-T-Soft Setup
Important: The term Mouse is used generically for any pointing device that moves
the cursor (mouse pointer) within Windows. For Pen and Touchscreen drivers, often
only 1 button is available (Left Button): In all cases, the Left Button should be
selected as the Action button.
My-T-Soft lets you define functions for all your Mouse buttons (2 or 3 button Mice). This
can make you work more efficiently by eliminating frequently used tasks and key
combinations.
Select Mouse Button to use on My-T-Soft Here you define which button on your Mouse
is going to be used as a point-and-click button. This button will be the execution button.
Select Type of Mouse
If you have a two-button Mouse, click on 2-Button Mouse. If you have a three-button
Mouse, click on 3-Button Mouse.
Note: If you have a three button Mouse, be sure that you are loading the correct
driver. If you are loading a two-button Mouse driver with a three-button Mouse, you
will not be able to use the middle button. Go to Windows Control Panel | Mouse to
install a different Mouse driver.
Mouse Button Action Pull-down Boxes In order to assign a different function to the
My-T-Soft Mouse buttons, do the following steps:
1. Click on the down-arrow of the 1st Pull-down box.
86
Chapter 5. My-T-Soft Setup
2. Use the scroll-bar to scroll up and down within the Pull-down box.
3. Select a function by clicking on its name.
4. Press the OK Button.
5. Repeat the steps 1-4 on the 2nd Pull-down box.
6. Press the OK Button.
7. If you do not want to change the current Mouse buttons setup, press the CANCEL
button.
This functionality is only available while your Mouse pointer is over My-T-Soft.
Some of these actions are:
1. Ignore the button press (no reaction at all)
2. Move My-T-Soft around the screen (click and drag)
3. Look Thru My-T-Soft (while holding the button down you will be able to see the
screen behind My-T-Soft)
4. Open the My-T-Soft Menu
5. Minimize My-T-Soft
6. Choose from a list of single or combination keystrokes, such as [Enter], [F1],
[Alt-F4], etc.
Select the Cursor and Icon
Click on the Cursors & Icons Button
87
Chapter 5. My-T-Soft Setup
My-T-Soft enables you to select different Cursors and different Icons for use with
My-T-Soft.
Cursors
There are 12 Cursors available; 4 right-handed, 4 left handed Cursors, and 4 specialty
Cursors. They are on the right side, titled "Cursors". In order to select a Cursor, do the
following steps:
1. Click on one of the 12 cursor pictures; it will be framed by a black rectangle.
2. Press the OK Button.
3. If you do not want to change the current layout, press the CANCEL button.
Note: For Touchscreen & Pen based systems, the "Blank" or "Invisible" cursor should
be used if other applications do not show a cursor when in use. Otherwise, select the
most appropriate cursor from those available.
Icons
There are 3 Icons available. They are on the left side titled "Icons". In order to select an
Icon, do the following steps:
1. Click on one of the 3 Icon pictures; it will be framed by a black rectangle.
2. Press the OK.Button.
3. If you do not want to change the current layout, press the CANCEL button.
Note: The Icon is only used for the Minimize to Icon option in Configuration.
88
Chapter 5. My-T-Soft Setup
Exit My-T-Soft
Click on the Exit Button
This will exit My-T-Soft Setup and Close the My-T-Soft Setup Window.
89
Chapter 5. My-T-Soft Setup
90
Chapter 6. My-T-Soft Logon Utilities
My-T-Soft Logon Utilities Overview
The My-T-Soft Logon Utilities enable complete operation from a pointing device,
allowing secure logons to network & workstations via the on-screen keyboard interface.
Because of fundamental differences in operation and security between the Windows 2000
/ XP and Windows Vista / 7 platforms, please refer to the appropriate sections when
referencing the Logon Utilities. For support on Windows 95/98/Me & Windows NT,
please refer to version 1.77 or earlier.
Important Notes
•
The proper configuration and implementation of this utility requires a user with
Administrator rights
•
Proper licensing is required or the Logon module will revert to a demonstration and
eventually disable itself
•
All configuration should be done via the My-T-Soft Logon Utilities program accessible
from the Program Menu for My-T-Soft
•
In Windows Vista, Microsoft completely changed the approach used for Logon, and no
longer supports the GINA interface used for 2000 / XP. Refer to the My-T-Soft Logon
Utilities for Windows Vista / 7 below.
My-T-Soft Logon Utilities for Windows Vista / 7
The My-T-Soft Logon Utilities for Windows Vista / 7 have been provided to bring
flexibility to the implementation of Pen and Touchscreen systems without requiring a
physical keyboard. By using the My-T-Soft Logon Utilities, the following benefits can be
realized:
•
Consistency in the user interface
•
Flexibility for different screen resolutions and user interfaces
•
Secure Logon operation without the need for a physical keyboard
•
Control of user input options may provide additional security (e.g. limiting keyboard
layout in conjunction with other logon authentication tools)
In addition, the Automatic Logon option has also been incorporated as a convenience
within this utility, allowing a fixed user/password combination to start up Windows Vista
/ 7 without any user interaction required.
91
Chapter 6. My-T-Soft Logon Utilities
Important Notes
•
The proper configuration and implementation of this utility requires a user with
Administrator rights
•
Proper licensing is required or the Logon module will revert to a demonstration and
eventually disable itself
•
All configuration should be done via the My-T-Soft Logon Utilities program accessible
from the Program Menu for My-T-Soft
Setup / Configure Logon Utility
There is 1 option available - Setup / Configure Logon Utility (My-T-Soft 2 Keyboard
Logon)
The My-T-Soft 2 software used which allows customized layouts of the logon keyboard,
an the My-T-Soft 2 approach enables the use of a My-T-Soft 2 keyboard during the
secure logon sequence. The keyboard can be modified with IMG’s "Build-A-Board"
(ANSI 2.10 version).
There is 1 section available with 2 options
•
Use Onscreen Keyboard at Logon Screens
Use Onscreen Keyboard for data entry
When Enable Onscreen Keyboard Logon is checked "On", the default logon options
are used, but the My-T-Soft (version 2) keyboard is displayed within the secure logon
screens. The keyboard layout may be modified with IMG’s "Build-A-Board." See below
for options specific to the My-T-Soft 2 Keyboard.
Use Onscreen Keyboard for data entry
My-T-Soft 2 Keyboard options
92
Chapter 6. My-T-Soft Logon Utilities
There are 2 approaches available when My-T-Soft 2 is selected for displaying the
keyboard layout (i.e. what the user sees). My-T-Soft 2 is the next generation of the
popular My-T-Soft keyboards, and has a more flexible approach to designing and
operating keyboard layouts. To address customers who want customized and specialized
layouts, My-T-Soft 2 can read Build-A-Board layouts (ANSI 210) along with Original
KBF files (layouts for My-T-Mouse, My-T-Touch, My-T-Pen, My-T-Soft and OnScreen).
There are 3 generic Build-A-Board layouts provided - Small Keyboard, Medium
Keyboard, and Large Keyboard. Small works well for pen system and Large is better
for touchscreens & fingers, but the actual resolution of the display will determine the best
choice.
There are also 2 options available for dealing with Original layouts (NOTE: These
layouts only display the alphabetic portion of the keyboard). Select Default 101,
Current language to use a preset standard 101 keyboard configuration with the currently
selected language/layout in My-T-Soft/My-T-Touch/My-T-Pen. If you need a different
size, you have the option of selecting Copy of Current Layout to copy the current saved
layout. This current saved layout is the KEYBOARD.KBF in the installation directory.
To update the layout, run My-T-Pen/My-T-Touch/My-T-Soft, select a different size, then
open the menu (middle-button of tool bar), and select Current Settings | Save Current
Settings. Run the Logon Utilities, and select Copy of Current Layout, then click OK (this
will copy the KEYBOARD.KBF into the LOGON folder).
Enable CTRL+ALT+DEL Logon Utility
When enabled, a utility with a screen displayed large red button is used and available at
the separate Ctrl-Alt-Del screen. It is important to understand this is not a security
solution, but a utility for systems that need to operate in situations where security policies
have machines that display this screen. It is recommended that the Ctrl-Alt-Del
requirement be removed (see below for further information and how to configure a
system to remove this screen). In instances when a system will display the
CTRL+ALT+DEL screen, this Logon Utility can be enabled, and will provide a way for a
touchscreen/pen based user to generate the system notification and bypass the screen.
Note: User Account control must be enabled (it cannot be Off) for the system to
generate the Secure Attention Sequence (SAS). Also, the system SAS.DLL must be
present on the system (Included with Windows 7 - Windows Vista users should apply
Service Packs or refer to Microsoft)
Technical Notes
The My-T-Soft 2 option for the Logon portion of Windows Vista / 7 uses MTS2.EXE, a
special build of My-T-Soft 2 for this usage. The layout displayed by My-T-Soft 2 is the
KEYBOARD.KBF file in the LOGON folder under the installation directory. The above
options in the Logon Utilities handle this manipulation for you. If you use Build-A-Board
to create your own layout, you will want to copy your "built" layout into the LOGON
93
Chapter 6. My-T-Soft Logon Utilities
folder, AFTER selecting the My-T-Soft 2 option in the Logon Utilities. Note that if you
re-run the Logon Utilities, and click OK on the Setup/Configuration screen, your "built"
layout will be copied over! For reference, or if you want to take over the pre-built layouts,
this lists the file names and their associated selection in the Logon Utilities:
Small Keyboard = LOGON\KEYBOARD.SML => LOGON\KEYBOARD.KBF
Medium Keyboard = LOGON\KEYBOARD.MED => LOGON\KEYBOARD.KBF
Large Keyboard = LOGON\KEYBOARD.LRG => LOGON\KEYBOARD.KBF
Default 101 = LOGON\KEYBOARD.ORG => LOGON\KEYBOARD.KBF
Copy of Current Layout = KEYBOARD.KBF => LOGON\KEYBOARD.KBF
Note: ConfigPath changes - The Setting of ConfigPath in the Initialization file can
change where the Copy of Current Layout uses when copying the "current" layout.
This is based on the ConfigPath setting and the current user. In general, the default,
and any ConfigPath setting other than ConfigPath=0 will result in copying the current
user’s layout and INI into the Installation Folder. This will also have a result of creating
a new "default" layout & configuration (e.g. KEYBOARD.KBF and INI file), which will
consequently be used for any new users running the My-T-Soft software on the
desktop (assuming they don’t already have a current configuration). In other words, if
the Copy of Current Layout is selected, from then on the Logon layout AND the
default My-T-Soft layout will be this Current Layout when ConfigPath is set to anything
but 0. For further details on ConfigPath, see the Initialization File Documentation.
The Small Keyboard layout project (Build-A-Board 2.10) is included as
KEYBOARD.ZIP in the LOGON folder. The larger layouts were simply resized &
cleaned up with a larger font selected.
Older KBF/KMF support
My-T-Soft 2 can read & operate older (i.e. pre-version 2.00) layouts, and this approach is
used for the "Original Layout" selections. This option is included for 2 main reasons. 1)
Easier way to select different sizes, and 2) Match selected keyboard layout in both Logon
and Desktop operation. For example, if you have a Dutch layout on your desktop, when
one of these options is selected, the same layout (i.e. KMF) will be used for the Logon
keyboard.
Note: There are some limitations with the My-T-Soft 2 handling of older layouts:
The Shift-AltGr states require selecting Shift, then AltGr.
Caps-Lock display always uses the Shift label, and some keys may show an incorrect
label vs. the character generated by the keystroke.
The default font will not handle non-ANSI layouts correctly.
94
Chapter 6. My-T-Soft Logon Utilities
Positioning
If you do not have Build-A-Board, and wish to change the opening position of the
Small/Medium/Large Build-A-Board layouts, there is a basic utility called
KBFLOGON.EXE in the LOGON folder. You can access this by clicking on Update
Opening Position (Build-A-Board Layouts). By running this utility, you can change the
opening X / Y position of the current selected Build-A-Board layout to match your screen
orientation & resolution.
Original layouts are treated differently, and are centered horizontally and position at the
bottom of the screen. The KBFLOGON.EXE will not affect this positioning, and should
not be used for these layouts.
Advanced Technical Notes: In Windows Vista / 7, the older GINA WinLogon
interface was removed, and a more flexible "Credential Provider" interface was
created. The DLL that manages and runs the My-T-Soft software (keyboard) in the
logon context is the IMGLogonProvider.DLL. (Note: for 64-bit systems, this must be a
native 64-bit compiled DLL - 1.78 Release 4 provided a user-installable update, and
the 1.79 includes both 32-bit & 64-bit versions). The Credential Providers are listed
as classes in the registry at
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Authentication\Credential
Providers, and the class ID for the IMGLogonProvider.dll is
{CEE78DCC-539B-4b6c-B829-21D189C5112F} This entry must be in place, and the
CLSID entries in the HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT must also be set for proper operation
and integration into the system via the Credential Provider interface.
Ctrl-Alt-Del requirement
In the Windows NT/GINA model, the Ctrl-Alt-Delete special keyboard sequence
created a Secure Attention Sequence (SAS). In the newer Windows Vista / 7 security
model, the Ctrl-Alt-Delete is a separate screen. This added security is for the physical
keyboard only - if the virtual keyboard is allowed to bypass this screen, no additional
security improvement results. You can simply disable it via Local Security Policy - see
Control Panel | System Maintenance | Administrative Tools | Local Security Policy Local Policies | Security Options | "Interactive Logon: Do not require
CTRL+ALT+DEL" | Enabled. You can also use Start Menu | in the search box, type
netplwiz[Enter], and refer to the Advanced tab. Alternatively, to quickly access the
setting, use the Start Menu | then type secpol.msc[Enter], then go into Local
95
Chapter 6. My-T-Soft Logon Utilities
Policies | Security Options and find the setting for: "Interactive Logon: Do not require
CTRL+ALT+DEL", and set to Enabled | OK.
The reason the keyboard sequence Ctrl-Alt-Delete was chosen is the keyboard
interface (going back to the original IBM PC) generates a hardware interrupt for this
keystroke combination. In a secured system, the ONLY way this hardware interrupt
could occur is if someone was physically at the keyboard, pressing those keys.
Because of the physical security this provided (i.e. a remote user could not generate
this sequence), this became the event that trigged the logon request for user
name/password.
In the newer logon model, if the user via the virtual keyboard can bypass this screen,
there is absolutely no additional physical security (i.e. on a system where the
physical keyboard will NOT be used to bypass this screen). The only change is the
extra screen step. The critical issue to understand is no security benefit occurs if a
software only option is allowed to mimic/bypass this hardware interrupt based event it ends up being just another screen. The real issue is security vs. expectations of
security, and human inertia (i.e. familiarity with the older GINA approach). If there is
just an expectation, or inertia, that the Ctrl-Alt-Del provides real security when
accessed via the touchscreen keyboard (or the CTRL+ALT+DEL Logon Utility), then
it is important to review and understand the architecture and structure & and security
provisions within a Windows Vista / 7 based system.
If a physical component is necessary (and you do not or can not use the physical
keyboard), then for a true/secure approach, a smart card, biometric, or other physical
approach may be required. There really is no additional "security" that the keyboard
software can provide (with or without the Ctrl-Alt-Del requirement).
Configure Automatic Logon for Windows Vista / 7
96
•
Open My-T-Soft Logon Utilities from Start Menu | (All) Programs | My-T-Soft
•
Select Setup Automatic Logon
Chapter 6. My-T-Soft Logon Utilities
There are 3 options available
1. Enable Auto Logon
2. Default Logon Name
3. Default Password
The Name and Password fields are disabled unless the Enable Auto Logon is checked On.
Check Enable Auto Logon On to enable the automatic logon of the Default User / Default
Password combination. You must enter a valid User Name along with the proper
Password to ensure proper operation of the Automatic Logon.
Notes:
•
If the Default User Name has a blank Password, this option will only work once - the
next time you turn on the system, the Name / Password Logon screen will appear. A
Password must be entered to ensure proper operation of the Automatic Logon.
•
You must have Administrator Rights to update the system with any changes.
Technical Notes: This section and settings are just a convenient user interface to
registry settings specified by Microsoft (dating back to Window NT) to allow an
automatic user logon. There are security issues - check with a System Administrator
if there are any questions about using this convenience feature. There are 3 entries
affected by this section: DefaultUserName, DefaultPassword, and AutoAdminLogon
in the HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE/Software/Microsoft/Windows
NT/CurrentVersion/WinLogon registry key. When enabled, AutoAdminLogon=1, and
when disabled, AutoAdminLogon=0. The DefaultPassword entry is stored as plain
text. For an automatic logon, AutoAdminLogon=1, and a valid DefaultUserName with
correct DefaultPassword must be set.
97
Chapter 6. My-T-Soft Logon Utilities
98
Part III. My-T-Soft Technical
Documentation
Advanced User Notes, Technical
Documentation, File Information,
and various Other Information about
My-T-Soft.
Chapter 7 - Advanced User Notes details additional product information, Final Release
Notes, Technical Notes, Developer information, product history, and Customer
Suggestions.
Chapter 8 - Files & File Notes & Installation Information lists all files, general
information, location, along with usage details. Additional Installation Information is
also included here.
Chapter 9 - Operation Notes is a collection of specific issues, advanced notes, and
additional documentation on Build-A-Macro, Command Line options, Sounds, and
Build-A-Board support.
Chapter 10 - Initialization File Documentation provides comprehensive technical
documentation on all the configuration settings available in the MYTSOFT.INI file, along
with other advanced user notes.
Chapter 11 - Error Messages and Numbers lists all internal errors, number references,
and possible solutions if these errors are experienced.
Chapter 7. Advanced User Notes
Advanced User Notes & Information
The Advanced User Notes and Technical Documentation covers a wide-range of topics &
information. It is important to understand that most users will simply type with the
software, so detailing all of the features, options, settings in the standard product help
would overwhelm the majority of users.
Note: For up-to-date information, and other specific technical issues, it will always be
important to refer to the on-line support database at
http://www.imgpresents.com/imgfaq.htm
If you have been referred to this section, or have been unable to resolve your question(s)
or problems within this manual, on-line help, and tutorial, or are an advanced user
familiar with Windows Initialization files (INI type files), the Registry, and wish to learn
all of the My-T-Soft configuration Options, please read the following chapters. For
developers, integrators, or technicians, the following information should be read in its
entirety - also refer to the Developer’s Kit for even more options & other advanced
information.
Note: Some of the notes contained here date back to the original development in
1992. Certain information may be dated or no longer relevant, but is kept for historical
reasons and as a reference back to the actual implementation. This detail may also
help answer questions about settings and features, and why things have been done
in a particular manner.
Final Release Notes
Specific Application Notes & Release information are included in the APPLICATION
NOTES section below.
Quick Help is available only for the U.S. Standard 101 Keyboard.
Gaps in version numbers usually caused by OEM or non-public releases. List is
chronological from original public release.
Version 1.30 - Product release 1/30/94
101
Chapter 7. Advanced User Notes
Version 1.31 - Changes for Trident 256-color drivers in Display routines & Macro Panel
Updates. 3/31/94
Version 1.32 - Modification to keyboard interface DLL for compatibility with Windows
95 August 24, 1995 release. 8/30/95
Version 1.35 - The INSTALL.EXE has been removed, and SETUP.EXE has an
installation option. Several minor inconsistencies have been corrected. 3/5/1996
Version 1.40 - Enhanced Graphics, 3 new sizes, complete compatibility & enhancements
for Windows 95, multi-language versions, new macro panels & features, and a whole lot
more. 3/1/97
Version 1.41 - WordComplete, Action Panel, Basic & Advanced Modes, and a wide
range of features based on beta-test feedback.
My-T-Soft AT 7/1/1997
Version 1.42 - 1.44 - Various minor changes to accommodate CrossScanner compatibility
- OnScreen / My-T-Soft AT 9/1/1997
Version 1.45 - Dwell timer added. OnScreen / My-T-Soft AT finalized & released.
My-T-Soft AT 9/15/1997
Version 1.45 - Enhancements for operation within Windows NT/2000. Incorporation of
features from My-T-Touch, My-T-Pen, My-T-Soft AT. All basic operation confirmed.
Issues with certain dialog edit fields, some window flash during typing, some
dialogs/message boxes lose input focus, no logon support. 10/1/97
Version 1.46 - Various minor modifications. No Splash Option, better operation with
Menus, flexibility added for non-type into windows, default settings for common
programs included. 12/9/97
Version 1.47 - Addition of NoType capability to bypass other floating windows, custom
logo in operator mode, settings for Microsoft Office. 7/15/98
Version 1.49 - Complete change for lower level interface into Windows, various new
features, advanced macro support, released for integrators only (pre formal 1.50 public
release). 4/9/1998
Version 1.50 - Numerous additions, Windows 98 - My-T-Soft AT 9/1/1998
Version 1.50 - All features tested & verified, complete documentation update, all known
issues addressed, updated Developers Kit, addition of Logon Utilities. 11/1/1998
Version 1.52 - Maintenance release, match to commercial products - My-T-Soft AT
5/2/1999
Version 1.53 - Maintenance release, match to commercial products - My-T-Soft AT
9/1/1999
Version 1.60 - WinLogon options, e-commerce version, 11/1/99
Version 1.61 - Maintenance release, AddFontResource removal, 2/1/2000
102
Chapter 7. Advanced User Notes
Version 1.67 - 3D Keys & infinite sizing, Incorporation of Windows 95/98 software to
create retail version that allows install for Windows 95/98/Me/NT/2000, software
distribution on CD, updates from 1.61 versions of My-T-Touch/My-T-Pen. 7/16/2000
Version 1.70 - Integration & updates to Logon utilities for both 95/98/Me and NT/2000,
integration with My-T-Soft TS (Terminal Server version), updated help, additional
keyboard layouts Win 2000 specific features, modifications for non-mouse drivers.
3/17/2001
Version 1.70 - OnScreen merged with 1.70 code, added
WordList/TurnAwayScrlCrtl/Text-To-Speech. 7/17/2001
Version 1.73 - OnScreen minor updates, changes to Text-To-Speech, integration with
CrossScanner various maintenance updates, Terminal Server updates, etc. 3/17/2002
Version 1.75 - Various maintenance updates, new features to OnScreen, help updates,
additional keyboards. 5/17/2002
Version 1.75a-1.75J - Several additional settings & customizations for OEMs. 8/30/2002
Version 1.76 - Support for Build-A-Board layouts for both Windows Logon
(IMGGINA2.DLL), and at run time (My-T-Soft TS), maintenance updates. 11/17/2002
Version 1.77 - 104 key layouts, updates to 101 layouts, additional
Spanish/German/French layouts, Chinese/Japanese/Korean layouts, customer requests &
maintenance updates. 7/7/2003
Version 1.78 - Support for Windows Vista, user configuration files, synchronization with
OnScreen release, Build-A-Board layout selection, Download Manager (managed
updates), keyboard scanning, keyboard layout updates, numerous customer requests and
maintenance updates. 4/18/2007
Version 1.78 Release 2 - Updates to keyboard scanning, maintenance updates, integration
with Developer’s Kit 1.78 Release 3. 3/5/2008
Version 1.78 Release 3 - My-T-Soft TS and My-T-Mouse releases, maintenance updates.
7/16/2009
Version 1.78 Release 4 - Updates to OnScreen for scanning requests, Settings
Import/Export, Windows 7 compatibility 11/24/2009
Version 1.79 - MultiTouch support, Themes, Logon Windows 64-bit support,
maintenance updates
Version 1.79 - 9/17/2012
Important User Notes
My-T-Soft WAS NOT intended to emulate the Windows keyboard interface in its entirety.
Although My-T-Soft appears to operate just as the keyboard does, due to its design,
103
Chapter 7. Advanced User Notes
certain applications may not function properly with My-T-Soft. Special software
considerations have been made to make My-T-Soft as flexible as possible, and the notes
below offer information on configuration settings that may make My-T-Soft work within
your applications. Also below is a complete discussion of settings, options, and possible
solutions to any incompatibilities.
My-T-Soft WAS intended to make certain operations easier because the user can
concentrate on the task at hand, not which input device is required at the moment.
My-T-Soft allows the user to keep their eyes on the screen, so the flow of work on a
computer is uninterrupted. In essence, My-T-Soft is just a standard Windows application
that provides special functionality.
When asked "How do I do a right-click from My-T-Soft?" we try to be patient and
explain that My-T-Soft is a text input tool, and not a pointing device. The touchscreen /
pen interface replaces the desktop mouse as the pointing device, and My-T-Soft replaces
the physical keyboard. You need a pointing device to work with My-T-Soft, and if you
can’t perform a right-click with your pointing device, you need to talk to the pointing
device vendor for options (or refer to IMG’s TouchRight Utilities
(http://www.imgpresents.com/righttch/trt.htm) which provides right-click options & tools
for pointing devices). Also note there are keyboard short-cuts/options that can be used via
My-T-Soft to possibly resolve the underlying access issue - Shift-F10 will open the
context menu (or the Properties key on the 104 layouts) which often is what people want
when asking about the right-click action. Finally, look at a standard physical keyboard,
and find the right-click button - it isn’t there (unless the keyboard has some sort of
pointing device capability).
Technical Notes
My-T-Soft is a standard Windows Application and does not require any special drivers,
and should work with all keyboard and mouse emulation drivers that are compatible with
the ones that ship with Microsoft Windows.
For other pointing devices, My-T-Soft calls and uses the GetAsyncKeyState &
GetKeyState API calls for certain actions of the mouse. These must be supported by the
hardware & driver emulating the mouse. The 1.40 release addresses some of these
limitations, and My-T-Soft operates properly with Joystick-To-Mouse, CrossScanner,
Mouse Keys, and other pointing methods that do not use the actual mouse driver.
When working with Virtual Machines, certain pointing device functions operate
differently because of the way the mouse integrates through the virtual machine layer.
Some functions may not operate correctly, or the virtual machine may need to be full
screen (or windowed) to operate correctly. We are aware of issues with the Windows API
ClipCursor and SetMousePos when using VMWare and Parallels virtual machines. These
104
Chapter 7. Advanced User Notes
limitations then affects the keyboard scanning feature when running My-T-Soft in
Windows within a virtual machine.
Application Notes
THE FOLLOWING ARE SPECIFIC APPLICATIONS IN WHICH My-T-Soft DOES
NOT NEED SPECIAL SETTINGS BUT IN WHICH My-T-Soft REQUIRES
SPECIAL CONSIDERATION
Note: Because of the general improvement by Microsoft & other Windows
developers, this list has not been updated since the original releases. It remains here
as an appropriate place if there are any specific applications that require additional
notes when operating with My-T-Soft.
Dashboard for Windows
Publisher: Hewlett-Packard
Version: 2.0
Dashboard can cause some painting problems when My-T-Soft is
launched from a Layout due to the way Dashboard positions
opening windows. We suggest you set My-T-Soft to open as a
Normal Window, and position Dashboard away from the center of
the screen.
MS-DOS Window
Publisher: Microsoft
Version: Windows 3.0,3.1
My-T-Soft will not work with a Full Screen DOS application.
My-T-Soft will work with a DOS application in a DOS Window.
There are a few items that should be noted when using My-T-Soft
with a DOS Window. You may want to use a PIF file for operating
a DOS Application in a DOS Window.
1. Keystroke Macros MUST BE ENTERED IN LOWER CASE.
2. If the arrow or edit keys do not respond properly, turn the Num Lock off.
Paintbrush, Solitaire, Reversi
105
Chapter 7. Advanced User Notes
Publisher: Microsoft
Version: Windows 3.0,3.1
The edit keys are used by these applications to move the cursor.
Using the arrows, etc. on My-T-Soft will move the Cursor onto the
Application, moving the cursor off My-T-Soft, resulting in a very
short usefulness of My-T-Soft.
PC Tools for Windows
Publisher: Central Point
Version: 1.x, 2.0
When My-T-Soft is minimized to a button, the My-T-Soft button
display can obscure some of the PC Tools windows. Set
CaptionWatch=1 in the MYTSOFT.INI file to alleviate any
interference.
PIF Editor
Publisher: Microsoft
Version: Windows 3.0,3.1
If you have built an Application Short-Cut key with the PIF
Editor, it will not respond in all cases to the Short-Cut if
typed on My-T-Soft.
Recorder
Publisher: Microsoft
Version: Windows 3.0,3.1
When working with My-T-Soft & Recorder - make sure that
My-T-Soft does not obscure any window you will be working with
and you may NOT start a macro with a keyboard short-cut from
My-T-Soft.
Either start the macro from Recorder or try to remember where you
left your keyboard and use the keyboard short-cut.
Windows Tutorial - (WINTUTOR.EXE)
Publisher: Microsoft
Version: Windows 3.1
My-T-Soft hides behind the Windows Tutorial except in a few cases,
106
Chapter 7. Advanced User Notes
and these may be confusing to new users. New users should run the
tutorial without My-T-Soft, and learn the Windows Concepts before
using My-T-Soft.
Acrobat Reader (ACROREAD.EXE)
Publisher: Adobe
Version: All
When viewing documents as full screen, Acrobat will destroy the
Keyboard display on My-T-Soft. This is due to improper windows
application operation within Acrobat. Keep My-T-Soft minimized,
or do not use Acrobat in this fashion.
Windows Developers
Note: As a starting point, please refer to the Install Developer’s Kit icon in the
installation program group.
Developers Notes, downloadable files, sample code, and other useful integration and
programming information is available at Innovation Management Group, Inc.’s Web Site:
http://www.imgpresents.com/imgdev.htm. (http://www.imgpresents.com/imgdev.htm)
Developers wishing more technical information about My-T-Soft, messaging
information, and details how applications can interface with My-T-Soft should contact
Innovation Management Group, Inc.
For Questions or other information you may contact:
Innovation Management Group, Inc.
Customer Service
179 Niblick Road #454
Paso Robles, CA 93446
USA
1-800-889-0987 (US & Canada)
+1-818-701-1579
+1-818-936-0200 (fax)
<cs@imgpresents.com>
http://www.imgpresents.com
107
Chapter 7. Advanced User Notes
About this product
My-T-Soft was conceived in its simplest form by Kermit Komm in a brainstorming
session at a company called Future Technologies. The original name "My-T-Mouse" was
a contraction of "My Typing Mouse", and the original product was designed as a mouse
utility to enable a mouse to type and perform any operation within the GUI (Graphical
User Interface) without the need for a physical keyboard (this aspect of the design has
become the underlying theme for the acceptance of the products and their technology in
the marketplace).
Note: My-T-Mouse was originally introduced to the world at Fall COMDEX 1993
(when COMDEX, i.e. the Computer Dealers Exposition, was the premier trade show
for everything happening in the computer industry - My-T-Mouse was featured as one
of the highlights of the show in a program called "Computer Chronicles" (a well known
series that ran from 1981 through 2002). You can find this archived video [Computer
Chronicles Fall COMDEX 1993] at the Internet Archive (http://www.archive.org)).
Legal note: The My-T-Mouse name (and its resultant phonetic pronunciation)
created a trademark dispute raised by Viacom (with its cartoon character having a
similar sounding name), eventually winding up before the Trademark Trials & Appeals
board and setting a citable precedent, with Viacom’s opposition to the My-T-Mouse®
trademark being dismissed.
When introduced in 1993, the concept of an on-screen keyboard was new and far from
the mainstream, and in the beginning years much education was required to explain
"why" anyone would want or use an on-screen keyboard. Over the years, with the
introduction of handheld devices, the growth of touchscreen based systems, and the
maturation of pen-based systems, the concept of an on-screen keyboard has become
commonplace, and in many situations, expected as an alternate input mechanism.
Since the original product was named "My-T-Mouse", much effort was expended in
explaining that the product would work with touchscreens or pen based systems (or, in
fact, any pointing device that could act like a mouse), so "My-T-Pen" and "My-T-Touch"
were created to address the needs of the marketplace. In order to encompass the now
growing family of on-screen keyboards, the name "My-T-Soft" (i.e. My Typing Software)
was created and eventually used as the encompassing trademark of the entire My-T-Soft®
family of on-screen keyboards and utilities. There is also a version enhanced for people
with specialized needs was originally named My-T-Soft AT (or My-T-Soft with Assistive
Technology), and eventually renamed OnScreen to differentiate its capabilities with the
more commercially focused versions.
Conceived during the original development of My-T-Mouse, the concept of
Build-A-Board has been under constant refinement and development during the entire
108
Chapter 7. Advanced User Notes
lifetime of My-T-Mouse and its derivatives. At some point in the future, Build-A-Board’s
capabilities will be expanded to enable not only completely customizable layouts, but to
meet or exceed all of the capabilities of the original products and its derivatives.
Many of the enhancements and utilities came from all involved and My-T-Soft users.
In the 19 years as a commercial product, many individuals have been involved at various
levels, and thanks & acknowledgements go to everyone so involved.
Note: The following acknowledgements are for the original release in 1993.
Production:
Product Concept, Screen Presentation & Usability: Irwin Handelman
Logo & Graphic Artwork & Fonts: Marc Handelman
Development:
Windows Interface & Keyboard Emulation: Kermit Komm
Keyboard Display & Display Interface: George Merritt
My-T-Soft Setup & Graphic Artwork & Help Files: Darrel Niemann
Manual & Help Information: Lorrie Greene
Customer Suggestions
We appreciate and welcome suggestions from our users for features that you would like
to see in future versions of My-T-Soft. Please feel free to send us any comments you may
have that would make our product more useful to you. All suggestions and ideas become
the property of Innovation Management Group, Inc.
Send to:
Innovation Management Group, Inc.
Customer Service
179 Niblick Road #454
Paso Robles, CA 93446
USA
Or contact us directly:
1-800-889-0987 (US & Canada)
+1-818-701-1579
+1-818-936-0200 (fax)
<cs@imgpresents.com>
109
Chapter 7. Advanced User Notes
http://www.imgpresents.com
Date:_____________________
Name:__________________________________________
Address:________________________________________
City:_____________________State:_______Zip:_______
My-T-Soft Comments and Suggestions:
______________________________________________________
______________________________________________________
______________________________________________________
______________________________________________________
Version 1.79
9/17/2012
Copyright © 1993-2012 by Innovation Management Group, Inc.
All Rights Reserved.
My-T-Mouse®, My-T-Pen®, My-T-Touch® and My-T-Soft® are registered trademarks of
Innovation Management Group, Inc.
110
Chapter 8. Files & File Notes &
Installation Information
This section outlines details about each file, minimum file requirements, and reference
information on the product installation.
My-T-Soft Files & File Notes & Installation
Information
MY-T-SOFT FILES & FILE NOTES
Files located in the My-T-Soft Installation Directory:
The following files are REQUIRED for proper operation of
My-T-Soft: (Version specific files indicated)
* - indicates the minimum files required for functional operation of My-T-Soft
** - the Font file is not absolutely necessary, depending on size & Font settings,
however for basic operation with minimal file configuration, it is recommended that it
remain.
- MYTSOFT.EXE* - My-T-Soft executable
- MTSSETUP.EXE (???SETUP.EXE, Version specific) - My-T-Soft Setup executable
- MTSTUTOR.EXE (???TUTOR.EXE, Version specific) - My-T-Soft Tutorial &
Calculator Tape Executable Tutorial & Calculator Tape cannot run at the same time.
- MYTLIB.DLL* - My-T-Soft Dynamic Link Library
- MYTLIB32.DLL* - My-T-Soft Dynamic Link Library
- IMGVERS.DLL* - IMG Dynamic Link Library
- IMGLM.EXE (2000/XP/WS2003) (*Required for Terminal Server licensing)
- BWCC32.DLL* - Borland International Inc.’s Dynamic Link Library
- CW3215.DLL* - Windows 32 support Dynamic Link Library
- IMGLOGON.DLL - (2000/XP) (*Required for 2000/XP Logon) - IMG Logon
Dynamic Link Library In the 1.76 & later releases, the IMGLOGON.DLL is installed
from PKG00003.ZIP and extracted during install prior to Program Group creation.
- IMGLOGON.EXE - IMG Logon Configuration Utility (also used by ???SETUP.EXE)
111
Chapter 8. Files & File Notes & Installation Information
- IMGGINA2.DLL - (2000/XP) (*Required for 2000/XP Logon, My-T-Soft 2 Keyboard
layout) - IMG Logon DLL In the 1.76 & later releases, the IMGGINA2.DLL is installed
from PKG00003.ZIP and extracted during install prior to Program Group creation.
IMGGINA2.003 - (2000/XP) For support in Windows XP & Windows Server 2003, the
file IMGGINA2.003 is used. This overwrites IMGGINA2.DLL at install when installed
on Windows XP or Windows Server 2003.
- IMGVistaLogon.DLL - (Vista/7) (*Required for Vista / 7 Logon, My-T-Soft 2
Keyboard layout) (this is analogous to the IMGGINA2.DLL for 2000/XP), but provides
the interface in Vista / 7 to allow the logon keyboard.
The following files are used by IMGGINA2.DLL / IMGVistaLogon.DLL, and only are
used when My-T-Soft 2 is enabled as the logon option for 2000/XP
- MTS2.EXE - (My-T-Soft 2 executable to display LOGON\KEYBOARD.KBF)
- MTSLIB.DLL - Support for MTS2.EXE / MYTSOFT2.EXE
- BABDLL.DLL - Support for MTS2.EXE / MYTSOFT.EXE, Build-A-Board common
functions
- STOCK.DLL - Support for MTS2.EXE / MYTSOFT2.EXE, Resources for 3D keys
- LOGON\KEYBOARD.KBF - the Keyboard Layout for Logon (Created in
Build-A-Board)
- LOGON\MACROBAT.EXE - Macro Batch processor for MTS2.EXE
- LOGON\KEYBRD01.KMF - Default Keyboard Macro File for MTS2.EXE
- LOGON\MAC00000.KMF - Default Macros for MTS.EXE
- LOGON\KEYBOARD.SML - Small layout (Build-A-Board layout)
- LOGON\KEYBOARD.MED - Medium layout (Build-A-Board layout)
- LOGON\KEYBOARD.LRG - Large layout (Build-A-Board layout)
- LOGON\KEYBOARD.ORG - Default layout (Original layout)
- LOGON\KEYBOARD.ZIP - Build-A-Board layout Project for Small keyboard
Note: The actual layouts are different between 2000 / XP and Vista / 7
- LOGON\KBFLOGON.EXE - Utility to change opening position for
Small/Medium/Large Build-A-Board layouts In the 1.76 & later releases, these support
files for IMGGINA2.DLL are installed from PKG00003.ZIP & extracted during install
prior to Program Group creation.
- PNLWATCH.EXE / PWLIB.DLL - Utility & Support library to handle Tablet PC
interface for Windows XP. In the 1.77 & later releases, these support files are installed
from PKG00003.ZIP & extracted during install prior to Program Group creation.
112
Chapter 8. Files & File Notes & Installation Information
- MYTSOFT2.EXE - Executable for Build-A-Board created keyboard layouts
- MACROBAT.EXE - Macro Batch Processor for MYTSOFT2.EXE In the 1.76 & later
releases, MYTSOFT2.EXE, MACROBAT.EXE, and Support DLLs are installed from
PKG00004.ZIP & extracted during install prior to Program Group creation.
(1.76 add-on - IMGSOUND & default Wave file)
- IMGSOUND.EXE - Executable process used to play sounds
Note: In the Assistive Technology version, IMGSOUND.EXE is always run, even if
there are no sound options turned on. It can be renamed or removed to prevent it
from launching if sounds are not required and you do not want this process to be run
because of memory or security reasons. Also see the NoAnnounce setting in the
Initialization File Documentation. In Commercial versions, IMGSOUND.EXE is only
run when Sound=1.
- SOUNDS\KEYCLICK.WAV - Wave file for default KeyClick sounds (Sounds=1) In the
1.76 & later releases, IMGSOUND.EXE, and SOUNDS\KEYCLICK.WAV are installed
from PKG00005.ZIP & extracted during install prior to Program Group creation.
- HELP\*.html, HELP\IMAGES\*.png - My-T-Soft Help (PKG00008.ZIP)
- MTSOPEN.EXE - My-T-Soft Welcome
- SEETHRU.EXE (2000/XP - Transparency) Standalone window with dialog to control
transparency of keyboard
- KEYBOARD.KBF* - My-T-Soft Keyboard Configuration & Description File
- *.KBF - other KBF files (pre-built sample Build-A-Board layouts included as examples)
- KEYBRD01.KMF - Base macro file, preserves original naming convention, used by
both MTS & MTS2. 1.77 note - significant name change KEYBRD?? changed to
KYBD???? to accommodate 104 layouts & future layout additions
- KYBD0001.KMF - KYBD????.KMF (*.KMF File specified in INI file (Keyboard=)) My-T-Soft Keyboard Layout & Macro File for individual Keyboards In the 1.76 & later
releases, the KYBD0002.KMF - KYBD????.KMF files are installed as PKG00001.ZIP
and extracted during install prior to Program Group creation.
- MAC00000.KMF - MAC00???.KMF (*Appropriate files IF Macro panel in use) My-T-Soft Macro Panel Files In the 1.76 & later releases, the MAC00001.KMF MAC?????.KMF files are installed as PKG00002.ZIP and extracted during install prior to
Program Group creation.
- MYTSOFT.INI* - My-T-Soft Initialization File
- LICENSE.EXE* - IMG License Manager
- LICENSE2.EXE* - IMG License verification only (read-only access)
113
Chapter 8. Files & File Notes & Installation Information
- LICENSE.LIC* - IMG License File
- LICENSE.ORG - Original IMG License File
- LICENSE.TXT - IMG End User License Agreement
- README.TXT - Product Installation text file
- MANIFEST.TXT - Reference File from Build
- IMGUTIL.EXE - used for installation and uninstallation of software
Support Files
- MYTSTORY.TXT - Tutorial Text file (PKG00006.ZIP)
- KEYBOARD.ORG - Original KEYBOARD.KBF file for recovery
- MYTSOFT.ORG - Original MYTSOFT.INI file for recovery
Developer Utilities: (Installed in Installation Directory)
- DEVKTDOC\DEVKIT.CHM - My-T-Soft Utilities & Information (PKG00006.ZIP)
- CTALTDEL.EXE - Dev Kit utility to restart Windows, used as an example for Key
Launches - (pre 1.70 RESTRTWN.EXE, from NTRSTART.EXE)
- DVKTINST.EXE - tool for quick installation of Developer’s Kit
- ZIP32.DLL - Zip library for compressing exports / Word Lists
- UNZIP32S.DLL - Unzip library, required for installation of Dev Kit with
DVKTINST.EXE
- WORDLIST.EXE - Word List Assistant, read in files, save Word List files, install new
Word Lists, Requires ZIP32.DLL, UNZIP32S.DLL. This is also the utility that handles
the Export/Import menu options, but only provides the Word List Assistant in the
OnScreen releases.
- DKT??????.ZIP - latest release of Developers Kit (If included with distribution files)
Use DevKit Installer (DVKTINST.EXE), or WinZip or use PKUNZIP with the -d option
to preserve directory (folder) structure. Recommended to Unzip in Installation directory
for easier file management. The latest Developer’s Kit may be downloaded using the
IMG Download Manager.
Note: The font and the files established in \Program Files\Common Files\Innovation
Management Group are not un-installed when My-T-Soft is un-installed. These
remain in case future IMG products are installed. Refer to the IMG System Manager
for further information (if available).
- MYTMOUSE.FON** - My-T-Soft Keyboard Font File for smaller sizes
- ADDFONT.EXE - Utility to Add font post installation, e.g. "Addfont add"
114
Chapter 8. Files & File Notes & Installation Information
Located in the Windows System Directory (or Windows Fonts folder):
- MANAGER\ESTABLISH.EXE - this is a post installation utility that establishes or
updates the IMG Download Manager and IMG License Manager files as outlined below.
Located in \Program Files\Common Files\Innovation Management
Group\Download Manager directory:
- IMGCLEAN.EXE - used to complete uninstall of software, required for Control Panel
Add/Remove Programs
- IMGDLM.EXE - The IMG Download Manager - Installed by
MANAGER\ESTABLISH.EXE
- IMGNET.DLL - The IMG Download Manager Library - Installed by
MANAGER\ESTABLISH.EXE
Located in \Program Files\Common Files\Innovation Management Group\License
Manager directory:
- LICENSE.DLL - library used by the IMG License Manager and IMG Download
Manager
Files created during use:
- MYTSOFT.BAK - My-T-Soft previous Initialization File (in configuration location for
user’s MYTSOFT.INI file - see ConfigPath entry in Initialization File Documentation
OnScreen Add-Ons
- KEYBOARD.KB1* - Keyboard Layout for Action panel configuration
- A.TXT - Z.TXT,-.TXT, etc. - Word List files
- IMGSOUND.EXE* - Used for Key-Click Sounds and Text-To-Speech
- SCRLCTRL.EXE - Used for Screen Control of larger than screen keyboard
configurations
- TTSAPP.EXE - Speak and Setup for Text-To-Speech, required to change voices when
using Text-To-Speech
- TURNAWAY.EXE - Head Mouse users App to cover screen until Exit is clicked.
OnScreen Folders (The Developer’s Kit creates numerous sub-folders - see Dev Kit docs)
SOUNDS - OnScreen Voice & Key-Click replacements
WORDLISTS - OnScreen Word Lists - saved and international
OnScreen with CrossScanner Add-Ons (CrossScanner folder)
- XSCAN.EXE - CrossScanner
- XSCAN_S.EXE - CrossScanner Setup
- XSCANSRV.EXE - CrossScanner Support
115
Chapter 8. Files & File Notes & Installation Information
- KEYBOARD.KMF - CrossScanner Support
- MYTCLIB.DLL - CrossScanner Support
- XTOGGLE.EXE - CrossScanner Support - Separate executable for controlling
CrossScanner
- XSCAN.INI - My-T-Soft Support - Configuration File for USB Device operation
- MANIFEST.TXT - My-T-Soft Support - Reference File from Build
- HELP\*.html, HELP\IMAGES\*.png - My-T-Soft Help
CrossScanner 4.00 additional files
- XADMIN.EXE - My-T-Soft Support - Administrative setup for
CrossScannerLogon.DLL
- CrossScannerLogon.dll - My-T-Soft Support - Logon Interface DLL for Windows Vista
/7
- MTS2.EXE - My-T-Soft Executable - Keyboard for Logon Interface
- MTSLIB.DLL - Support for My-T-Soft Executable
- BABDLL.DLL - Support for My-T-Soft Executable
- STOCK.DLL - Support for My-T-Soft Executable
- LOGON\KEYBOARD.KBF - the Keyboard Layout for Logon (Created in
Build-A-Board)
- LOGON\MACROBAT.EXE - Macro Batch processor for MTS2.EXE
- LOGON\KEYBRD01.KMF - Default Keyboard Macro File for MTS2.EXE
- LOGON\MAC00000.KMF - Default Macros for MTS.EXE
- LOGON\KEYBOARD.SML - Small layout (Build-A-Board layout)
- LOGON\KEYBOARD.MED - Medium layout (Build-A-Board layout)
- LOGON\KEYBOARD.LRG - Large layout (Build-A-Board layout)
- LOGON\KEYBOARD.ORG - Default layout (Original layout)
- LOGON\KEYBOARD.ZIP - Build-A-Board layout Project for Small keyboard
- LOGON\KBFLOGON.EXE - MTS2.EXE Utility
Note that as files are removed, the possibilities for errors or operational limitations
increases. Also note that a large portion of the MYTLIB.DLL are bitmaps that may not
be in use for particular fixed size configurations - contact IMG if a small footprint
installation is required.
Note: The following notes indicate various options for some of these files. There may
also be additional information in Advanced User Notes, Operation Notes, and the
Initialization File Documentation..
116
Chapter 8. Files & File Notes & Installation Information
My-T-Soft Setup options: The ???SETUP.EXE program can take a few command
line options. The command line "BUILD" is used when the top button MACRO is
pressed on the Main Macro panel in My-T-Soft to automatically open Setup with the
Build-A-Macro dialog. There also is a "HELPCMD" option to display the internal help
request prior to using the HelpInterface function from IMGVERS.DLL. This is
currently used as the lookup from the MYTSOFT.INI file to open the appropriate help
file from the HELP folder. The lookup table approach was required because Microsoft
has constantly changed preferred help formats through various versions of Windows.
Help is currently available in HTML files so the same help files can be used in the
product and be made available on the product website.
Installation Information
CD/DVD may contain:
SETUP.EXE - Installation Assistant to determine platform / install files
AUTORUN.INF - AutoRun for AutoPlay CD/DVD
RELEASE.TXT - Release information
Located on the My-T-Soft Distribution media:
Compressed Files of the My-T-Soft Installation Files and:
README.TXT - For the Experienced User
LICENSE.TXT - My-T-Soft License Agreement
SETUP.EXE - Setup Utility to Install My-T-Soft onto your Hard Drive
The IMG installer can support these options:
/? Displays a message box with info about options
/Q (Quiet install) runs a quiet install (no dialogs/user interaction)
/I (Install) runs a quiet install (no dialogs/user interaction)
/U runs a quiet un-install (no dialogs/user interaction)
/Q and /I are handled the same (customer requested /Q)
OnScreen Add-ons
WordLists Folder - contains available Word Lists
Speech Folder - Microsoft Speech Components, Text-To-Speech
The following information is for those users who are curious and want to know, or wish
to Uninstall My-T-Soft & do not have the original distribution media.
117
Chapter 8. Files & File Notes & Installation Information
There are 2 approaches to Setup, an IMG installer and the Windows Installer (MSI). The
reason 2 installers are available is for flexibility and support purposes. Installing any
product is a relatively easy process, but can become complicated as more & more features
and capabilities are included. In any complicated sequential process, it is inevitable that
some sequence or step is not handled properly. By using a second approach, a verifiable
comparison based mechanism is created where a definitive end-result of files & settings
can be attained, ensuring the integrity of the installation steps.
Post Installation information: IMGUTIL.EXE performs various post installation
tasks. For reference, if the installation media has LICENSE.LIC in the same folder as
SETUP.EXE, or in the \LICENSE folder, IMGUTIL will copy this into the installation
folder (this is useful for evaluation and other types of licensing). If the installation
media has a DK??????.ZIP file in the same folder as SETUP.EXE, or in the \DEVKIT
folder, it will be copied to the installation folder.
For reference information, you can refer to the INSTALL.XML used by the IMG
SETUP.EXE for all post installation operations. In Windows Installer (MSI) installs,
these same actions occur.
SETUP.EXE will sense if My-T-Soft is Installed or not. If My-T-Soft is not installed, then
Install must be checked to Install the My-T-Soft software. If My-T-Soft is already
installed, you may Un-Install by selecting the Un-Install option and selecting OK
throughout the following screens.
The following outlines relevant information about the MSI (Microsoft Installer)
packages, and command line options to msiexec to manage installation with these
files
The MSI files are essentially databases of information used by the Windows Installer to
install the files and setup a system. The executable to use is "msiexec.exe" and any
appropriate command line switches. In general, if you double click on an MSI file,
Windows launches msiexec with the /i install option (e.g. "msiexec /i
prodver_target.msi").
For some basic, frequently asked for options, here are a few that can be used with the
standard IMG MSI install files (these switches are not case sensitive):
In these examples, the msi file should be replaced with the msi file you want to operate on
msiexec /i mts178_2000xp.msi (This installs My-T-Soft 1.78 (using the user interface))
msiexec /i /qn mts178_2000xp.msi (This silently installs My-T-Soft 1.78 (with NO user
interface))
msiexec /x /qn mts178_2000xp.msi (This silently un-installs My-T-Soft 1.78 (with NO
user interface))
118
Chapter 8. Files & File Notes & Installation Information
msiexec /a mts178_2000xp.msi /qn TARGETDIR="C:\Documents and Settings\Full
User\Desktop\Test" (This silently installs My-T-Soft 1.78 (with NO user interface) to a
different target directory (for testing, etc.))
Further notes on command line switches:
/a = Administrative install - allows use of TARGETDIR override
/i = standard install
/x = standard un-install
/q? = user interface options
/qn = Displays no user interface.
/qb = Displays a basic user interface.
/qr = Displays a reduced user interface with a modal dialog box displayed at the end of
the installation.
/qf = Displays the full user interface with a modal dialog box displayed at the end.
/qn+ = Displays no user interface, except for a modal dialog box displayed at the end.
/qb+ = Displays a basic user interface with a modal dialog box displayed at the end.
/qb- = Displays a basic user interface with no modal dialog boxes.
For further info on msiexec.exe, refer to Microsoft’s documentation.
Deployment Information
This section outlines relevant information if My-T-Soft is going to be imaged via hard
disk replication, incorporated into a different installation package, or handled externally
from the publically provided installation approaches. Please refer to the other sections in
this chapter to have a basic level of understanding regarding the files and issues involved
in the installation of My-T-Soft
This is a quick summary of the 3 steps typically used to prepare a master image - for
more details and reference information, see below
1. Install the software. It is recommended you do not run the software until after the
duplication.
2. Copy in custom configuration (if necessary). If configured on a separate system,
refer to My-T-Soft Setup | File menu | Show Config File Location for location of
configuration files.
3. Copy in company/site/deployment license (if applicable) - replace LICENSE.LIC in
Installation folder.
119
Chapter 8. Files & File Notes & Installation Information
There are 3 main areas that need to be managed: Deployment, Default Configuration, and
Licensing
Deployment
The goal of this step is to ensure that all the required files are on the target system. For
practical purposes, these are simply all the files and folders in the Installation folder, e.g.
\Program Files\MYTSOFT. Often, the default installation method can be used, with post
installation management of configuration and license details handled after the installation.
When Imaging, the basic approach is to install the software onto the master system, then
perform any updates to configuration and license files, and then DO NOT RUN the
software (as settings and files can be modified by running the software).
For actual installation (i.e. including the software with an existing application), it is best
to wrap the files into the existing application installation approach. Refer to the Zip files
in the extended download area, as these are the installation files without any installation
add-ons - these are just the program files that need to be installed on a system in a
compressed, single file zip format. Often it is easiest to have a test system where normal
installation / testing can take place, and refer to the information here, the post installation
files on the test system, and also the MANIFEST.TXT text file (a post-build snapshot of
the product files) in the installation folder for file details.
Doing folder comparisons, or simply testing on the target system (after
imaging/installation), is the preferred approach to ensure the software has been deployed
correctly.
Default Configuration
The configuration is contained in the KEYBOARD.KBF / MYTSOFT.INI files (and the
MAC*.KMF files if the macro panels are used). Typically making sure the desired
(correctly configured) files are the files in the installation folder is all that is necessary to
bring a new/different default configuration when the software is run.
The simplest steps to create the desired configuration files are to configure the software as
desired, then use the menu to Save Current Settings, and also Save Position. To test,
re-start the software and verify the configuration is correct. Then obtain the
KEYBOARD.KBF / MYTSOFT.INI file (refer to the ConfigPath setting / or use Setup |
File menu | Show Config File Location), and use these on your master image or as part of
the installation files.
After duplication, when a new user runs the software, they will receive a copy of these
default configuration files from the Installation Folder. They will then have their own
personal copy which can be configured as they desire. This is the default setting of the
software (ConfigPath=1). Note there are different approaches that could be taken with
these configuration files based on the ConfigPath setting and permissions - for example, a
fixed configuration for all users that cannot be modified.
120
Chapter 8. Files & File Notes & Installation Information
Note: If secure logon is required, the Logon Utilities require a registry entry in the
WinLogon group, which is not managed by installation or via the configuration files.
This option requires proper configuration via the Logon Utilities.
Licensing
If using the default (retail) license scheme, you just need to ensure that the file
LICENSE.LIC in the installation folder is the same as LICENSE.ORG (the as shipped
license file). If using any other type of license, refer to notes and instructions that were
provided to you. In most cases, this means that you will have been provided a custom
LICENSE.LIC file, and this must be the file installed as LICENSE.LIC.
121
Chapter 8. Files & File Notes & Installation Information
122
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
My-T-Soft Operation and Release Notes
These notes document some of the known limitations with My-T-Soft as of this release,
and other anecdotal information.
EGA Users
The My-T-Soft Tutorial will not run in EGA, although the rest of My-T-Soft will. EGA
users will probably prefer different settings for the default colors, since the light gray is a
dithered gray on the EGA display.
Year 2038 Limitations
In versions 1.78 and later, any invalid date is treated as a 0 result and time and dates will
not be displayed in the System Information panel properly when run past the year 2037.
All important functionality of My-T-Soft is not affected by the date, and beyond the
improper display on the System Information panel, there are no other limitations
associated with any date issue. Note that versions 1.77 and earlier will not run when the
system date is greater than the year 2037 (due to an invalid/null pointer returned by the
time system call). Search the internet for the "Year 2038" problem for further information.
Future versions will update to a more capable system time call well before the year 2037.
Windows Menus
1. The My-T-Soft Menu does not have any keyboard short-cuts - My-T-Soft was
designed to operate entirely from a pointing device.
2. For Keyboard users who want to close My-T-Soft, make sure the Cursor is not over
the My-T-Soft display, then Use Alt-Tab to select the My-T-Soft window, and use
Alt-Space to bring up the My-T-Soft Menu for My-T-Soft, then arrow down to select
Close.
3. Keyboard Users can Minimize My-T-Soft by doing the above & selecting a
Minimize option.
123
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
4. If a Any Windows Menu is up in an application, the following limitations affect
My-T-Soft: You Cannot Move My-T-Soft, or if you do, the Menu will close.
Assignments to Middle & Right buttons will not work! Cannot move through System
Menu Bar Highlight if there are no Pop-up menus.
Keyboard Notes
The Print Screen key only captures the Active Application. Maximize the Active
application, then use the Print Screen Key to capture a full screen of the display.
The Pause Key properly generates the keystrokes, and sends them to the active application
- the application must respond to these keystrokes for any action or pause to occur.
The Ctrl-Break, Ctrl-Alt-Del, and Sys-Rq Combinations are not supported. However, by
assigning executables to the appropriate key, certain emulations can occur. As an
example, the default install includes a sample of emulating the Ctrl-Alt-Del sequence to
restart Windows.
The Alt-Tab combination works properly, but if used from My-T-Soft the user will find
that only the "top" 2 windows cycle. This is caused by the way Windows re-sorts
windows in the Window Manager list. The "quick-switch / select" window is not visible
when the Alt-Tab combination is generated by My-T-Soft. Some tricks can be used by
creating macros with Alt-Tab-Tab, or Alt-Tab-Tab-Tab, since these will select windows
deeper down the list. For example, Alt-Tab-Tab from a macro panel will cycle through
the top 3 windows in the list.
Using the Shift-F10 combo to bring up property & context menus operates correctly, but
additional keyboard functionality is not available when these menus are open.
DOS Windows must operate within the "tty" class within windows, and if you have
trouble using the arrow or edit keys in a DOS Window, try turning the Num-Lock off.
Some combo boxes and password entry dialogs do not accept keystrokes and appear to
lose focus. This is because of internal operation of the Windows operating system and
certain security measures enforced to prevent "software" from comprimising the security
of passwords, etc. Contact IMG for additional options available to resolve any mission
critical requirements.
KMF layouts, Windows Regional Settings, Windows Keyboard Layouts, etc. At first
glance, it would seem that a keyboard is pretty straightforward, and in most cases, it is.
However, differences in physical keyboards & physical keyboard layouts, changes to the
computer keyboard over time & different manufacturer approaches, along with
international/cultural requirements, has turned keyboard handling into quite a
complicated affair. In order to isolate differences between different versions of Windows,
expectations of operation, and other issues, each supported layout is contained in a KMF
124
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
(Keyboard Macro File). In general, these are intended to be used in the region & with the
appropriate version of Windows.
While people do not complain that their physical keyboard does not change to match the
symbols generated, when using a virtual keyboard, this type of operation is expected. The
key labels are also contained within the KMF file, and My-T-Soft will display the key
labels for what is generated from the appropriate Windows Keyboard Layout. If you are
experiencing inconsistencies between what is displayed and what is typed, then it is
probably related to the selected Windows keyboard layout (see Control Panel |
Keyboard). This is handled differently in different versions of Windows (not only
platforms, but international releases).
KMFs & KBFs & Build-A-Board
The original design used a KBF (KeyBoard File) to track the physical appearance (keys,
panels, size, etc.) (i.e. imagine a blank keyboard), and a KMF (Keyboard Macro File) to
track key labels & key operation. This works well when a pure physical keyboard
emulation approach is used, since each KMF will result in the display of different labels,
but the relative appearance of the shape & size & key relationships remains the same. For
example, if you place physical keyboards from different countries next to each other, they
will look pretty much the same except for the key labels.
When Build-A-Board was designed, a completely different approach was used, wherein
each layout file would contain everything necessary in a single file, the KBF (KeyBoard
File). So KBF files greater than 2.00 not only contain keys, panels, & size information,
but also key labels & key operation information.
Build-A-Macro Notes
The following double-characters are reserved in Build-A-Macro:
@@ - Signifies an Alt keystroke to follow
e.g. @@f = [Alt-Down]f[Alt-Up]
~~ - Signifies a Ctrl keystroke to follow
^^ - Signifies a Shift keystroke to follow
$$ - used internally for internal macro uses
%% - used to specify a virtual key, or a keyboard scan code
You may not use these character combinations in your macros, unless you use them as
outlined. For example, you may quickly create a macro for File, New ([Alt]-F, N) by
entering "@@fn" and clicking OK. However, using the Reserved words in brackets is the
preferred method.
125
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
The %% sequence has 3 options, and must be formed properly to be interpreted as an
special entry. 4 characters must follow the 2 percent signs, spaces are not allowed. When
this is used, it generates both the Down and Up keyboard messages, (press & release),
similar to the entry of a specific character.
The following general form is:
%%cnnn
where c is a character signifying Keystroke or Scancode or Virtual Key Code - The only
valid characters are k or s or v (case does not matter)
The nnn must be 3 decimal digits (values between 000 and 999 are valid). Note that there
are only 200+ keys on the panels and 255 Virtual keys - higher numbers may cause
memory access errors!
The keystroke (k) numbers refer to the internal numbering of the keyboard - see below
for a table of the standard 101 keyboard.
For example, to generate a F10 keystroke, you may use "%%k010" in the Build-A-Macro
portion. In most cases, using the actual character will generate the appropriate scan codes
internally, and this is only provided as an enhancement to provide more functionality in
certain environments. Documented deficiencies include lack of support for the keys on
the Numeric keypad panel. Additionally, by using the scancodes, macros can generate
"keystrokes" for keys that are not present on the physical keyboard. Because of the
hardware oriented nature of the actual scancode generated by the physical keyboard, and
its interpretation by the system hardware and Windows, the scope of these issues requires
that they be referenced in appropriate system manuals, and/or documentation on industry
standards.
The Virtual Key (v) passes the Windows based Virtual key code directly through
My-T-Soft. How an application interprets the virtual key code is dependent on regional,
language, keyboard layout, and possibly other issues.
Quick Reference:
%%knnn, e.g. %%k010 - uses the currently selected KMF (My-T-Soft layout) and looks
up the virtual key / scan code information for this key, sends down/up keystrokes
%%snnn, e.g. %%s112 - sends the scancode, but processed internally. In most cases this
will be the same virtual key code as specified, but it may be modified.
%%vnnn, e.g. %%v112 - sends the Windows Virtual Key (refer to Microsoft
documentation) unmodified (note decimal notation, hex is not supported).
Key# Description
0 Escape Key
1 F1
2 F2
126
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
3 F3
4 F4
5 F5
6 F6
7 F7
8 F8
9 F9
10 F10
11 F11
12 F12
13 Select key
14 1/!
15 2/@
16 3/#
17 4/$
18 5/%
19 6/^
20 7/&
21 8/*
22 9/(
23 0/)
24 -/_
25 =/+
26 Back space
27 Tab
28 Q
29 W
30 E
31 R
32 T
33 Y
34 U
127
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
35 I
36 O
37 P
38 [/{
39 ]/}
40 Caps Lock
41 A
42 S
43 D
44 F
45 G
46 H
47 J
48 K
49 L
50 ;/:
51 ’/"
52 Enter Key
53 Enter Key - make both waves 52.WAV & 53.WAV
54 Shift / Left Shift
55 Z
56 X
57 C
58 V
59 B
60 N
61 M
62 ,/<
63 ./>
64 //?
65 Shift / Right Shift
66 \/|
128
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
67 Control / Left Control
68 Alt / Left Alt
69 Space Bar
70 Alt / Right Alt / Alt-Gr
71 Control / Left Control
These are on the edit panel
72 Print Screen
73 Scroll Lock
74 Pause
75 Insert
76 Home
77 Page Up
78 Delete
79 End
80 Page Down
81 Up Arrow
82 Left Arrow
83 Down Arrow
84 Right Arrow
These are on the Numeric keypad panel
85 CL indicator / not processed as key
86 NL indicator / not processed as key
87 SL indicator / not processed as key
88 Num Lock
89 /
90 *
91 92 7
93 8
94 9
95 +
96 4
129
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
97 5
98 6
99 1
100 2
101 3
102 Enter / =
103 0
104 decimal point
Memory
My-T-Soft uses Windows Global Memory for various things. My-T-Soft will operate
faster if Global memory is physical system memory, and not swapped to disk as virtual
memory. Although My-T-Soft will run in 2 MB systems, operating at 4 MB, 8 MB, or
higher is recommended.
It is normal for the My-T-Soft System Information Mem:????K display to drop as you
type on My-T-Soft, or move over the My-T-Soft display. You may also note System
Resources change as My-T-Soft is used.
Command Line Options
Quick Reference (Command line options)
130
•
-NoSplash [Open without splash screen]
•
!Minimize [Open in the as configured minimized state]
•
DEFERSKIPMSG [If this is found in the command line, it only affects the second
instance - the default actions will occur, but no message (no dialog/MessageBox) will
be shown (see below for notes/details)]
•
DEFERNOACTION [If this is found in the command line, it only affects the second
instance - nothing will occur when the EXE is launched - the second EXE will just
close itself (see below for notes/details)]
•
/k=mynew.kbf [Override KeyBoard File (must be in Config Path location)]
•
/i=mynew.ini [Override Initialization File (must be in Config Path location)]
•
x=123[%] [Override opening x screen position, add % to use screen percentages
(calculated)]
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
•
y=321[%] [Override opening y screen position, add % to use screen percentages
(calculated)]
Prior to Version 1.76, the only command line option was the ability to specify the
NoSplash setting - see NoSplash in the Iniitialization file description.
[Path]\MYTSOFT.EXE -NoSplash In the implementation, the - (dash) is actually the
trigger, and the notes specify NoSplash only as a description so maintainers can
understand what the command line means - it is not required, and in fact, can be anything
as long as there is a - (dash).
In the 1.79 release, a command line based "Open in the minimized state" has been added.
Prior to this, the shortcut link properties needed to be modified to indicate the "Run:"
state as Minimized (instead of Normal Window (or Maximized)). This is implemented
similar to the -NoSplash and can be used as !Minimize or Minimized! - the exclamation
point character is the trigger, and if it is present, the internal operation will match the
Show Window properties from the shortcut link. It is recommended you include the text
of Minimize or Minimized for future maintainers.
Important: In the 1.78 release, the ConfigPath setting determines the default
location for the user’s configuration file. These notes apply to this location. For
example, if you are specifying a different layout, it must reside in the user’s specific
path, if ConfigPath=1 (default) is set in the Initialization file. See ConfigPath setting in
the Initialization file for further details on location You may also reference the
configuration files location from the File menu in My-T-Soft Setup
DEFER overrides - DEFERSKIPMSG & DEFERNOACTION: In 1.79, 2 new DEFER
overrides have been added to change the operation of the second instance of the
EXE when launched. With no option, the default action is to find the existing Window,
restore from minimized state (if in a minimized state), position the keyboard window
at the center bottom of the screen, and display a message indicating only one
process (window) can be running. For situations where this message, or these
actions are undesirable, one of these 2 options can be included in the shortcut’s
command line, and change these actions. If DEFERSKIPMSG is included in the
command line, all actions will occur, but the final dialog (MessageBox) will NOT be
shown. The second instance will open/position the running software, and then close.
If DEFERNOACTION is included in the command line, the second instance will
perform no actions, and simply close. Running a second instance of the EXE with the
DEFERNOACTION option will result in no feedback to the user.
In the 1.76 release, in addition to the -NoSplash code, there is support for a /k=[file]
and/or a /i=[file]. These provide an override to the default KEYBOARD.KBF (/k) and
MYTSOFT.INI (/i).
There should be no spaces in the command line entry, except to separate multiple entries.
131
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
(e.g. C:\Program Files\MYTSOFT\MYTSOFT.EXE /k=mykbf.kbf /i=mykbf.ini
-NoSplash)
The [file] specified must reside in the current configuration folder, as specified by the
ConfigPath setting in the Initialization File (except in Terminal Server version).
The code checks for both upper & lowercase k (K) and i (I). The trigger is the = (equal)
sign, and the code looks to the previous character for the k or i, and the following
characters up until a space or end of line for the [file].
The /k option updates the KEYBOARD.KBF file with the specified [file]. There is no
error checking to guarantee the file exists, or that it is a valid KBF file, so care should be
used when implementing these options. The [file] specified with the /k option MUST be a
copy of a previously saved configuration (i.e. copy KEYBOARD.KBF to MYKBF.KBF).
A Build-A-Board 2.10 generated KBF file may also be used.
The /i option references the given [file] for configuration information, instead of the
default MYTSOFT.INI, allowing different settings to be used.
The implementation of the 2 options is internally different (because of internal design).
The /k option for My-T-Soft actually copies the specified [file] to KEYBOARD.KBF,
then continues on as normal. The /i option internally references the specified [file],
leaving the default MYTSOFT.INI file intact.
In order to ensure proper operation, certain settings (panels, colors, etc.) are written to the
INI file when the /k option is used. This is done to ensure a match between the layout
information, and the details in the INI file. When the /k override in the command line is
used, the following occurs:
•
The specified [file] is copied to KEYBOARD.KBF
•
If only the /k option is used, overlapping features from the specified configuration [file]
are written to the MYTSOFT.INI.
•
if both /k and /i options are used, the INI settings will be used. Therefore, a "matched"
pair should be used whenever both options are specified.
•
If the /k is used, any other "launch" should probably also require the /k option to
ensure the desired layout appears.
A "matched" pair means saving both Settings and Position, then closing My-T-Soft. Copy
the KEYBOARD.KBF to MYNEW.CFG, and MYTSOFT.INI To MYNEW.INI.
Additional Implementation Notes: The command line overrides will use the current
configuration location - see My-T-Soft Setup | File menu | Show Config File Location
to identify the current user configuration file location. Custom files need to be in this
location. The /i=mynew.ini INI override has a quirk - because of internal backup code,
the custom named INI should be in the program files location, i.e. \Program
Files\MYTSOFT. For ease of use, you can duplicate files in both locations. Often if
there are no specific INI settings that affect operation, and the primary motivation is
132
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
to use a different layout, it is easiest to only specify the KBF, e.g. /k=mynew.kbf (the
KBF must be in the Config File Location).
Terminal Server Note: In the Terminal Server version, the file must reside in the
current user’s folder.
In the 1.77 release, an X/Y coordinate can also be used, e.g X:200 Y:300 (e.g.
C:\Program Files\MYTSOFT\MYTSOFT.EXE -NoSplash x:200 y:300)
The implementation looks for either the : (colon) character, or the = (equal sign), and
looks at both upper or lower case x (X), y (Y). So X=200 and Y=300 will also be
recognized. Negative numbers can be used. There should be no spaces in the command
line except to separate options.
In the 1.78 Release 2, a percent sign character can be used to position the X/Y
coordinates based on the relative position specified (percent of total screen resolution),
rather than a fixed location, e.g. x:34% y:70%.
The implementation requires the % character to immediately follow the numeric value.
Valid values for X/Y must be in the range 0-100 - negative numbers or numbers over a
100 will revert to acceptable values. The calculation includes the size of the keyboard
window, and will keep the entire window visible, so it is a dynamic calculation based on
the specified percent, the screen resolution, and the current size of the window. Some
examples: [C:\Program Files\MYTSOFT\MYTSOFT.EXE x:20% y:75%], or
[C:\Program Files\MYTSOFT\MYTSOFT.EXE -NoSplash x=75% y=50%].
Note: When opening in the minimized state with the minimize option as a Window
(Floating Window), these X/Y command line overrides will be applied to the floating
window. Refer to ButtonOverrideW/H and ButtonOverrideX/Y for additional control
options specific to the floating window minimize option at startup.
Troubleshooting / Diagnosing Startup
In the 1.78 Release 2, "STARTDEBUG" can be used as the command line to display to
the screen key code points during the initialization of the software. During the program
startup, there is a direct to display "Reached Code Marker ID" code indication. As the
code progress and reaches key points in the startup sequence, a code marker (e.g. 1003) is
reached, and using a direct to display debugging feature, the code marker is directly
displayed on the left side of the system display. If there is an error or other problem
starting, the last code marker display will help indicate where the code stopped, and what
it was doing.
The following is the list of the codes and what has happened up to that point:
133
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
•
1001 In WinMain code, no system calls made yet
•
1002 After check for Window already existing (Previous Instance)
•
1003 After Class Registered with system (Register Class) Pre Window Creation
•
1004 After Window created
•
1005 Free System Timer verified, internal variables initialized
•
1006 DLL’s attached
•
1007 Macro file verified / loaded, Read from INI
•
1008 If Win Logon, IMGSERV.EXE launched (95/98/Me) - post launch (Code after
OpenFirst=1 drop-out)
•
1009 Several system calls completed
•
1010 After Keyboard Layout read in / prepare for paint
•
1011 System Timer set - last spot before paint
•
1012 After paint, pre System hooks (95/98/M3/NT)
•
1013 After System hooks set (95/98/M3/NT)
•
1014 Final call to DLL’s, last spot before message loop
•
1015 After message loop, before all internal cleanup
There are also several "critical error" spots that can be tested easily (refer to ConfigPath
setting to ensure you are working with correct file location!)
1) Rename MAC00000.KMF to something else (KM, BAK, etc.)
Run My-T-Soft - it will stop after 1006 and return false in WinMain
2) Rename MYTSOFT.INI to something else (IN, HLD, etc.)
Run My-T-Soft - it will stop after 1006 and return false in WinMain
3) Rename KEYBOARD.KBF to something else (KB, HLD, etc.)
Run My-T-Soft - it will stop after 1009 and return false in WinMain
Note: A normal startup will show through 1014 (and not show 1015 unless you close
the software). Setting ClassWatch & WindowWatch in the INI file will identify if
message loop is reached, and that the process is acting normally (outside of actual
window display). When this setting is enabled, the results will be shown on the top
lines of the screen.
As a separate reference, these details were asked by a customer doing custom integration
work, and the following is a generalized flow of the startup & important events when the
executable is started.
134
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
•
Opening Check - should MTSOPEN.EXE be run (reference OpenFirst settings in INI
file)
•
Verify MYTLIB.DLL (Existence, LoadLibrary)
•
Register Window Class (RegisterClassEx)
•
Create Windows (CreateWindowEx)
•
Verify System Timer Available
•
Initialize variables, global memory, files, etc.
•
Interface Libraries (LoadLibrary)
•
INI File
•
Keyboard Configuration file
•
Show/Update window (splash window - see Note below)
•
Message Loop
Splash Window Note (Window painting/WM_PAINT): The NoSplash setting in the
INI file or command line -NoSplash can be used for removing splash. The splash
processing is an added sequence prior to normal painting.
Build-A-Board Support
The 1.76 and newer versions now support KBF files (KeyBoard Files) from IMG’s
Build-A-Board 2.10 or later.
The following notes some of the issues on how this is implemented.
The KEYBOARD.KBF file is the Keyboard Layout file, and it determines which program
will be used to display & operate the layout. For KBF files built by Build-A-Board,
MYTSOFT2.EXE will be used. For the default KEYBOARD.KBF, MYTSOFT.EXE will
be used. When MYTSOFT2.EXE is used, the MYTSOFT.INI file is not referenced at all.
These are the key issues to be aware of when setting up which keyboard layout / program
each user will be presented:
There is no specific way to retrieve the layouts built by Build-A-Board into the
My-T-Soft folder. Build-A-Board should be installed on a development workstation or
stand-alone system. Once the required layout(s) are built, these may be copied from the
\Program Files\Build-A-Board\Target\[Project] folder, where [Project] is the name of the
Build-A-Board Project for the specific layout(s).
Note that the shortcut can be used to launch a specific layout specified via the command
line,
135
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
e.g. C:\Program Files\MYTSOFT\MYTSOFT.EXE /k=NUMERIC.KBF, or
C:\Program Files\MYTSOFT\MYTSOFT.EXE /k=KEYBOARD.NUM.
The specified file MUST be in same folder as the EXE.
When MYTSOFT.EXE is run, if the KEYBOARD.KBF file (or specified file via the
command line /k=[Keyboard Layout]) is for MYTSOFT2.EXE, MYTSOFT.EXE will
terminate, and launch MYTSOFT2.EXE.
The license for MYTSOFT2.EXE is the same as for My-T-Soft.
Refer to the Administrator Notes in the IMG License Manager for differences in the
Terminal Server version.
My-T-Soft Button Display
My-T-Soft uses only three graphical icons on its buttons, the rest consist only of text.
Two important points must be made about this:
1. It was our intention to make My-T-Soft easy to use for all levels of computer users.
Due to the sizing concerns of My-T-Soft, and the inherent problems of shrinking and
growing graphical images, dealing only with text was the most reasonable solution.
2. Even though a picture may be worth a thousand words, in most cases for My-T-Soft,
one will do. Also, to finalize our point, just sit in front of an unfamiliar application
with a graphical button bar, and quickly discern what each button does.
Hopefully, with Quick Help and the button name, a new user to My-T-Soft can learn the
function of each button quickly.
Finally, since the user can build Panels, imagine the amount of extra effort required to
build a graphical icon for each macro...
Stay tuned for Build-A-Board!
My-T-Soft Setup | Configuration | Special
To properly operate the Special Settings accessible at the My-T-Soft Special Handling
Screen, you must read the details about the Initialization file below. Primarily this screen
and its options are intended for advanced users who are already familiar enough with
Windows and its concepts. The settings available here allow for the customization of
My-T-Soft without the need to edit the MyTSpcl???? settings in the Initialization file.
To Add a new Window Name to the list, type the new name, and press Enter. Then select
the My-T-Soft action on the right.
136
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
To Delete an existing Window Name, Press the Delete Key and the Press Enter.
You may return to the default settings for MyTSpcl by pressing
the Return to Default button.
You may edit the Initialization file by clicking on the "Edit" button.
You may return to the Installation defaults by clicking on the Return to Installation
Defaults button. (This will copy the MYTSOFT.ORG file from the My-T-Soft Installation
Directory to the Windows Directory.) If you do this, we suggest you exit My-T-Soft and
restart.
Windows Notes
Tablet PC (Windows Vista / 7)
The Tablet PC Input Panel interface used in Windows XP is not available in Windows
Vista / 7. My-T-Soft can be used in conjunction with the various Tablet PC Input Panel
options available within Windows Vista / 7.
Fast User Switching (Windows XP)
Upon a switch from or to a user session, the software reacts to the
WM_WTSSESSION_CHANGE message by verifying the software is not minimized,
and restoring setup from the saved configuration. See the SessionChangeEnabled setting
in the Initialization file.
Korean Windows, default IME (Windows XP)
The IME creates a VK_PROCESSKEY / WM_KEYUP message when the pointing
device does a ?BUTTONUP event, causing problems with the building of characters from
the Korean layout.
Sounds (Advanced Notes)
External Wave File Integration
Version Specific Notes: If Sounds=1 or Sounds=2 is set in the commercial versions
(i.e. non-Assistive Technology version), the following details files and naming
requirements.
For foreign or custom keyboards and other uses, My-T-Soft allows the user to replace the
pre-recorded voice descriptions of the keys.
137
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
To add your own wave file, simply record the description required, and then place the
wave file into the installation directory in the Sounds folder (directory) (Default
C:\Program Files\MYTSOFT\SOUNDS) according to the following convention:
Each numbered key description should have a wave file
associated with the naming convention - Key 0, the Escape
key, would be "0.WAV" - Key 1, the F1 key, would be "1.WAV"
and so on up to "100.WAV", etc.
In other words, if there is a "0.WAV" file in the Sounds folder, and
Voices is the selected Sounds option, then the "0.WAV" file
will be played whenever the Escape key is pressed on My-T-Soft.
If the Sound option is Key-Click and there is a "KEYCLICK.WAV" in
the Sounds folder, then this wave will be played whenever a key on
My-T-Soft is pressed.
Key# Description
0 Escape Key
1 F1
2 F2
3 F3
4 F4
5 F5
6 F6
7 F7
8 F8
9 F9
10 F10
11 F11
12 F12
13 Select key
14 1/!
15 2/@
16 3/#
17 4/$
138
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
18 5/%
19 6/^
20 7/&
21 8/*
22 9/(
23 0/)
24 -/_
25 =/+
26 Back space
27 Tab
28 Q
29 W
30 E
31 R
32 T
33 Y
34 U
35 I
36 O
37 P
38 [/{
39 ]/}
40 Caps Lock
41 A
42 S
43 D
44 F
45 G
46 H
47 J
48 K
49 L
139
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
50 ;/:
51 ’/"
52 Enter Key
53 Enter Key - make both waves 52.WAV & 53.WAV
54 Shift / Left Shift
55 Z
56 X
57 C
58 V
59 B
60 N
61 M
62 ,/<
63 ./>
64 //?
65 Shift / Right Shift
66 \/|
67 Control / Left Control
68 Alt / Left Alt
69 Space Bar
70 Alt / Right Alt / Alt-Gr
71 Control / Left Control
These are on the edit panel
72 Print Screen
73 Scroll Lock
74 Pause
75 Insert
76 Home
77 Page Up
78 Delete
79 End
80 Page Down
140
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
81 Up Arrow
82 Left Arrow
83 Down Arrow
84 Right Arrow
These are on the Numeric keypad panel
85 CL indicator / not processed as key
86 NL indicator / not processed as key
87 SL indicator / not processed as key
88 Num Lock
89 /
90 *
91 92 7
93 8
94 9
95 +
96 4
97 5
98 6
99 1
100 2
101 3
102 Enter / =
103 0
104 decimal point
141
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
142
Chapter 10. Initialization File
Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
My-T-Soft uses MYTSOFT.INI to maintain various options and configuration settings.
Depending on the version of Windows and settings, there may be one file per user or a
shared file for all users.
My-T-Soft Initialization File Documentation
(MYTSOFT.INI)
Listed below are settings and information for specific applications that require special
actions by My-T-Soft, along with the Configuration settings for My-T-Soft. The Brackets
[ ] denote the area in the MYTSOFT.INI file, or the application name where special
consideration is required. Any lines starting with a semi-colon ( e.g. ; ) are comments and
detailed information not found in the MYTSOFT.INI file.
IMPORTANT NOTE: This documentation stretches back over 19 years, covers 4
major releases of Windows families, and over a dozen specific Windows versions.
Due to changes in the operating environment, certain settings and configuration
options have become obsolete. In most cases, these remain documented and
notated as obsolete. For customer support (and the sometimes extremely specific
customer needs), the multitude of options & flexibility has become a crucial aspect of
this software. Because of this, every last capability needs to be documented
somewhere, and this chapter is used for that purpose.
All Settings are the default Settings of My-T-Soft.
[Configuration]
The following is the default configuration for My-T-Soft at Install.
(Added in 1.78)
ConfigPath=1
This setting determines where the configuration files will be located. ConfigPath=0
means the configuration files will be in the installation folder - there are no per user
configuration files with this setting and user permissions must allow read-write access to
at least the KEYBOARD.KBF and MYTSOFT.INI, or users must run with a fixed
(read-only) configuration. When ConfigPath=1 or ConfigPath=2, each user will have their
own configuration files. If ConfigPath=3, these are in shared among all users in a public
location.
143
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
Note that the MYTSOFT.INI file in the installation folder determines the location of new
users’ configuration files, and if an administrator changes this after My-T-Soft has
already been used by other users, their existing individual configuration files will NOT be
transferred to the new location. What will happen is the software will be unable to find
configuration files for the current user in the current specified path, and a copy of the
current configuration files will be used as a starting point for this new location.
This is a breakdown by Operating System of the specific locations used - [User] indicates
the actual user logged onto the system, and [ProductDir] indicates the Product’s directory
name, e.g. the MYTSOFT folder.
ConfigPath Locations
ConfigPath: 0
Windows 2000/XP: \Program Files\[ProductDir]
Windows Vista/7: \Program Files\[ProductDir]
ConfigPath: 1
Windows 2000/XP: C:\Documents and Settings\[User]\Application Data\Innovation
Management Group\[ProductDir]
Windows Vista/7: C:\Users\[User]\AppData\Roaming\Innovation Management
Group\[ProductDir]
ConfigPath: 2
Windows 2000/XP: C:\Documents and Settings\[User]\Local Settings\Application
Data\Innovation Management Group\[ProductDir]
Windows Vista/7: C:\Users\[User]\AppData\Local\Innovation Management
Group\[ProductDir]
ConfigPath: 3
Windows 2000/XP: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Innovation
Management Group\[ProductDir]
Windows Vista/7: C:\ProgramData\Innovation Management Group\[ProductDir]
Contention=1
The Contention setting is the global or overriding setting - This must be set to 1 for the
individual application settings to be recognized by My-T-Soft - if you wish My-T-Soft to
remain over all applications, set Contention=0 - you will need to be careful in certain
applications as noted in the individual application settings below. This is referred to
"React to Dialogs..." in My-T-Soft Setup, additional details can be found in the Help for
the Operation Options dialog.
(Obsolete since 1.70)
InterfaceApproach=1
My-T-Soft has several internal strategies to interface with other windows in the Windows
environment. It is believed that the strategy indicated by InterfaceApproach=1 is the best
144
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
for all windows applications. This is obsolete for all 32-bit versions. This is left for
reference purposes & a reminder that the software still has internal options regarding the
interface approach.
OpenFirst=1
OpenAbout=0
OpenFirst is set at installation to automatically open with the My-T-Soft splash screen
and go directly into the My-T-Soft Welcome. This is set to 0 once My-T-Soft runs the
first time. It is not used again. If OpenAbout=1, My-T-Soft will Open with the My-T-Soft
Splash Screen instead of the quick My-T-Soft logo. It primarily is a left over from the
development stages of the opening logo, but was left in for those user’s who don’t mind
or prefer the longer opening.
OpenCentered=0
If OpenCentered=1, then the My-T-Soft window will be centered and placed in the lower
portion of the screen (based on the current resolution). This overrides the position setting
saved in the KBF file. Also, this will set OpenCentered=0, making this a one-time use
setting. When set, the internal logic centers horizontally based on the System metrics
(GetSystemMetrics API) for FullScreen X, and lower part of the screen based on
FullScreen Y (single monitor). This can be useful for externally controlling opening
position by overriding the KBF positioning, for testing, or for first-open / display
situations.
NoSplash=0
If NoSplash=0, then the splash (opening introduction) screens are used at Startup of
My-T-Soft. If NoSplash=1, then the intro screens are not used, and My-T-Soft opens as
previously configured. This option can be initiated at run-time / via a shortcut by adding
the -NoSplash option to the command line. (e.g. "C:\Program
Files\MYTSOFT\MYTSOFT.EXE -NoSplash")
TypeMatic=1
StartDelay=500
KeyDelay=20
The TypeMatic settings are for automatic typing when you hold down a key on
My-T-Soft. Set TypeMatic=1 if you wish this type of action, or set TypeMatic=0 if you
wish to disable automatic typing. The StartDelay and KeyDelay are only meaningful if
TypeMatic=1. StartDelay is the delay in milliseconds a key must be held down before the
TypeMatic action begins. The default is 500 milliseconds or 1/2 a second. The KeyDelay
is the delay between successive keystrokes sent. The KeyDelay setting is also in
milliseconds. Note that the enable/disable key options override the typematic setting.
Note also that TypeMatic is available in My-T-Soft Setup | Configuration | Operation
Options.
Cursor=2100
145
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
This is the current cursor that My-T-Soft uses while over the My-T-Soft Keyboard
display. Valid settings are as follows:
Small Right Hand is 2000
Small Left Hand is 2020
Small Right Hand with Int’l "Shift" symbol = 2040
Small Left Hand with Int’l "Shift" symbol = 2060
Large Right Hand is 2100
Large Left Hand is 2120
Large Right Hand with Int’l "Shift" symbol = 2140
Large Left Hand with Int’l "Shift" symbol = 2160
Standard Arrow = 2600
CrossHairs = 2620
Dot = 2640
Invisible / clear = 2660
TrapDialAKeyCursor=1
Note - the name is a hold-over from the Dial-A-Key option. In My-T-Soft, this is the
setting that indicates whether the cursor will be displayed over the Magnifier panel. If
TrapDialAKeyCursor=1, the cursor will be displayed over the magnified image. If
TrapDialAKeyCursor=0, the cursor will not be shown.
Icon=3100
This is the My-T-Soft Icon to that My-T-Soft will use when My-T-Soft minimizes to an
icon. Valid Settings are: Fixed Icons, My-T-Soft logos, Keyboard images, etc. 3000,
3001, 3002, 3003, 3004, 3005, 3006, 3007 My-T-Soft Text Icons (diff’t colors) 3050,
3051, 3052, 3053, 3054, 3055, 3056 Animating icons 3100, 3104, 3108
(Obsolete)
IconAnimate=0
NOTE: This is a holdover from the original Windows 3.0 release. For all Windows
versions beyond 1995, this should be 0. The Icon settings are for which Icon My-T-Soft
displays upon minimizing to an icon, and if the icon should animate. NOTE: Some icons
are not meant to animate, so if IconAnimate=1 the only animation action will be to flash
the border. The IconAnimate setting is used to tell My-T-Soft to animate the icon if it is
an animating icon and IconAnimate=1. Set IconAnimate=0 to disable icon animation.
(Obsolete)
IconOnTop=1
146
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
NOTE: This is a holdover from the original Windows 3.0 release. For all Windows
versions beyond 1995, this is not used. If IconOnTop=1, the Icon will remain as a
topmost window, so the icon will always be visible. If IconOnTop=0, the My-T-Soft icon
will be a normal window, and will fall behind other windows.
MinimizeToButton=1
If MinimizeToButton=1, My-T-Soft will minimize to a button (title bar button) instead of
an Icon, and ignore other Icon settings. If MinimizeToButton=0, My-T-Soft will
minimize to an Icon (Taskbar button). If MinimizeToButton=2, then the Tray Icon will be
used. If MinimizeToButton=3, then My-T-Soft will minimize to a movable/sizable
window.
CaptionWatch=0
ButtonOffsetX=0
ButtonOffsetY=0
These are special settings for the Minimize to Button option. Since there may be other
windows that use the top left portion of the caption bar, the following settings may help
alleviate any conflicts:
In Windows 95 & greater, the right side of the caption bar is used - negative values may
be used to adjust towards the left. If CaptionWatch=1, My-T-Soft will sense if there is a
Window other than the window that owns the caption bar in the area that the My-T-Soft
button will be placed. My-T-Soft will then move to the right of the Window that is
already in the caption bar. If the above does not work for your application, you may add
in button offsets to move the top-left position of the button - these will be added to the
original position of the button and the My-T-Soft button will then be placed at the offset.
(Added in 1.76)
ButtonOverrideW=0
ButtonOverrideH=0
By default, the button sizes to the height of the caption bar (title bar) using the GDI call
StretchBlt. A customer requested the ability to modify the width of the button for
touchscreen users, so these settings have been added to allow full customization of the
displayed button (when minimize to the button state is selected). For both
ButtonOverrideW (width), and ButtonOverrideH (height), if set to 0, then the default
calculations occur (e.g. fixed width, size height to caption bar). If ButtonOverrideW is
non-zero, then the entered size (in pixels) is used for the width. If ButtonOverrideH is
non-zero, then the entered size (in pixels) is used for the height. DO NOT USE negative
values - your button will not appear! (Select an alternative minimize option to get at
My-T-Soft if this occurs). Because the Stretch Bitmap call is used to fill out the display,
the button display may be distorted, especially as you get further from the default size.
147
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
Minimize to Window Options (Floating button in a Window): In 1.79, these
settings take on a meaning when MinimizeToButton=3 (minimize to a floating button
in a movable/sizable window). A customer requested the ability to open in the
minimized state, yet separate the default opening position of the floating window and
the keyboard. To accommodate this, these settings take on similar meanings for the
Window minimize option. If ButtonOverrideW is non-0, then the width for the floating
window is specified in the INI setting. Similarly, if ButtonOverrideH is non-0, then the
height for the floating window is specified in the INI setting.
(Added in 1.78)
ButtonOverrideX=-20000
ButtonOverrideY=-20000
By default, the button positions itself on the active window’s caption bar (title bar). A
customer requested the ability to force the minimized button to always position itself in
one place on the screen. When these values are present in the INI file (or any value
greater than -20000), then the entered ButtonOverrideX and / or ButtonOverrideY values
will be used when minimized to a button. For example, if ButtonOverrideX=754 and
ButtonOverrideY=0, then the button will always position itself on the upper right (800 x
600) of the screen, ignoring the active window. These settings are independent internally,
but in practical usage they need to specificy a fixed screen position.
Minimize to Window Options (Floating button in a Window): In 1.79, these
settings take on a meaning when MinimizeToButton=3 (minimize to a floating button
in a movable/sizable window). A customer requested the ability to open in the
minimized state, yet separate the default opening position of the floating window and
the keyboard. To accommodate this, these settings take on similar meanings for the
Window minimize option. If ButtonOverrideX is something other than -20000, then
the X screen position for the floating window is as set in this INI setting. Similarly, if
ButtonOverrideY is something other than -20000, then the Y screen position for the
floating window is as set in this INI setting. If command line overrides are used, they
will be used (these settings will not override the command line override).
(Added in 1.78)
ButtonIgnoreWindowXY=0,0
If this entry exists in the INI file, then this establishes a lower limit (if both the x,y entries
are non-0), then these values will be used as a check against the active window, and if the
window’s size (X and Y) is less than the entries specified here, then the button will NOT
position on this window. This was requested by a customer to prevent the button from
moving to small display windows. For example, if ButtonIgnoreWindowXY=100,100
than any window less than 100 x 100 will be ignored when determining the active
148
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
window. Note that BOTH entries are used, so if a window is 200 x 50, then it would not
be ignored, since the X value is not less than 100.
(Added in 1.78)
ButtonSingleMonitorLimit=0
If ButtonSingleMonitorLimit=1, then a call to GetSystemMetrics(SM_CMONITORS) is
called and if the system has only 1 monitor, then the button will not be allowed to move
off-screen (for example, if the active window has a title bar off screen, or the window is
wider than the screen). The ButtonOffsetX/ButtonOffsetY entries are used in the
calculation, but the screen will still limit the location of the minimized button. If
ButtonSingleMonitorLimit=2, then the single screen limit will be used, regardless of how
many monitors in the system.
BackgroundColor=6201
The BackgroundColor setting is the Keyboard Background color that paints the
background of the Keyboard & Edit & Magnifier panels. Valid settings are as follows:
6200 - 6215 Solid Colors
6216 - 6230 Various Dithered Grays/White/Black
Note: The dithered colors may paint improperly on some My-T-Soft sizes.
SlideOption=1
If SlideOption=1 My-T-Soft panels will slide out & snap in.
If SlideOption=0 My-T-Soft panels will snap out & snap in.
Size=9
This is the My-T-Soft display size. Valid sizes are 1-12 if set manually.
Version 1.67 added infinite sizes - values greater than 12 should not be handled here - use
the SzUp & SzDn in the software to change sizes larger than 12. The software handles
the transition from 1 to 9, 10 to 12, 12 to 13, and 13 and larger differently. The sizing
issues arise from maintaining the aspect ratio, visual aesthetics, and internal coding that
should be reworked. At some point, it may be. As it exists, arbitrarily changing the sizes
in increments greater than 1 can cause problems, especially if crossing the transition from
the original sizes (i.e. 1-12) and larger sizes. It is recommended that all sizing be handled
within the normal operation of the software. Refer to the Devevloper’s Kit utilities, such
as Copy and Configure MTS, that can arbitrarily change the size configuration of
My-T-Soft on-the-fly for sizing flexibility.
SizeMax=12 (example)
SizeMin=8 (example)
When these values are present, they determine boundaries where the user cannot change
the size below SizeMin or above SizeMax. When the size is at the SizeMin, the SzDn key
and menu options to size down are disabled, and when the size is at the SizeMax, the
149
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
SzUp and menu options to size up are disabled. These can be used together, or
independently. These settings were requested by a customer to keep a set range of sizes
available to the user, but not let the user stray too far from the preferred working sizes.
Center=1
RestorePosition=0
The Center setting is used to automatically center My-T-Soft on the screen if it is
repositioned due to an window conflict. Set Center=1 if you wish to center My-T-Soft
when it is moved, or Set Center=0 if you wish My-T-Soft stay in the same horizontal
position on the screen. If RestorePosition=1, My-T-Soft will remember the screen
position it was at when it was forced to move due to a window conflict, and then restore
that position when the conflicting window is no longer the active window. If
RestorePosition=0, My-T-Soft will remain at its new position when forced to move due to
a window conflict. Note: Window conlicts are set below in the Class Settings for window
Classes & Actions. Note: Most users felt that it was less annoying for My-T-Soft to
remain at its new position, than to constantly jump back & forth.
TwoButtonMouse=1
If TwoButtonMouse=1, then My-T-Soft will ignore the middle button, regardless of the
MouseButtons settings below, and My-T-Soft Setup will not allow the user to change the
middle button setting. If TwoButtonMouse=0 My-T-Soft & My-T-Soft Setup will assume
there is a 3 button Mouse, and that the proper drivers are installed for use within
Windows.
IMPORTANT: My-T-Soft will not work with the middle button if the proper drivers are
not installed. The default IBM PS/2, Microsoft drivers do not support the middle button,
and even some drivers of 3 button mice do not support the middle button within
Windows. Check with your mouse manufacturer to obtain the proper drivers if you have a
3 button mouse and Windows does not recognize the middle button.
Keyboard=1
This is the Keyboard description file My-T-Soft uses to define the 101 Key panel layout.
The 104 layouts start in the 100+ range, so adding 100 to the 2-digit listing refers to the
104 key layouts, e.g. 101 is the US Standard 104 key layout. Over the 19 years &
different Windows versions, our support team would be notified that a particular layout
was not correct in a certain version of Windows. Since with any particular release,
multiple versions of Windows are supported, and it was thought that a keyboard layout
would remain consistent, changes to the layouts were deemed problematic - for example,
if it was changed for Windows version X, this change would cause problems in older
versions of Windows. So certain layouts are tagged "Old" to reflect that it might be
required for an older version of Windows. The values 1-96, and 101-196, and any 200+
entries listed are valid, and are related as follows:
01 = U.S. Standard, 02 = U.S. Dvorak Standard, 03 = U.S. Dvorak Left-Handed, 04 =
U.S. Dvorak Right-Handed, 05 = U.S. My-T-Easy (ABC) Alphabetic Keyboard, 06 =
150
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
Belgian (comma), 07 = British, 08 = Canadian Multi-lingual, 09 = Danish, 10 = Dutch, 11
= Finnish, 12 = French, 13 = French Canadian, 14 = German, 15 = Icelandic, 16 = Italian,
17 = Latin American, 18 = Norwegian, 19 = Portuguese, 20 = Spanish, 21 = Swedish, 22
= Swiss French, 23 = Swiss German, 24 = U.S. International, 25 = Hungarian (Old), 26 =
Belgian (period), 27 = Arabic, 28 = Belarusian, 29 = Bulgarian, 30 = Bulgarian (Latin),
31 = Croatian, 32 = Czech (Old), 33 = Czech (Qwerty), 34 = Estonian, 35 = Greek, 36 =
Hebrew, 37 = Hungarian, 38 = Irish, 39 = Latvian, 40 = Latvian (Latin), 41 = Polish
(Old), 42 = Romanian, 43 = Russian (old), 44 = Slovak, 45 = Slovak (Qwerty), 46 =
Turkish (F type), 47 = Turkish (Q type), 48 = Spanish (Mexico), 49 = U.S. Fazekas, 50 =
U.S. Chubon, 51 = Slovenian, 52=Japanese, 53 = Chinese, 54 = Korean, 55 = French
(Belgian), 56 = French (Luxembourg), 57 = German (Austrian), 58 = German
(Leichtenstein), 59 = German (Luxembourg), 60 = Spanish (Argentina), 61 = Spanish
(Bolivia), 62 = Spanish (Chile), 63 = Spanish (Columbia), 64 = Spanish (Costa Rica), 65
= Spanish (Dominican Republic), 66 = Spanish (Ecuador), 67 = Dutch (Belgian), 68 =
Dutch (Netherlands), 69 = Italian (Switzerland), 70 = Norwegian (Bokmal), 71 =
Portuguese (Brazilian), 72 = Spanish (Guatemala), 73 = Spanish (El Salvador), 74 =
Spanish (Honduras), 75 = Spanish (Modern Sort), 76 = Spanish (Nicaragua), 77 =
Spanish (Panama), 78 = Spanish (Paraguay), 79 = Spanish (Peru), 80 = Spanish (Puerto
Rico), 81 = Spanish (Uruguay), 82 = Spanish (Venezuela), 83 = English (Australian), 84
= English (New Zealand), 85 = English (Jamaica), 86 = English (United Kingdom), 87 =
Chinese (Cangjie), 88 = Canadian Multilingual, 89 = Polish, 90 = Polish Programmer, 91
= Thai, 92 = U.S. Plum, 93 = Russian (Cyrillic), 94 = Danish (ABC), 95 = U.S. (Numpad
Enter), 96 = Czech, 97 = Belgian (period), 101-197 are the 104 key layouts matching the
above, 200 = 104 British (1st alternate), 201 = 104 British (2nd alternate), 202 = 104
Hebrew (Alt.), 203 = 104 Chinese (Zhuyin) (Alt.), 204 = 104 Arabic (Alt.)
DriveTypesToCheck=1
DefaultDrive=C
CheckFloppies=0
These values are for the System Information display.
DriveTypesToCheck can take 4 values, which have the following meanings:
0 = Do not check Removable Drive Types, or Network Drives
1 = Do not check Removable Drive Types, Check Network Drives
2 = Check Removable Drive Types, but Do Not Check Network Drives
3 = Check Both Removable & Network Drives
DefaultDrive is the drive letter of the default drive that My-T-Soft displays in the System
Information Panel.
Valid letters are A through Z.
CheckFloppies=0 means that My-T-Soft will not look at drive letters A or B. If
CheckFloppies=1, My-T-Soft will look at Floppy Drives A and B.
151
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
CheckMinMax=1
If CheckMinMax=1, My-T-Soft will check for the existence of the Minimize Button &
Maximize Button on the Caption Bar of the Window before Minimizing or Maximizing
the window when MIN or MAX is used on the Windows Controls Panels. Set
CheckMinMax=0 to bypass this check. This is important for custom window displays
that do not use the standard windows controls for Minimize and Maximize.
ClassWatch=0
WindowWatch=0
KeyWatch=0
SetActiveWindowWatch=0
SkipTopMostAction=0
These settings can be used for debugging certain aspects of the operation within
Windows, or which specific key numbers correspond to key operation on My-T-Soft
These settings are for individuals experienced with Windows Environment and window
classes & names, and Windows programming, or at least its concepts.
The ClassWatch & WindowWatch settings are for watching the Class Name & Window
Name of the active Window. These primarily are for finding this information so that the
Special Settings & Class Settings can be modified for My-T-Soft to work with other
application Windows. If ClassWatch=1 My-T-Soft will display on the upper portion of
the display the Class Name of the active window. If WindowWatch=1 My-T-Soft will
display on the upper portion of the display the Window Name of the active window. Once
this information has been determined, the ClassWatch & WindowWatch should be set
back to 0.
KeyWatch=1 will display the keys affected by the enable/disable key option - this will
display the number + 1000. Only the alpha and edit panel keys are displayed. This is
useful if building a different keyboard mapping, and need to identify which key number
is which.
SetActiveWindowWatch=1 will display which internal call is being used to call the
SetForegroundWindow API from My-T-Soft. This can determine which area of code is
responsible for this API call. For more details on this, refer to Microsoft’s documentation
on the SetForegroundWindow API function, and the changes that occurred in Windows
2000 with regards to changing the keyboard focus and active (i.e. foreground) window
programmatically. This entry also serves a double duty, and it displays a code identifying
the internal call used to save data to the KEYBOARD.KBF file.
If SkipTopMostAction=1, this bypasses the internal code that tries to bring My-T-Soft to
the topmost position during normal operation. In general, having an on-screen keyboard
fall behind other windows is not productive. However, there can be conflicts and issues if
multiple windows are trying to maintain the topmost position in the Windows internal
window manager list. Also, it has been the general consensus that menus in the system
152
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
remain above the on-screen keyboard. During operation from a pen, touchscreen, or other
pointing device, selecting menu selections is easier, more intuitive, and more effective
directly from the pointing device, rather than indirectly from the on-screen keyboard. You
can refer to the MenuClasses entry below for Menu interface options. For debugging
purposes, or to see how My-T-Soft will operate by bypassing this window interface code,
you can set SkipTopMostAction=1.
SetupSaveSettings=0
(The next 2 are obsolete)
SetupAutoLoad=0
SetupAutoRun=0
These settings are for My-T-Soft Setup to track whether My-T-Soft has been configured
for these special settings. They are used as follows:
The SetupSaveSettings is used if My-T-Soft is running. If SetupSaveSettings=1,
My-T-Soft will update its configuration file when My-T-Soft Setup is closed. This will
ensure that My-T-Soft will open with the current configuration. This is default set to 0 so
the user can become familiar with all of the My-T-Soft configuration options before
deciding which configuration My-T-Soft will open with. If the user is confused as to why
My-T-Soft does not open the way they left it, then this setting should be set to 1. NOTE:
This will only work for configuration changes made in My-T-Soft Setup. SetupAutoLoad
& SetupAutoRun are used internally to track whether My-T-Soft has modified the
WIN.INI file "load" and "run" options.
The SetupAutoLoad and SetupAutoRun have been disabled since version 1.32 because of
user confusion. Most users use the StartUp group, or understand the Load and Run
settings in the WIN.INI. They remain because they may be reworked and included in a
future release.
EnableOperator=0
Password=5F626274
(OnScreen Note - The EnableOperator setting is used for the Basic & Advanced modes in
OnScreen - the Password and Supervisor/Operator mode are not available in OnScreen)
The Supervisor/Operator mode has been included, but it is default off. If
EnableOperator=1, then My-T-Soft opens in the Operator mode. This disables the
My-T-Soft Tool button, and the My-T-Soft Menu button, and requires a password to be
entered before My-T-Soft Setup is opened. This effectively limits the Operator to one
(saved) configuration, but allows a supervisor to modify or change the My-T-Soft
configuration if necessary.
Note: The password is encrypted - the default entry above corresponds to "PASS". The
My-T-Soft Control Panel should NOT be available for use by the Operator, as this would
allow the operator to modify the My-T-Soft configuration. Note that once the Setup
153
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
password has been entered, My-T-Soft operates in the supervisor mode. Close both Setup
& My-T-Soft, then restart My-T-Soft to re-enable the operator mode.
OperatorNoMin=0
(OnScreen note - this requires the Supervisor/Operator mode and therefore is not
available in OnScreen)
The default Operator mode still allows the operator to minimize My-T-Soft. To Disable
this option, set OperatorNoMin=1, and the minimize button will no longer function,
disabling all of the buttons on the Tool Bar.
ControlLogo=0
(OnScreen note: This is not supported)
When in operator mode, it is sometimes desirable to remove the visual display of the
buttons on the Tool Bar. When ControlLogo=1, an optional Bitmap file will be loaded
and displayed over the Tool Bar buttons. This is a developer enhancement, and the
following details assume a general understanding of Windows:
Requirements for ControlLogo=1
In the installation or user directory specified by ConfigPath, 12 bitmap files
corresponding to the 12 sizes of My-T-Soft need to be created:
NAME, WIDTH IN PIXELS, HEIGHT IN PIXELS
LOGO01.BMP, 12, 46
LOGO02.BMP, 15, 58
LOGO03.BMP, 18, 70
LOGO04.BMP, 21, 82
LOGO05.BMP, 24, 94
LOGO06.BMP, 27, 106
LOGO07.BMP, 30, 118
LOGO08.BMP, 33, 130
LOGO09.BMP, 36, 142
LOGO10.BMP, 47, 190
LOGO11.BMP, 62, 250
LOGO12.BMP, 83, 322
These files could be created via PaintBrush, or any other tool that creates bitmaps. Only
16-color bitmaps are recommended because of memory & speed issues, but higher
resolutions should operate satisfactorily. However, only 16-color bitmaps are guaranteed
to work. If no bitmap file is present for the current size, then no buttons are displayed,
154
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
and a black background appears. Sample/template bitmaps may be downloaded via
IMG’s Web site at http://www.imgpresents.com/imgdev.htm
Prior to the 1.78 release, the installation path was the only possible location. In the
original 1.78 release, this actually used the location of the user’s configuration, e.g. the
path based on the ConfigPath entry. In 1.78 Release 2, the following logic is used: The
location specified by the ConfigPath entry is used, and if the logo bitmap file does not
exist, the installation folder is tried. This allows more flexibility, so that different users
can have different custom logos, or a machine level setting can be used by placing the
logo bitmaps in the installation folder. This can also allow a specific user to override the
default logos.
Editor=NOTEPAD.EXE
ControlPanel=CONTROL.EXE
ControlPanelKeyboard=rundll32.exe shell32.dll,Control_RunDLL main.cpl @1,1
These are the default settings for My-T-Soft Setup. Editor is the Executable used to
modify the MYTSOFT.INI file accessed from My-T-Soft Setup, Configuration, Special.
ControlPanel is the Windows Control Panel accessed by My-T-Soft Setup, Keyboards.
ControlPanelKeyboard is the Windows Keyboard Layout Applet for selecting the current
keyboard layout that is in use. These may be changed if relevant for the Windows
Configuration in use.
InstallPath=C:\%PROGRAMFILESDIR%\MYTSOFT
This is created at Installation time to signify the chosen InstallPath. If you need to move
My-T-Soft, we suggest you Un-Install, and then re-install My-T-Soft to the new path.
ShowKeys=111111111111111111111111111111...
This setting indicates which keys are visible for the standard keyboard (Alpha) panel. The
Esc key is key 0 and the count increases from left to right, row by row. A 1 indicates that
the key is visible, and a 0 indicates that the key will not be painted, and not accessible.
AllowFrameMove=1
This is for controlled applications, or where there may be extraneous movement caused
by the touchscreen driver. If AllowFrameMove=1 then any non-key area will trigger the
move My-T-Soft action via click & drag. If AllowFrameMove=0, then it will not be
possible to move My-T-Soft via the selected button click. My-T-Soft must be moved via a
secondary button selection (My-T-Soft Setup, Mouse Buttons) or by an external
application.
VirtualPointer=1
If VirtualPointer=0, then the default action of My-T-Soft for button clicks and moves is in
use. This setting is best for standard system hardware such as the mouse, trackball,
touchscreen, or pen. Set VirtualPointer=1 if software control for the mouse cursor
(pointer), or other devices are in use. If there are any problems experienced while moving
155
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
the My-T-Soft window using a click, drag, release, then VirtualPointer=1 may also be
tried.
SingleKeyPerClick=0
This setting is used to distinguish the operation of My-T-Soft for clicks. The default
action (SingleKeyPerClick=0) is to act exactly like a physical mechanical spring key,
where a down click; drag off motion will generate a keystrokes (i.e. once the finger is
dragged off the key, it will bounce up and this will generate a keystroke). If
SingleKeyPerClick=1, then only the key that was pointed to during the down click will be
generated, even if the cursor is dragged onto adjacent keys or other parts of the
My-T-Soft window. If the cursor is dragged off of the My-T-Soft window while this
setting is on, then the key-up event will occur, and the keystroke will be generated. It is
recommended that the Typematic setting be set off if SingleKeyPerClick is set on to
disable multiple keystrokes of the same "down" key.
BorderNoHit=0
This setting is used to identify pixels around the edge of the keys (top, left, bottom, right)
that will not be used to identify a key press. Since the setting is in pixels, the actual values
will differ between the 12 sizes available. A setting of 6 for My-T-Soft size 8 will create a
noticeable border. Valid values are from 0 to 100. Note that a pixel value larger than the
1/2 the key size in pixels will result in an unusable configuration, and values larger than
the key may create software errors in internal calculations.
ForceUnHook=0
The ForceUnHook option toggles an internal variable that is used to track whether the
system journal hooks should be set at all times, or only when the cursor is over a typing
panel. The primary reason for this is to test / resolve potential conflicts with other
software applications.
Note: Because of internal operation of the variable, it is opposite to the displayed setting
in Operation Options, e.g. ForceUnHook=0 results from Track Pointing Device input at
all times being set On (checked), and ForceUnHook=1 results from Track Pointing
Device input at all times being set Off (cleared)
1.70 notes: This has taken on a stronger meaning with the 1.70 release. We have found
that only a few non-mouse drivers truly emulate the mouse driver functionality. In order
to support touchscreen, pen, and non-mouse drivers that do not put sufficient delays (and
let other window processes run) between the move and click events, the system hooks
Always on (i..e. Track Pointining Device Input at all times) is required to handle focus
issues in all pre-Win 2000 versions of Windows. In general, a mouse cannot generate a
click until it is moved into position (generating WM_MOUSEMOVE messages over the
target window) - My-T-Soft uses these messages to set System hooks in preparation for
the possible WM_?BUTTONDOWN messages, to prevent the focus switching events.
When a touchscreen, pen, or other non-mouse driver moves & sends click events without
a delay or release to other window processes running (part of the pseudo- multitasking
required by properly written windows programs), My-T-Soft cannot prepare for the focus
156
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
shifting events. "Click on release" settings in the driver may alleviate the undesirable
results, or leaving these hooks Always on can also make for more desirable operation. A
great deal of effort was made to resolve the focus issues without the use of these system
hooks, but only through the use of these could seamless operation occur throughout all
windows applications & input situations. If problems arise where the system hooks
settings causes My-T-Soft to become unresponsive, setting Track Pointing Device Input
at all times off may resolve this situation, and investigating options within the pointing
device driver (touchscreen, pen, etc.) may be helpful.
2 additional notes
1) Windows 2000 and above do not require the use of system hooks, so this setting is not
relevant (and the situations described above do not apply)
2) Try My-T-Soft on the system with an actual mouse device - if the problems do not
occur, please contact the device driver manufacturer and inform them that their pointing
device driver does not emulate a mouse properly.
NoHooksEver=0
This is the setting called Alternate Virtual Interface in My-T-Soft Setup In Windows
2000/XP, there is no need for the system hooks, and this setting is automatically enabled
when running in Windows 2000/XP. In testing with older and assistive technology
devices & software, it was found that some of these require this setting (95/98/Me/NT). If
you experience any typing difficulties & a general non-responsiveness from My-T-Soft,
you may try NoHooksEver=1 (Alternate Virtual Interface set On).
(This is obsolete)
RunAddFontResource=0
This was added to remove the call to the AddFontResource Windows API for Windows
95 / 98. On certain systems, the delay induced by Windows during this call caused
problems in other programs / Windows during startup.
Since it is not required if the software was properly installed, it was removed in version
1.61. It still is called if run in Windows 3.1. Set RunAddFontResource=1 to force this call
during startup in Windows 95 / 98. This settings has no effect for Windows 3.1.
KeyboardUpdate=0
This setting is used as a flag when a keyboard layout is modified in Setup to indicate that
the character set, AltGr status, and lowercase display setting should be read from the
KMF file. It is managed automatically through Setup, but if keyboard layouts are
modified manually, it may be wise to set this to 1 prior to running My-T-Soft.
KeyboardFontBase=MyTMouse
KeyboardFontMedium=MyTMouse
KeyboardFontLarge=Arial
KeyboardCharSetBase=22
157
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
KeyboardCharSetMedium=22
KeyboardCharSetLarge=0
Keyboard1SizeAdjBase=0
Keyboard1SizeAdjMedium=0
Keyboard1SizeAdjLarge=1
Sizes 1-6 are the Base sizes. For almost all uses, the MyTMouse font is the best choice.
Medium Sizes are 7-9.
Large Sizes are 10-12 and sizes greater than 12.
The Character Set for Base / Medium / Large (KeyboardCharSet...) settings allow
changing the character set used to reference the keyboard characters.
The following lists documented sets
ANSI_CHARSET = 0
DEFAULT_CHARSET = 1
SYMBOL_CHARSET = 2
MyTMouse = 22
MAC_CHARSET = 77
SHIFTJIS_CHARSET = 128
HANGEUL_CHARSET = 129
HANGUL_CHARSET = 129
JOHAB_CHARSET = 130
GB2312_CHARSET = 134
CHINESEBIG5_CHARSET = 136
GREEK_CHARSET = 161
TURKISH_CHARSET = 162
VIETNAMESE_CHARSET 163
HEBREW_CHARSET = 177
ARABIC_CHARSET = 178
BALTIC_CHARSET = 186
RUSSIAN_CHARSET = 204
THAI_CHARSET = 222
EASTEUROPE_CHARSET = 238
OEM_CHARSET = 255
158
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
In general, use 22 for MyTMouse and 0 (ANSI) otherwise.
This affects the Windows GDI selection of fonts, and can be useful if specific characters
are not being selected as desired from the current KYBD????.KMF.
The Keyboard1SizeAdj... settings refers to the amount subtracted from the available area
of the key (total pixels) used to display the font character. Even though it strongly affects
key displays of 1 character (i.e. alphanumeric keys on the Keyboard (Alpha) panel), it
does have some effect on all buttons displayed. As the numbers increase the calculated
area available for the required display character(s) becomes smaller, forcing a smaller
font to display.
LowerCaseDisplay=1
If LowerCaseDisplay=1, then the default keyboard display will contain lower case
characters, only changing to upper case when the Shift or Caps Lock is engaged. If
LowerCaseDisplay=0, then Upper Case characters will always be used on the keyboard
display.
IgnoreSystemCapsLock=0
This setting was asked for by a customer using the TS version with Citrix. Apparently
there are some synchronization problems within different client versions of Citrix, and
the Caps lock operation can be inconsistent. By default, My-T-Soft queries the system to
establish the Caps Lock state - on a normal PC, this operates as one would expect - the
Caps Lock state stays in sync between the physical keyboard and My-T-Soft. By setting
IgnoreSystemCapsLock=1, the portions of code that monitor the system Caps lock state
are bypassed. Note that when the Caps Lock key is used on My-T-Soft, the appropriate
keystroke is sent, but the state (key display / Caps lock ligh on Num panel) within
My-T-Soft will not reflect the change, because the system is not being queried, and these
updates are bypassed. In order to address all possible system situations based on the Caps
Lock state, additional options have been added. The following lists the 6 different settings
available for IgnoreSystemCapsLock:
•
IgnoreSystemCapsLock=0 (Default)
•
IgnoreSystemCapsLock=1 Does not repaint based on System Caps Lock
•
IgnoreSystemCapsLock=2 Paint Capped keys based on Internal Caps Lock state, but
do not change key action
•
IgnoreSystemCapsLock=3 Paint Capped keys based on Internal Caps Lock state,
change key action to shifted state if capped (This emulates Caps Lock action if Caps
Lock is NEVER set on system)
•
IgnoreSystemCapsLock=4 Paint Capped keys based on Internal Caps Lock state,
change key action to shifted state if NOT capped (This emulates Caps Lock action if
Caps Lock is ALWAYS set on system)
159
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
•
IgnoreSystemCapsLock=5 Paint Capped keys based on Internal Caps Lock state,
change key action to opposite of capped state (this would be used if the caps lock state
is always opposite the Internal Caps lock state - however, this suggests the caps lock
works on the system, so you really shouldn’t be ignoring it)
CapsLockMode=0
If CapsLockMode=0, then the key will visually latch based on the Caps Lock mode, e.g.
the Caps Lock will be shown as a key down for Caps Lock On, key up for Caps Lock Off.
If CapsLockMode=1, then the Caps Lock key will be treated as any other key, and not
tied to Caps Lock State
UseOrgCutCopyPasteUndo=0
This setting is to accommodate the change from Common User Interface (Consistent
User Interface) (Consistent??) options for Cut Copy Paste & Undo. Most applications
support both versions, but for those that do not, or require the original keystrokes, this
setting has been provided. Note that My-T-Soft uses the newer version by default.
UseOrgCutCopyPasteUndo=0 means:
Cut = Ctrl-X
Copy = Ctrl-C
Paste = Ctrl-V
Undo = Ctrl-Z
UseOrgCutCopyPasteUndo=1 means:
Cut = Shift-Del
Copy = Ctrl-Ins
Paste = Shift-Ins
Undo = Alt-Backspace
DragMode=2
The DragMode setting was added to be more consistent with the Windows appearance
settings. The following are the settings & what they mean: DragMode=0, drag full
window contents, ignore Windows settings; DragMode=1, drag with focus rectangle,
ignore Windows settings; DragMode=2, use Windows settings to determine drag mode
HoldShiftCtrl=0
This was added as a test for a customer, and has been left as an option. By default,
My-T-Soft holds the shift & control state until the key is actually sent. For example, with
a Shift-T - this results in a Shift-Down at the shift key press, then a T-down, T-up,
Shift-up after a T key press. (Same for the Ctrl key). With HoldShiftCtrl=1, the
Shift-down is held until the T key press, resulting in a Shift-down, T-down, T-up, Shift-up
when the T key is released. The Alt key is the System key in Windows, and it is not
included within this option.
160
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
MenuOffset=200
This setting was added in 1.70 to address Windows 98 & its multiple monitor support.
This is updated internally as the popup My-T-Soft menu is is used (offset is the width of
menu). Windows 98 incorrectly displays the menu off screen (does not adjust to ensure
that the menu is visible on the screen). Therefore, there are some adjustments made prior
to using the Windows API TrackPopupMenu when in Windows 98. Issues: The
LICENSE.EXE updates the registry at: HKLM\Software\ Innovation Management
Group\Windows with a version # - this must be "98" to invoke this action (only a problem
in Windows 98). The width itself is adjusted when one of the secondary popup menus is
used (Size, Settings, Position).
If the Windows Display Properties | Appearance modifies the displayed width of the
popup menu, one of these menus is required to be opened to force an update of the offset
value internally.
Transparency=0
This setting is for Windows 2000 and later. When set to 1, various options are enabled
with My-T-Soft to allow modifying the transparency for the displayed window. When
enabled, the TransparencyLevel defines how "visible" the window is - a lower-limit of 20
has been set in the SEETHRU.EXE (to prevent the user from making the keyboard
completely invisible), and the level of 255 makes the window completely opaque (the
disabled state).
TransparencyLevel=75
This is the current level of visibility, where 0 means invisible, and 255 means the window
is opaque (same as if the Transparency were 0 (disabled)). The little control program
(SEETHRU.EXE) has a lower limit of 20, and these settings are saved to this INI file
when My-T-Soft gets the message from SEETHRU. You can make the window invisible
by setting Transparency=1 and TransparencyLevel=0, and then do not run
SEETHRU.EXE. See the Developer’s Kit for external control info.
(This is obsolete)
Begin WinLogon settings
The WinLogon settings & following support settings are for 95/98, and handled by
IMGLOGON.EXE - My-T-Soft Logon Utilities The following section runs through
AllowDomainEdit.
WinLogon=0
If WinLogon=1, then special code is used to properly type into the windows logon screen
(Network Client, Windows user logon, etc.). This is a patch to work prior to release of
fully 32-bit My-T-Soft. My-T-Soft should be run via RunServices option in registry:
HKLM\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\RunServices
(These are obsolete)
1.70 Notes
161
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
The ForcePassword????? Options only affect operation during the use of the Map
Network Drive dialog
ForcePasswordLower=0
ForcePasswordUpper=0
These two settings change the way characters are sent to the windows logon / password
dialog. Set ForcePasswordLower=1 to force lowercase characters to be sent, or set
ForcePasswordUpper=1 to force uppercase characters. ForcePasswordUpper will
override the ForcePasswordLower setting.
ForcePasswordMixed=1
This setting overrides the upper & lower case settings and allows mixed case &
punctuation entry. Most networks only allow a limited set of password characters, but this
setting was added for additional flexibility, and set as the default. The original
specification from a customer for this option was all Upper case, and other customers
eventually required these additional options.
Version 1.70 Notes: DisableEnter changes, and UserNameNotPassword and
AllowDomainEdit are not used.
DisableEnter=0
Version 1.70 modified this entry, managed by the My-T-Soft Logon Utilities
This setting is used to resolve logon problems resulting in a system hang. Typically other
software in the system is part of the problem, and using the logon option in as clean a
system as possible is recommended. If there are incomplete logons, or the system does
not resume normal operation after logon, the DisableEnter setting can be used. In testing,
it was found that logon problems were related to the system hooks being set. When
DisableEnter=0, the Enter key operates normally. If DisableEnter=1, then the Enter key
does not process any reaction, forcing the user to click OK on the logon dialog. The
dialogs affected are Enter Windows Password and Enter Network Password. Note the
ForceUnHook setting should be set to 1.
(PRE 1.70 ONLY!)
DisableEnter=0
This setting is used to resolve logon problems resulting in a system hang. Typically other
software in the system is part of the problem, and using the logon option in as clean a
system as possible is recommended. If there are incomplete logons, or the system does
not resume normal operation after logon, the DisableEnter setting can be used. In testing,
it was found that logon problems were related to the system hooks being set. When
DisableEnter=0, the Enter key operates normally. If DisableEnter=1 or DisableEnter=2,
the Enter key is disabled on the My-T-Soft keyboard, AND during the logon, system
hooks are in use only while the cursor is over My-T-Soft (see VirtualPointer,
ForceUnHook settings). This forces the user to click on the OK button on the Password
dialog, and forces the system hooks to be disabled during logon. If DisableEnter=1, then
162
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
normal operation resumes upon typing into any window after logon. If DisableEnter=2,
then this forces operation similar to ForceUnHook - even after logon.
(PRE 1.70 ONLY!)
UserNameNotPassword=0
The default keyboard focus is on the password field. To override this (without requiring
the user to use the Tab key), set UserNameNotPassword=1. This will force the default
keyboard focus to be on the User Name at logon. The default (if this entry is not present)
is ;0.
(PRE 1.70 ONLY!)
AllowDomainEdit=0
By original design (at the request of a customer), the domain was not editable (there was
no way the user could edit the domain field). To allow this field to be edited by the user,
set AllowDomainEdit=1.
End WinLogon settings
(OnScreen only)
WantATVersion=1
This setting should be 1 for OnScreen operation - it is not available in non-AT versions
(non Assistive Technology versions). This may be a future option, but as of the 1.73
version, it should be set to 1 for OnScreen, but it is not used otherwise.
(OnScreen only)
SetupMode=0
This indicates whether setup is in the Basic or Advanced mode. If SetupMode=0 then the
Basic mode is in use, and only the dialog and options available in Basic mode are
displayed. If SetupMode=1 then Advanced mode is in use, and all options and advanced
dialogs are displayed.
(OnScreen only)
KeyboardFile=1
This is used in conjunction with the WordComplete & ActionPanel settings. This is an
internal setting and should not be modified here. If KeyboardFile=1, then the
WordComplete / Action panel is in use. If KeyboardFile=0, then only the Action panel is
in use. This setting is used internally, and reflects the WordComplete and ActionPanel
settings. This setting indicates which panel will open when the Tool button (Icon /Top
button on Tool bar) is used.
(OnScreen only)
WordComplete=1
163
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
If WordComplete=1, then the WordComplete Panel is open. If WordComplete=0, then
the panel is closed. This is used by setup, and internally by My-T-Soft to indicate the
state of this panel. If WordComplete=1, then ActionPanel=1.
(OnScreen only)
IntlWordComplete=0
This was added as an option, but the settings in the selected KBF override this setting for
International Keyboards that have dead-keys, and Alt-Gr functionality. In 1.70, it has very
little impact on operation, and should be left at 0 unless instructed to change by IMG
technical support.
(OnScreen only)
Suffixes=1
This indicates whether the Suffix mode is enabled. If Suffixes=1, then the Suffix button on
the WordComplete panel is enabled, and suffixes are automatically displayed after a word
Completion. If Suffixes=0 then Suffixes are disabled, and no automatic display occurs.
(OnScreen only)
ActionPanel=1
This indicates whether the Action Panel is available. By default, the Action Panel is
included with display of the WordComplete Panel, and is automatically set to 1 if this is
the case. If WordComplete is not enabled, then the ActionPanel setting indicates whether
the ActionPanel is available. In general, the internal setting of KeyboardFile overrides
this setting. The ActionPanel and WordComplete settings are used by Setup in User
Options, and all configuration should be managed through Setup, rather than directly
manipulating these settings.
(OnScreen only)
AutomaticU=1
If AutomaticU=1 then anytime a "Q" is used, a "U" is automatically added to the text. If
AutomaticU=0, then this option is disabled.
(OnScreen only)
AutoSpace=1
This indicates whether the Automatic spaces & Capitals is on. AutoSpace=1 indicates
that spaces after word completions and punctuation are automatically added. This also
enables the Auto-Caps option that sets after a punctuation character, enabling the first
letter of a new sentence to be capitalized. If Auto-Capitals is engaged, any character will
automatically turn off the Caps lock. To disengage, use the Caps Lock key.
(OnScreen only)
AutoSpaceDisable=1
164
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
This indicates whether the Automatic spaces & Capitals sub-option of "Disable for single
line input" is on. AutoSpaceDisable=1 indicates that when My-T-Soft senses a single line
input, the Automatic spaces & Capitals feature will be disabled. When
AutoSpaceDisable=0, this special case for single-line input is not monitored. When
enabled, this features requires a Windows event hook that monitors the system text caret
(text input cursor). This only monitors for single line system level "EDIT" class input
windows.
(OnScreen only)
AutoCapI=1
This is used to enable internal coding that forces a stand-alone character I to be
capitalized automatically. This is intended primarily for normal lowercase typing as an
aid to users. This action can be disabled by setting AutoCapI=0.
(OnScreen only)
SecondSpace=1
This is used when Automatic spaces & Capitals is on (AutoSpace=1) If SecondSpace=1,
then 2 spaces are added after a punctuation character (period, question mark, exclamation
point, etc.). If SecondSpace=0, then only a single space is used after a punctuation
character.
(OnScreen only)
AutoArrange=1
After different events, My-T-Soft will automatically arrange the open windows for
smoother operation. For experienced or sophisticated users, this may be annoying. By
setting AutoArrange=0, this default, automatic operation is disabled. The Arrange button
on the My-T-Soft Action Panel will still arrange the active window, by positioning the
window above (or below) My-T-Soft, and filling the available space on the screen with
the application window.
(OnScreen only)
AutoArrangeActive=0
This is only used if AutoArrange=1. When AutoArrangeActive=1, My-T-Soft will
monitor the active window (only when the mouse cursor is over the My-T-Soft window)
and if a new window becomes active, it will automatically be arranged. This also has the
effect of automatically arranging the active window when the mouse cursor is positioned
over My-T-Soft (which some users find helpful, and other users find annoying). Because
of this, the setting is now separate and default off (AutoArrangeActive=0).
(OnScreen only)
AutoSaveMove=0
In 1.78 Release 2, OnScreen Setup has been modified to change the Operation Options
option to match the Save After Move entry in the Options menu, and use the
165
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
SaveAfterMove INI entry (see below). The AutoSaveMove option still remains, and is
implemented slightly differently than the SaveAfterMove option within the actual
run-time software. For practical purposes, this setting is now obsolete. If it is used, then
SaveAfterMove=0 should be set in the INI. Internally, the AutoSaveMove saves the
configuration and position as separate steps, while the SaveAfterMove saves the entire
KEYBOARD.KBF in a single pass.
My-T-Soft will ALWAYS open at the last saved position. Originally designed to
ALWAYS save the current position after moving My-T-Soft, this has been added to
address customers who dislike this default action or where confused by the fact that
sometimes My-T-Soft did not open in their "saved" position. When On, My-T-Soft will
execute a Menu | Position | Save Position command when a move has been completed.
Turn this option Off to prevent these saves after moving My-T-Soft.
(OnScreen only)
ActionPanelEnabled=31
Each button on the Action Panel may be Enabled or Disabled. This setting uses a decimal
value that is using a binary code to indicate each key, where 1 is Enabled and 0 is
Disabled.
These are the codes:
Back Key = 1, Size Key = 2, Select Key = 4, Move Key = 8 and Arrange Key = 16. These
codes are added together, and then saved as the decimal value here. A value of 31
indicates all buttons are Enabled.
For Example:
To Enable only the Back Key & Move Key you would add 1 and 8 to result in
ActionPanelEnabled=9 When disabled the key will be "grayed" and its action will not be
available to the user.
(OnScreen only)
KeyboardEnabled=0
If KeyboardEnabled=1 then the Physical Keyboard is enabled for WordComplete
operation. The WordComplete Panel MUST be displayed for proper operation. See Help,
and User Options for more details on using the Physical Keyboard. If
KeyboardEnabled=0 then the Physical Keyboard is not used.
(OnScreen only)
EnableDwell=0
If EnableDwell=1 then the Dwell Keypress Timer is enabled. This will engage the timer
whenever the pointer (mouse cursor) remains at one position (over OnScreen). If the
delay period expires, a click (Left or Right button down/up sequence based on the Mouse
Button setting) will be initiated. The pointer must be moved again to reset/restart the
timer. To disable the dwell action, set EnableDwell=0.
166
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
(OnScreen only)
DwellTime=10
This is the length of the delay period used in EnableDwell=1. Each unit corresponds to a
tick of 50 milliseconds. The default is 10, or 0.5 seconds (500 milliseconds). The valid
range is from 1 to 100.
(OnScreen implementation only - see below for others)
Sound=0
This can take on 3 settings. If Sound=0 then no sound is generated when buttons are used
within My-T-Soft. If Sound=1, then the KeyClick wave sound is played every time a
button is clicked. If Sound=2, then voices are used to describe each key (for the standard
101 keyboard). See Sounds (Advanced Notes) for a description of how to override the
default sounds.
(Added in 1.76 for My-T-Pen, My-T-Soft, My-T-Soft TS, My-T-Touch)
(The implementation is different than in OnScreen (above) because default wave
resources are NOT included within the executable - only external wave files will be used)
Sound=0
This can take on 3 settings. If Sound=0 then no sound is generated when buttons are used
within My-T-Soft. If Sound=1, then the KeyClick wave sound is played every time a
button is clicked (similar to OnScreen). However, the Keyclick wave is not included in
the resources, so only the override setting will work, using the "KEYCLICK.WAV" file in
the Sounds folder. If you wish to use a different sound, copy the wave file over the
"KEYCLICK.WAV" file in the Sounds folder. If Sound=2, then key numbered files are
used to describe each key pressed, as long as there is a corresponding "numbered" entry
in the sounds folder. Refer to Sounds (Advanced Notes) for details on key numbers, and
other notes regarding this option. Also note that there is no user interface for this, it must
be modified in the INI file. See the NoAnnounce setting below if Text-To-Speech services
are enabled on the platform and the announcement triggered when Sound=1.
(Added in 1.78)
NoAnnounce=1
When Sound=1, IMGSOUND.EXE is loaded, and if Text-To-Speech Services are
available, IMGSOUND will announce this fact by speaking "Text-To-Speech is
available". In the commercial products, this can be annoying, since the sound is primarily
only uesd for key-click audible feedback. Set NoAnnounce=1 to skip this announcement.
If NoAnnounce=0, then this "Text-To-Speech is available" announcement will be spoken.
(OnScreen only)
TopOffset=2
167
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
This is a setting used to help position OnScreen without affecting the Taskbar. This
allows the Taskbar to be placed on top of the screen with the Auto-Hide option enabled,
and let the user have enough "space" to trigger the Taskbar display.
(OnScreen only)
TTSAvailable=0
This is the main option to enable the Text-To-Speech (TTS) functionality.
TTSAvailable=1 is required to enable TTS in OnScreen, but also requires that the
appropriate classes & supporting TTS software is installed on the system. Forcing this
setting on a system without the appropriate TTS software installed & configured properly
will not accomplish anything. The supporting process IMGSOUND.EXE is required to
handle the TTS requests within OnScreen. When TTSAvailable=1 is set in OnScreen, it
enables the internal processing within OnScreen to hand-off the speech request to the
IMGSOUND process. The setting handles the Speak Key Text under pointer processing.
If IMGSOUND cannot find, establish the interface, and communicate with the TTS
speech components, the TTS option will not operate. IMG has repackaged the required
Microsoft Speech Components in MSSPEECH.MSI (which requires the Windows
Installer). The file & the support Windows Installer for early versions of Windows 98 and
NT 4 can be found in the Speech folder on the distribution media, or on the IMG
WebSite. Note that IMGSOUND will play "Text to Speech is Available" when OnScreen
starts to indicate this capability. If the all OnScreen TTS options are disabled, this will
still occur at startup of OnScreen - to disable this action, remove the Speech Components
- Start Menu | Settings | Control Panel | Add/Remove programs, Speech Components.
Note that for discrete pointing devices (touchscreens, etc.) that do not hover well, this
setting may not operate in a desirable fashion.
(OnScreen only)
TTSRepeat=0
This setting handles the option of repeating the same key text for constantly when over a
key. The TTSRepeat=1 will cause a constant stream of speech requests, based on the
TTSDelay (see below). To disable the repeat function, set TTSRepeat=0.
(OnScreen only)
TTSDelay=20
This is the delay time (in 50 ms increments) - the default 20 corresponds to about 2
seconds between speech requests. Increase the setting to stretch out the delay between
speech requests, or decrease the number to make the repeats quicker. Note that not all
speech events are of the same length, so modifying this may cause incoherent speech
events. If you have repeating speech events overlapping, increase this setting - this may
occur if you have a slow rate set for the voice. This setting is also affects how long you
must be over a specific key before the key will be spoken.
(OnScreen only)
168
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
TTSSpeakWord=0
This setting defines whether OnScreen will speak the word upon selection in the
WordComplete panel (Speak Word on Click). TTSSpeakWord=1 means the word will be
spoken when clicked. TTSSpeakWord=0 means no speech event will occur on selection
in the WordComplete panel.
(OnScreen only)
TTSSingleCharKey=0
When TTSAvailable=1 is set, this setting will determine how Text-To-Speech reacts
when the key to be spoken has just a single character. TTSSingleCharKey=1 will speak
the single character key, and 0 will disable single character key speech. For intermediate
& advanced user, there is no need to hear the "normal" keys, and this can be used to
disable speech for the common keys.
(OnScreen only)
TTSWordsKey=0
When TTSAvailable=1 is set, this setting will determine how Text-To-Speech reacts
when the key to be spoken has a word. TTSWordsKey=1 will speak the description (or
the word) on the key (any key with 2 or more characters). TTSWordsKey=0 will disable
speech for keys with 2 or more characters.
(OnScreen only - special meaning when CrossScanner in use)
TTSWordComplete=0
When TTSAvailable=1 is set, this setting will determine how Text-To-Speech reacts
when over the WordComplete words. Since these are dynamic, this third subset of keys
may be selected independently. Set TTSWordComplete=1 to speak the WordComplete
words, set TTSWordComplete=0 to disable. CrossScanner: When enabled, and
CrossScanner is running, CrossScanner will step through the available words and speak
them (delay handled in CrossScanner with Menu Speed setting) The CrossScanner user
may select the word when it is highlighted. The sequence may be restarted by clicking on
the buffer key in the WordComplete panel.
(OnScreen only)
TTSScanWordComplete=0
When TTSAvailable=1 is set, and TTSWordComplete=1, this optional setting will
perform what CrossScanner would do if CrossScanner was running - scan the the
WordComplete panel, highlighting each word, speaking each word, and if there is a
mouse click, type the highlighted word. Use TTSScanWordComplete=1 to enable the
automatic scan of WordComplete candidates each time the list is updated. This feature is
driven by the process IMGSOUND.exe and monitors mouse clicks via the
WINEVENT.DLL. Added for a user using a non-standard pointing device, and the
implementation expects the selection using the left-mouse click, and cancel using the
right-mouse click. There are several instances where the hardware events are coded for
169
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
the device, and a non-standard configuration will not work with this option. This option
should be set to TTSScanWordComplete=0 if CrossScanner is in use.
(Originally OnScreen only, supported in slightly different ways in all releases)
ExpandAKey=0
This setting defines whether the "Zoom" window will appear If ExpandAKey=1, then a
separate window will appear to magnify the key under the mouse pointer, if
ExpandAKey=0, this option is disabled.
The size of the Windows is defined by the factor (see ExpandAKeyFactor below).
Internal logic is used to decide if the window is above or below the pointer. If part of the
key is off-screen, the key will not be displayed. Note that for discrete pointing devices
(touchscreens, etc.) that do not hover well, this setting may not operate in a desirable
fashion. For Touchscreens, and other arbitraty point input devices, the HideZoomWindow
option should be enabled.
(OnScreen only)
ExpandAKeyFactor=3
This setting is handled automatically within OnScreen Setup: Large is 3, Larger is 5, and
Largest is 7. This setting can be modified directly, but if you run setup, and select OK on
the Enhance dialog, the setting will be overwritten. Valid values are 2-20, but anything
over 10 will probably be too large for actual use. Larger windows (settings) will work
better on faster systems, faster video sub-systems.
(Originally OnScreen only, supported in slightly different ways in all releases)
HideZoomWindow=0
Added for Touchscreen support for ExpandAKey (Key Zoom), HideZoomWindow=1
will hide the magnified key when a key click occurs. HideZoomWindow=0 results in no
reaction to any clicks - the mouse cursor will need to be off My-T-Soft window to remove
the Zoom window. In Windows Vista / 7, when this setting is HideZoomWindow=1, the
Zoom window will automatically fade away on its own.
(OnScreen only)
MouseOverHiLite=0
This setting indicates whether the key under the pointer will be highlighted or not.
MouseOverHiLite=1 will enable the highlight, MouseOverHiLite=0 will disable any
highlight action. This setting can be used separately or in conjunction with the
ExpandAKey (Zoom). The internal operation uses the invert option within the BitBlt API
call, so different color settings will cause different highlight views. The WordComplete
panel is handled separately (it was an add-on to the original design, so there may be
artifacts upon resize paints) - these will resolve themselves in normal operation, or slide
the pointer off the OnScreen window.
170
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
Note that for discrete pointing devices (touchscreens, etc.) that do not hover well, this
setting may not operate in a desirable fashion.
(OnScreen only)
ControlPanelToggleButtons=1
This setting indicates whether the control panel (Tool Button Opens & Closes Control
panel) will display "latched" keys or not. When ControlPanelToggleButtons=1 the
buttons will display as "latched" - visually down. The ToolTextIn and ToolTextOut colors
will still be used (see below, [Colors]). For original operation, set
ControlPanelToggleButtons=0.
Note: This setting is not available in OnScreen Setup, it is only available here.
(Versions later than 1.75, OnScreen)
EnableMouseScroll=1
When EnableMouseScroll=1, and OnScreen is larger than the screen display, and a
portion is not displayed, by holding the mouse pointer at the edge of the screen where
OnScreen scrolls off the display, the OnScreen window will be moved back onto the
display, in increments set by the ScrollMovePixels (see below). In operation, it is more
intuitive than the description - by moving the mouse toward the portion of OnScreen you
wish to access & holding at the display edge, OnScreen will scroll into view. To disable
this action, set EnableMouseScroll=0
EnableScreenScroll=0
This setting has been added for CrossScanner & touchscreen users. Since the ability to
hold the mouse pointer at a particular location, e.g. the screen edge is difficult with
various pointing devices (see EnableMouseScroll above), when EnableScreenScroll=1
(Enable Scroll Window - OnScreen Setup | Appearance | Size) a scroll Window will
appear with a slider, and buttons to move the OnScreen window. Because this takes
screen real-estate, and OnScreen may be moved by dragging, and not all users operate
OnScreen in a configuration that is larger than the display size, it is default off
(EnableScreenScroll=0).
ScrollMovePixels=6
This is the amount of move that will occur for EnableMouseScroll / EnableScreenScroll
settings (see above). For quicker movement, increase the number. Because the purpose of
this scroll is to access portions of OnScreen not visible, smooth scrolling may not be as
high-priority as speed of operation. Note that as the number of pixels get larger, the
choppier the scroll onto the display will appear. Note that speed of the system and video
sub-system will affect the actual operation.
CenterOversize=1
This setting handles the position of My-T-Soft when sized, and the resultant size is wider
than the screen width. If CenterOversize=1, My-T-Soft will be centered, leaving an equal
portion off the left side of the screen & off the right side of the screen. If
171
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
CenterOversize=0, then the left side of My-T-Soft will be aligned with the left side of the
screen display, leaving the right-hand portion of My-T-Soft off the screen. CrossScanner
users may prefer setting CenterOversize=0.
(OnScreen with CrossScanner only)
CrossScanner=1
This is an internal setting set by CrossScanner to handle different interface settings
required by CrossScanner (different from the standard interface settings for My-T-Soft).
The communication between OnScreen and CrossScanner is handled automatically, and
this setting should not be modified manually. The following section will be created to
handle the reset of OnScreen when CrossScanner is asleep or closed:
[CrossScanner]
MinimizeToButton=0
NoHooksEver=0
ForceUnHook=0
These settings track the original settings of OnScreen and are handled dynamically by
CrossScanner and OnScreen. They should not be modified manually. If there are any
problems with interface settings when OnScreen is run independent of CrossScanner, use
OnScreen Setup to re-configure
(OnScreen only)
LetterAssist=1
This setting controls the look-ahead and letter selection processing when using the
WordComplete panel. When LetterAssist=1, based on the currently typed letters and the
lookup word list, only possible next letters will be available to the user. When
LetterAssist=0, no additional look-ahead processing will occur, and no modification to
the keys available to the user will be done.
(OnScreen only)
ShowAsGrayed=1
This setting is only available when LetterAssist=1. When ShowAsGrayed=1, letters not
possible (based on the current letters typed and the current word list) will be shown as
grayed out letters. When ShowAsGrayed=0, for any letter that is not possible (based on
the current letters typed and the current word list), the entire key will not be shown and
will not be available to the user.
(OnScreen only)
AllowGrayedKey=1
This setting is only available when LetterAssist=1 and ShowAsGrayed=1. When
AllowedGrayedKey=1, the user will still be able to select and type with grayed out keys
172
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
(those that will not build words based on the current letters typed and the current word
list). When AllowedGrayedKey=0, the grayed keys will not be selectable.
(OnScreen only)
KeysOnlyAssist=0
The setting is referred to as WC-Assist, or WordComplete Assist. When
KeysOnlyAssist=1, the top row of number keys on the keyboard panel turns into 2 sets of
1-5 selection buttons when WordComplete candidates are available (colored the same as
the WordCompletion candidate buttons). When KeysOnlyAssist=0, no action occurs.
(OnScreen only)
KeysOnlyAssistNumbers=0
This setting is only relevant when KeysOnlyAssist=1, and this is only available in the INI
file. When KeysOnly AssistNumbers=1, the function key row is replaced by number keys
(to replace the number keys overtaken by the WordComplete candidate selection buttons)
when WordComplete candidates are available. In most typing situations, function keys
are not used very often, and this provides number keys as an alternative to temporarily
disabling the WC-Assist function to access the number keys.
(Added in 1.75a)
NumPadAlways=0
This is an option available only in the INI file, requested by a customer. By default, the
Numeric keypad acts exactly like a physical keyboard, and responds to the state of the
Num Lock setting. When NumPadAlways=1, the Numeric keypad (Num Panel), will
always act as if the Num Lock is on & type numbers, ignoring the actual state of the Num
Lock toggle / light / keyboard state. This was requested to ensure proper operation if the
user accidentally toggles the Num lock, or another application modified this keyboard
state.
(Added in 1.75d)
Win2000ShutDown=1
During the shut down sequence in Windows 2000, My-T-Soft is still enabled, and can
cause painting problems if moved or configured. Set Win2000ShutDown=1 to disable
My-T-Soft during this ShutDown dialog. If you wish My-T-Soft to operate during the
Shut Down sequence (or any similar dialog in Windows), set Win2000ShutDown=0. This
problem is not seen in Windows XP. When Win2000ShutDown enabled, My-T-Soft
monitors for a Dialog as Topmost, with DS_FIXEDSYS, DS_CENTER styles. If this
type of dialog found, then special internal handling occurs - If opened or minimized to
button, moving and the window is disabled, for other minimized options
(Added in 1.75F)
DisplayChangeEnabled=1
173
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
This setting determines how My-T-Soft responds to the Display Change Window
message when the resolution is changed (e.g. rotation, changing color depths, or screen
appearance). When DisplayChangeEnabled=1 My-T-Soft will reposition in an analogous
position on the new display configuration. My-T-Soft will reposition itself on screen if
any portion was positioned off screen. If DisplayChangeEnabled=2, then the attempt to
preserve an analogous position will be maintained - if using rotation software (portrait /
landscape), then this setting is not recommended, as it could result in positioning
My-T-Soft off screen after a rotation.
(Added in 1.78)
SessionChangeEnabled=0
This setting determines how My-T-Soft responds to the Session Change Window
message when the session is changed (e.g. Fast User Switching). When
SessionChangeEnabled=1, My-T-Soft will automatically open from a minimized state (if
necessary) and restore settings. With the user specific settings (ConfigPath=1 or
ConfigPath=2), this is not relevant, but if ConfigPath=0 or ConfigPath=3, then this option
could still be required, especially in Windows XP. When there are shared settings, one
user can modify settings, and then a session change event can occur. To prevent
synchronization issues between the saved settings and active configuration, when the
session change event occurs (and the Session Change Message is sent), My-T-Soft will
restore settings from the current saved settings.
(Added in 1.76)
ReadOnlyOK=0
This setting was added for the Windows NT based platforms to address some security
concerns. If ReadOnlyOK=1, then files will be opened as Read Only, and Saving
configurations / options, etc. from with My-T-Soft will not occur. When ReadOnlyOK=0,
the KEYBOARD.KBF file will be opened with Read/ Write access, and Read/Write
access will be expected for MYTSOFT.INI. In secure situations where users will be
granted Read / Read & Execute permissions, this setting allows operation of My-T-Soft
in a Read Only mode. Note that reconfiguring is possible during operation (unless the
Operator Mode is enabled), but My-T-Soft will always open with the "original" settings
from KEYBOARD.KBF & MYTSOFT.INI. 1.77 Note - to use this option,
AllowReadOnlyOperation must be 0 There is a slight distinction between the 2 settings.
If AllowReadOnlyOperation=0 and ReadOnlyOK=1, then the configuration files will
always be opened in a read-only mode, and the configuration cannot be updated. If
AllowReadOnlyOperation=1 (ReadOnlyOK ignored), then files will be opened as
read/write UNLESS this fails because of user rights, then they will be opened as
read-only. To prevent operation of My-T-Soft if user has read-only rights, set both
ReadOnlyOK=0, and AllowReadOnlyOperation=0
(Added in 1.77)
AllowReadOnlyOperation=1
174
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
This setting is an override for the ReadOnlyOK setting to address limited rights users in
Windows NT based platforms. In 1.77 it is default On, bypassing the error message when
the KEYBOARD.KBF & MYTSOFT.INI files are Read Only, and running My-T-Soft as
if ReadOnlyOK was set on
(Added in 1.77)
ManualToolControl=0
The tool bar can be turned off in 1.77, and this setting determines if there is any manual
interface available to toggle the tool bar. The original design of the software used the tool
bar as the anchor & always visible element so the user would be able to manipulate the
configuration as desired. Developers requested that this panel be removed so the user has
limited options with the software when it is tightly integrated into an application. In
earlier versions, the operator mode / custom logo options allowed some control over this
panel. Refer to the Developer’s Kit for tools to manipulate this panel programmatically.
This setting allows manual control by the user when enabled. When
ManualToolControl=1, a 3-click approach can be used to toggle the tool bar. By clicking
3 times (1-2-3) in the same spot (border or non-key areas only), the tool bar panel will
close if opened, or open if closed. When ManualToolControl=0, this action is ignored.
For touchscreens (& other less accurate pointing devices), you may set
ManualToolControl to a larger value. If more than 1, then the number indicates the
number pixels of "jitter" that will be allowed to count the click as part of the 1-2-3
sequence. For example, ManualToolControl=5 enables the 3-click tracking, and allows a
+/- 5 pixel range from the 1st click to count as the second & third clicks.
(Added in 1.77)
WindowsKeysGraphics=1
This setting controls whether the graphics are displayed on the Windows Key and
Applications key on the 104-key layouts. When WindowsKeysGraphics=1, bitmap
images are overlaid onto the keys. For smaller sizes, these may be unclear, since a
StretchBlt operation is performed. Set WindowsKeysGraphics=0 to disable this option the text label for the Windows key is "Wnds", and the Application key is "App"
(Added in 1.77)
WindowsKeyWndsLatch=1
This setting affects the operation of the Windows key on the 104 key layouts. When
WindowsKeyWndsLatch=1, the key will latch in a down position, allowing it to modify
the next key typed. This is for Windows functions such as Win-E or Win-F (Search for
Files, etc.) - this is the default setting. If WindowsKeyWndsLatch=0, the key will not
latch, and operate as a simple key, sending a down/up release on down/up press. By
default, this will open the start menu. You will not be able to operate the Windows
shortcut option with this setting, since the key will not latch down. However, macros can
still be used with this setting at 0.
(Added in 1.77)
175
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
TabletPCEnabled=1
This setting affects operation within Windows XP, Tablet PC edition. When
TabletPCEnabled=1, Pnlwatch.exe will be executed, which monitors if the Tablet PC
Input Panel. PanelWatch monitors the request for the Tablet PC Input Panel, and
coordinates display of My-T-Soft. When enabled, Pnlwatch.exe is placed in the All Users
Startup Group as My-T-Soft Tablet PC Interface. PanelWatch can also be controlled
manually. When run normally PanelWatch does not show a window or create any display
for the user. When PNLWATCH.EXE is run directly (or the My-T-Soft Tablet PC
Interface is run from the StartUp Menu), PanelWatch will display an icon in the System
Tray (notification area next to the clock). So if PanelWatch is already running, running it
again will toggle the display of a notification icon. When Enabled from the menu, the
TabletPCEnabled=1 is set PanelWatch is run, and the StartUp icon is created in the All
Users group (as long as user has sufficient rights to create this shortcut file). When
disabled, TabletPCEnabled=0 is set, PanelWatch is closed, and the StartUp group icon is
removed.
(Added in 1.77)
MenuForceForeground=0
This is a setting that determines how the My-T-Soft menu is handled in Windows
2000/XP. In order to handle input focus issues, by default the opening the menu does not
bring My-T-Soft to the foreground as the input window - this causes some interface
issues (menu falls behind other windows, does not clear if click on other windows, etc.).
These user interface issues may be undesirable to some users, and this option allows for
user preferences If MenuForceForeground=0, menu issues may result, but window with
current keyboard input focus will remain - typing on My-T-Soft will type into current
foreground window. If MenuForceForeground=1, menu issues will not occur, but
My-T-Soft will become foreground window - user must reselect typing window before
typing on My-T-Soft.
(Added in 1.78)
SaveAfterMove=0
SaveAfterChange=0
SaveAtClose=0
SaveAtEndSession=0
These settings are used to trigger an automatic save of the current settings and position of
the keyboard window, after the appropriate event. SaveAfterMove=1, means that after
any keyboard window move, the settings and position will be saved. If
SaveAfterChange=1, then the settings and position will be saved after any panel is
opened or closed, or sized up or down. If SaveAtClose=1, then the settings and position
will be saved when the My-T-Soft is closed. If SaveAtEndSession=1, and if the user logs
off or shuts down the system, then the settings and position will be saved. Note that
SaveAtClose and/or SaveAtEndSession effectively override SaveAfterMove and
176
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
SaveAfterChange, since eventually My-T-Soft will be closed, or the user will shut down /
log off, and the current settings will be saved. Also, My-T-Soft can’t be restarted (to use
the current settings and position without being closed at some point.
(Added in 1.78)
TerminalServerConsoleEnable=0
This setting allows a non-server based product to run in the context of the server console.
In general, only My-T-Soft TS should be used on a server where Terminal Services are
available. However, there have been times when (for various reasons) customers run a
server based operating system as a stand-alone machine. When
TerminalServerConsoleEnable=1 for the non-server based products, the normal licensing
will enable these products to run on a server, in the context of the server console (i.e. at
the display monitor for the server, but NOT as a remote terminal). By default, the
non-server products sense this operation, ask if this desired, and save
TerminalServerConsoleEnable=1 automatically.
(Added in 1.78)
EnableScan=0
When EnableScan=1, keyboard scanning is enabled, and a transparent overlay is used to
indicate the current scanning area within My-T-Soft. The following settings ONLY apply
when EnableScan=1. When EnableScan=0, keyboard scanning is disabled. Only in
OnScreen does the user have access to this setting from OnScreen Setup, but keyboard
scanning is available for all 1.78 versions.
(Added in 1.78 R2)
ScanSound=1
This setting controls the sound for each discrete scanning step. When ScanSound=0,
there is no sound used. When ScanSound=1, a "scan" sound is used. When
ScanSound=2, Text-To-Speech is used, announcing panels, rows/columns, and individual
keys based on settings for Text-To-Speech announcements for the scan groupings (see
below). For ScanSound=1, the wave file is "scan-sound.wav" in the SOUNDS folder.
(Added in 1.78 R2)
ScanEnableDisableSound=1
When ScanEnableDisableSound=1 is set, a special "Enabled" and "Disabled" sound
(scan-enable.wav and scan-disable.wav in the SOUNDS folder) is played when scanning
is enabled or disabled. This is helpful if Alt-X is used to toggle scanning (e.g. a trainer
working with a user).
(Added in 1.78)
ScanColor=0
If ScanColor=0, an inverted color display of the current scan area is used within the
scanning overlay If ScanColor=1 a black overlay is used during scanning, and if
177
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
ScanColor=2, then a white overlay is used. Depending on the transparency setting,
My-T-Soft colors, the display itself, and the user, one color setting may be easier to
distinguish over the other.
(Added in 1.78)
ScanTransparencyLevel=255
This setting can take on values between 1 and 255. In the Scanning Settings dialog, this is
translated into percentage, where 100% is 255. Technically this is an "opaqueness"
setting, as larger numbers make the transparent overlay more opaque. Low values may
make the actual overlay impossible to see, and high values will prevent seeing through
the overlay, making it ineffective. Suggested values range between 50 and 150, with the
default at 70 for black and white, and invert is at the fully opaque 255.
(Added in 1.78)
ScanTime=1200
This is a setting in milliseconds that defines the amount of time spent at each scan step.
The default of 1200 relates to a 1.2 second delay between each successive scan step. From
the Scanning Settings dialog, values can be set between 50 and 5000. Values below 500
are not recommended. This setting is also used as the Timeout After setting when Step
Scan is selected as the right-click mode, but it is used at three times the current setting, so
a 1200 setting results in a timeout waiting period of 3600 milliseconds, or 3.6 seconds.
(Added in 1.78)
ScanRightClickMode=2
There are 8 different right-click settings:
178
•
ScanRightClickMode=0 means that the right-click is not used at all. This should be set
if the user cannot use, or does not have access to a right-click event (second button).
Note that even when set this way, a right-click can still result in a reset of the cursor
clipping that is engaged during active scanning. Also note that if this is set to 0, it is
critical that the ScanReverseAfterNumScans be set to some value other than 0,
otherwise the user will always be forced to fully complete a scan, or be forever stuck at
a scan level with no way to revert up a scan level.
•
ScanRightClickMode=1 corresponds to a full reset to the top level Panels scan, so a
right-click during any scan level will reset and begin at a top level Panels scan.
•
ScanRightClickMode=2 is the default, and acts as the reverse of the left-click, meaning
the current scan level goes up to the previous level. So a right-click during a Key scan
will go to the Panel scan. A right-click during a Panel scan goes to the Panels scan, and
a right-click during a Panels scan will Stop scanning (while leaving the scanning
overlay at the current panel). At this stopped level, a left-click will re-engage scanning
again.
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
•
ScanRightClickMode=3 means that a right-click will stop scanning at the current scan
level, leaving the scan overlay untouched. A left-click will re-engage scanning at the
same level.
•
For ScanRightClickMode=2 & ScanRightClickMode=3, when stopped (paused), an
additional right-click will move the scan overlay off of My-T-Soft and display "Left
Click Here to Start Scanning", which will engage the scanning process. This allows a
trainer or assistant to fully access My-T-Soft and still be able to quickly re-enable
scanning.
•
ScanRightClickMode=4 results in a right-click advancing the scan (rather than the
timer advancing the scan). This step scan allows the right-click to advanced & move
forward the scan at the user’s speed, rather than a fixed timer rate. This also enables
several changes - instead of scan speed setting, this value is used as a timeout after rate
(multiplied by 3), which will revert up one level if the timeout period expires. Also, the
physical keyboard is monitored, and when both the Control key and Alt keys are held
down (e.g. [Ctrl]-[Alt]) on the physical keyboard, this scan mode will stop (right-click
on My-T-Soft to restart the scan process).
•
ScanRightClickMode=5 results in a right-click aborting the current scan, and acts as
though the scan was fully completed (i.e. all the way to key selection), and then resets
based on the Next scan setting. This allows quick resets using the right button while
scanning.
•
ScanRightClickMode=6 results in a right-click cancelling scanning completely. Only
returning to My-T-Soft Setup & re-enabling scanning again will scanning be made
available.
•
ScanRightClickMode=7 results in a right-click acting like a left-click. This setting
allows either click to trigger a scan step/selection.
(Added in 1.78)
ScanLeftClickMode=0
There are 4 different left-click settings (3 effective) that affect what happens after the
left-click action occurs. In general, the left-click steps down to the next scanning level. If
stopped, scanning begins at the Panels scan, scanning individual panels. During the
Panels scan, a panel is selected by the left-click, and the panel scan commences. While
scanning groups of keys (as defined for the panel), a left-click will begin an individual
key scan. Finally, during a key scan, a left-click will select the key, and act as a a "type"
event for the key (e.g. selecting the key). The ScanLeftClickMode affects what happens
after this final key selection (i.e. Post Action) These are the 4 possible settings:
•
ScanLeftClickMode=0 is the default setting, and means that the internal handling is
not modified in any way, which is to revert up to the current panel scan (e.g. the middle
level). So during a keyboard scan, and a subsequent key selection, the keyboard panel
will continue to be scanned.
179
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
•
ScanLeftClickMode=1 corresponds to the same group of keys being scanned, e.g. the
scan remains at the key scan level.
•
ScanLeftClickMode=2 means that the current panel will be scanned at the panel scan.
Although this is handled slightly differently internally, the effective result is the same
as ScanLeftClickMode=0 (or the default setting). Because the internal coding is
different, the setting is here to address this different implementation.
•
ScanLeftClickMode=3 results in a revert to the top level Panels scan after a key
selection.
(Added in 1.78)
ScanReverseAfterNumScans=2
This setting determines how many times a particular level will be scanned, before
automatically returning to the next higher level. At the Panels scan level, if the count is
reached, the scanning will stop, leaving the current panel highlight by the scan overlay (a
left-click will restart the scan). If ScanReverseAfterNumScan=0, there is no maximum,
and a scan will continue at the same level until a user selects a scan highlight with a
left-click, or performs a right-click action. Because this setting is potentially problematic
if there is no right-click available, this setting cannot be set to No Maximum if the
Right-Click mode is set as None (or not available). In other words, never set
ScanReverseAfterNumsScans=0 and ScanRightClickMode=0. Any positive number for
ScanReverseAfterNumScans results in an internal count, that will revert up one level
after the count is passed. In Scanning Settings, values of 1-6 are available, but this value
can be any positive number (e.g. 1, 10, 20, etc.)
(Added in 1.78 R2)
ScanShowAllOptions=0
This setting indicates whether all options will be shown for the "Next Scan" and
"Right-Click (2nd Button) Mode". As the scanning options became more complex, it was
suggested that we default to a limited number of options that address the majority of
scanning usage. When ScanShowAllOptions=1, then all possible options are listed and
shown in the drop down lists for these 2 settings. When ScanShowAllOption=0, a limited
set of options are shown. The order of some of the items will change based on this setting.
(Added in 1.78 R2)
ScanOpenPanels=1
When ScanOpenPanels=1, the customized panel options are not available, and during
scanning, all open panels will be scanned, left-to-right. When ScanOpenPanels=0, then
the ScanOrder setting determines the panels that are scanned and their order.
(Added in 1.78)
ScanOrder=WordComplete,KeyboardAlpha
180
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
The ScanOrder determines the order of the Panels scan level. The order is left to right as
listed. Panels should not be duplicated. This list can be easily manipulated
and generated from the Scanning Settings. The complete list of panels available (9 total) is:
ScanOrder=WordComplete,KeyboardAlpha,KeyboardEdit,KeyboardNum,Toolbar,ControlPanel,Windows
and the naming should be self-describing of the actual panels in My-T-Soft Note that in
the commercial versions, the WordComplete panel corresponds to the Magnifier panel.
Here are various examples & scanning orders for the panels:
ScanOrder=WordComplete,KeyboardNum,Calculator
ScanOrder=Calculator,ControlPanel,Toolbar,Macro,WindowsControls,KeyboardNum,KeyboardEdit,Keyb
ScanOrder=Calculator,KeyboardNum,KeyboardAlpha,KeyboardEdit,Toolbar,WordComplete,ControlPane
ScanOrder=WordComplete,KeyboardNum,Calculator
ScanOrder=Calculator,Controlpanel,Toolbar,KeyboardNum,WordComplete
ScanOrder=KeyboardAlpha,KeyboardEdit,KeyboardNum,Toolbar,ControlPanel
ScanOrder=ControlPanel,Toolbar,KeyboardNum,KeyboardEdit,KeyboardAlpha
For each panel in ScanOrder, there needs to be a corresponding Scan[Panel] entry below
that lists key groupings for the corresponding panel. In all cases, the keys are numbered
from 1 to the maximum number of keys on the panel. Groupings are separated by
semi-colons (;), and individual keys are separated in the group with a comma (,). It is
important that only valid key numbers are used, otherwise the bounding scan overlay may
be incorrect, and potentially cause other problems because of internal table lookups. It is
also important that no spaces be used, or any other characters or punctuation. Also, there
is an internal maximum of 25 groupings allowed - if this is exceeded, the additional
groupings will not be used. In order to provide additional examples (showing alternative
groupings and row vs. column scans) and the correct entries, the following lists various
examples for each panel, along with the default settings.
Text-To-Speech announcements can be embedded within these groupings, so each row or
column can be named, and announced when Text-To-Speech is enabled within the
Sounds section. All that is required is that the word or phrase be included prior to the
keys listing, enclosed in square brackets (examples below). This is stripped out prior to
processing the key sequence. It is important that the square brackets be opened and
closed correctly, and that there be no punctuation outside the square brackets (spaces, etc.
are allowed within the square bracket set, but no other square brackets can be used). The
panel descriptions are currently fixed internally.
(Added in 1.78)
ScanWordComplete=1,4,7,10,13;2,5,8,11,14;3,6,9,12,15;
There are 15 keys on the WordComplete panel. The default scan settings scans the
WordComplete setting as columns, which is more effective for accessing the
WordComplete candidate column.
181
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
;;This is a row scan of the WordComplete panel
ScanWordComplete=1,2,3;4,5,6;7,8,9;10,11,12;13,14,15;
;;This is the column scan of the WordComplete panel with Text-To-Speech
announcements
ScanWordComplete=[Options]1,4,7,10,13;[Words]2,5,8,11,14;[Actions]3,6,9,12,15;
(Added in 1.78)
ScanKeyboardAlpha=1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13;
14,15,16,17,18,19,20,21,22,23,24,25,26,27; 28,29,30,31,32,33,34,35,36,37,38,39,40,53;
41,42,43,44,45,46,47,48,49,50,51,52,54;
55,56,57,58,59,60,61,62,63,64,65,66,67;68,69,70,71,72
There are 72 keys on the Keyboard (Alpha) panel (101 layouts) and 75 keys for the 104
layouts. The default scanning is in rows.
;;This is for row scan top to bottom with Text-To-Speech Announcements
ScanKeyboardAlpha=[Function Keys]1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13;
[Numbers]14,15,16,17,18,19,20,21,22,23,24,25,26,27; [Q
row]28,29,30,31,32,33,34,35,36,37,38,39,40,53; [Home
row]41,42,43,44,45,46,47,48,49,50,51,52,54; [Shift
row]55,56,57,58,59,60,61,62,63,64,65,66,67; [Final row]68,69,70,71,72
;;This for 101 layout
;;This is for row scan top to bottom
ScanKeyboardAlpha=1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13;
14,15,16,17,18,19,20,21,22,23,24,25,26,27; 28,29,30,31,32,33,34,35,36,37,38,39,40,53;
41,42,43,44,45,46,47,48,49,50,51,52,54; 55,56,57,58,59,60,61,62,63,64,65,66,67;
68,69,70,71,72
;;This is for row scan bottom to top
ScanKeyboardAlpha=68,69,70,71,72; 55,56,57,58,59,60,61,62,63,64,65,66,67;
41,42,43,44,45,46,47,48,49,50,51,52,54; 28,29,30,31,32,33,34,35,36,37,38,39,40,53;
14,15,16,17,18,19,20,21,22,23,24,25,26,27; 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13
;;This for 104 layout
;;This is for row scan top to bottom
ScanKeyboardAlpha=1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13;
14,15,16,17,18,19,20,21,22,23,24,25,26,27; 28,29,30,31,32,33,34,35,36,37,38,39,40,53;
41,42,43,44,45,46,47,48,49,50,51,52,54; 55,56,57,58,59,60,61,62,63,64,65,66,67;
68,73,69,70,71,74,72
;;This is for row scan bottom to top
182
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
ScanKeyboardAlpha=68,73,69,70,71,74,72; 55,56,57,58,59,60,61,62,63,64,65,66,67;
41,42,43,44,45,46,47,48,49,50,51,52,54; 28,29,30,31,32,33,34,35,36,37,38,39,40,53;
14,15,16,17,18,19,20,21,22,23,24,25,26,27; 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13;
(Added in 1.78)
ScanKeyboardEdit=1,2,3;4,5,6;7,8,9;10,11,12,13;
There are 13 keys on the Keyboard (Edit) panel. The default scan settings scans in rows,
with the cursor arrow keys as one block.
;;This is row scan top to bottom
ScanKeyboardEdit=1,2,3;4,5,6;7,8,9;10,11,12,13;
;;This is row scan bottom to top
ScanKeyboardEdit=10,11,12,13;7,8,9;4,5,6;1,2,3;
;;This is column scan left
ScanKeyboardEdit=1,4,7,11;2,5,8,10,12;3,6,9,13;
;;This is column scan right
ScanKeyboardEdit=3,6,9,13;2,5,8,10,12;1,4,7,11;
(Added in 1.78)
ScanKeyboardNum=1,2,3,4;5,6,7;9,10,11;12,13,14;16,17;8,15;
There are 17 keys on the Keyboard (Numpad/numeric) panel. The default scan settings
scans in rows, with special handling for the elongated buttons on the right.
;;This is for row scan top to bottom
ScanKeyboardNum=1,2,3,4;5,6,7;9,10,11;12,13,14;16,17;8,15;
;;This is for row scan bottom to top
ScanKeyboardNum=8,15;16,17;12,13,14;9,10,11;5,6,7;1,2,3,4;
(Added in 1.78)
ScanToolBar=1;
There are 3 keys on the Toolbar panel. The default scan settings only highlights the top
tool button. Note that this means the panel scan and the key scan are the same, meaning 2
left-clicks are required to select the key.
;;This scans all three buttons (but not recommended for the scanning user)
ScanToolBar=1;2;3;
;;This scans all three buttons in an overlapping group
ScanToolBar=1,2;2,3;
(Added in 1.78)
183
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
ScanControlPanel=1,2;3,4;5,6;7,8;9,10;11,12;
There are 12 keys on the control panel. The default scan settings highlights the 6 rows of
2 buttons.
;;This is for row scan top to bottom
ScanControlPanel=1,2;3,4;5,6;7,8;9,10;11,12;
;;This is for row scan bottom to top
ScanControlPanel=11,12;9,10;7,8;5,6;3,4;1,2;
;;This is for column scan left to right
ScanControlPanel=1,3,5,7,9,11;2,4,6,8,10,12;
;;This is for column scan right to left
ScanControlPanel=2,4,6,8,10,12;1,3,5,7,9,11;
(Added in 1.78)
ScanMacro=1;2,3,4;5,6,7;8,9,10;11,12,13;14,15,16;
There are 16 keys on the Macro panel. The default scan settings highlights the top button
and the 5 rows of 3 buttons.
;;This is for row scan top to bottom
ScanMacro=1;2,3,4;5,6,7;8,9,10;11,12,13;14,15,16;
;;This is for row scan bottom to top
ScanMacro=14,15,16;11,12,13;8,9,10;5,6,7;2,3,4;1;
;;This is for column scan left to right
ScanMacro=1;2,5,8,11,14;3,6,9,12,15;4,7,10,13,16;
;;This is for column scan right to left
ScanMacro=1;4,7,10,13,16;3,6,9,12,15;2,5,8,11,14;
(Added in 1.78)
ScanWindowsControls=1,2,3;4,5,6;7,8,9;10,11,12;13,14,15;16,17,18;
There are 18 keys on the Windows Controls panel. The default scan settings highlights
the 6 rows of 3 buttons.
;;This is for row scan top to bottom
ScanWindowsControls=1,2,3;4,5,6;7,8,9;10,11,12;13,14,15;16,17,18;
;;This is for row scan bottom to top
ScanWindowsControls=16,17,18;13,14,15;10,11,12;7,8,9;4,5,6;1,2,3;
;;This is for column scan left to right
184
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
ScanWindowsControls=1,4,7,10,13,16;2,5,8,11,14,17;3,6,9,12,15,18;
;;This is for column scan right to left
ScanWindowsControls=3,6,9,12,15,18;2,5,8,11,14,17;1,4,7,10,13,16;
(Added in 1.78)
ScanCalculator=1,2,3;4,5,6,7,8;10,11,12,13,14;15,16,17,18,19;21,22,23,24,25;9,20
There are 25 keys on the Calculator panel. The default scan settings highlights the rows,
and handles the elongated buttons on the right separately.
;;This is for row scan top to bottom
ScanCalculator=1,2,3;4,5,6,7,8;10,11,12,13,14;15,16,17,18,19;21,22,23,24,25;9,20
;;This is for row scan bottom to top
ScanCalculator=9,20;21,22,23,24,25;15,16,17,18,19;10,11,12,13,14;4,5,6,7,8;1,2,3
;;This is for column scan left to right
ScanCalculator=1;2;3;4,10,15,21;5,11,16,22;6,12,17,23;7,13,24,18;8,14,19,25;9,20
;;This is for column scan right to left
ScanCalculator=3;2;1;9,20;8,14,19,25;7,13,24,18;6,12,17,23;5,11,16,22;4,10,15,21
(Added in 1.79)
ShiftLock=0
When ShiftLock=1, the role of the Shift key changes - when the Shift key is pressed, it
will stay in the Shift state until the Shift key is pressed again. ShiftLock=0 means the
Shift state will clear when another key is pressed - this is the default operation. Note when
Multi-Touch is enabled, the Shift key can be held down by a constant pressed down input.
(Added in 1.79)
ControlLock=0
When ControlLock=1, the role of the Control key changes - when the Control key is
pressed, it will stay in the Control state until the Control key is pressed again.
ControlLock=0 means the Control state will clear when another key is pressed - this is
the default operation. Note when Multi-Touch is enabled, the Control key can be held
down by a constant pressed down input.
(Added in 1.79)
AltLock=0
When AltLock=1, the role of the Alt key changes - when the Alt key is pressed, it will
stay in the Alt state until the Alt key is pressed again. AltLock=0 means the Alt state will
clear when another key is pressed - this is the default operation. Note when Multi-Touch
is enabled, the Alt key can be held down by a constant pressed down input.
(Added in 1.79)
185
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
AltGrLock=0
When AltGrLock=1, the role of the AltGr key changes - when the AltGr key is pressed, it
will stay in the AltGr state until the AltGr key is pressed again. AltGrLock=0 means the
AltGr state will clear when another key is pressed - this is the default operation. Note
when Multi-Touch is enabled, the AltGr key can be held down by a constant pressed
down input. The selected keyboard layout must present/support the AltGr key for this
setting to have any affect.
[Settings]
(Added in 1.79)
The Settings section contains shared settings between the 1.x and 2.x software in
preparation for a future comprehensive KBF (KeyBoard File) data structure that contains
all settings associated with a specific user’s configuration.
XParallax=0
YParallax=0
The XParallax and YParallax settings allow for situations and touchscreen hardware
where the X/Y appearance is not in sync with system display - i.e. not a calibration issue,
but a physical configuration or device setup situation where the perceived touch location
is somewhat offset from the hardware/driver established touch location. For example,
when there is a noticeable physical separation between the display surface and the touch
sensitive glass surface. To accommodate these situations, X or Y (or both) parallax
settings may be entered (positive or negative), and these values are used as an offset to
calculate a modified location within the software to balance the difference between the
user’s viewpoint and its corresponding X/Y touch point. Note these settings are used only
for location values within the area of the My-T-Soft window. These settings should only
be used in situations where the user and device are consistently located, as these settings
will make the software appear to operate incorrectly if the user’s approach to the device is
varied. Use XParallax=0 and YParallax=0 to bypass these settings.
KeyBlockTime=0
The KeyBlockTime is a per key blockout time in milliseconds where any additional key
press via click event is ignored (blocked). The setting is implemented per key, but is
global in nature. For each processed key, the particular key is is "blocked" during the
blockout time specified. However, another key press will clear the current blockout, and
start a new blockout time for the new key. Use KeyBlockTime=0 to bypass this setting.
KeyBlockTime=100 means 100 milliseconds key block time out. KeyBlockTime=500
means 500 milliseconds (1/2 second) key block time out.
AllowThemeChange=1
The AllowThemeChange setting provides an enable/disable setting for theme changes
either via the Touch Panel, the My-T-Soft menu, or the 2-touch Rotate gesture. If
186
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
AllowThemeChange=1, then these Theme Change events are processed, otherwise if
AllowThemeChange=0, then user triggered theme changes are not allowed.
Theme=ROUNDED_SLATE
The Theme entry is the current theme in use. This entry must correspond to a folder in
the ThemesFolder specified folder, and the folder must have appropriate Theme settings
and files. The Change Theme event (AllowThemeChange) will rotate the theme based on
the ThemeList, and update this entry, then reload the current theme.
ThemeList=ROUNDED_SLATE,ROUNDED_BLUE,CIRCLE_GRAY,ROUNDED_GREEN,RESET
This must be a comma delimited list of folders that exist as sub-folders in the the
specified ThemesFolder location. When the Change Theme event occurs
(AllowThemeChange), the next item in the list will be used as the new current theme, or
the list will start over from the first entry.
ThemesFolder=%PRODDIR%\THEMES
The ThemesFolder setting must correspond to a valid folder that has at least 1 theme
sub-folder. The default is %PRODDIR%\THEMES, which expands to the current
installed folder, with a sub-folder of THEMES. A valid Theme folder (in the THEMES
folder) will have a THEME.INI, which contains replacement entries for specific items the
current MYTSOFT.INI file. When the Theme is applied (at My-T-Soft start or due to
Change Theme event), the THEME.INI is read and applied to the current MYTSOFT.INI
file. For example themes, the PaintDLL overrides are used to change the painting of the
keys, background, etc. Refer to the Example Themes and the IMG Developer’s Kit for
more details.
InitTouchPanel=1
This setting is used at the first run-time to determine if multi-touch hardware capabilities
are present, and if they are, the WantTouchPanel setting will be set to 1 to show the Touch
Panel. The logic used requires that the RegisterTouchWindow API call is successful
(Multi-touch capable hardware), and the WantMultiTouch or WantGestures is set to 1,
and InitTouchPanel=1. This allows the WantTouchPanel setting to sync up with available
hardware and initial default settings, so the Touch Panel is shown if the system can
support it, while preserving the meaning of WantTouchPanel based on user preferences.
The setting is always set to InitTouchPanel=0 after starting My-T-Soft.
WantTouchPanel=0
If WantTouchPanel=1, then the Touch Panel will be displayed (Windows Vista / 7). The
external MultiTouchDLL.DLL must be present for support (see IMG Developers’ Kit),
and either WantMultiTouch or WantGestures must be set to 1. If WantTouchPanel=0, the
Touch Panel will not be shown. If the Touch Panel is shown on a system without
Multi-Touch capabilities, the Theme & Dismiss buttons will still operate, but gestures
and multi-touch buttons will not be enabled.
WantMultiTouch=0
187
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
To select the multi-touch interface, use WantMultiTouch=1. If this value is set, the
WantGestures setting will not be used.
WantGestures=1
To select the gesture interfaces, use WantGestures=1. To use gestures,
WantMultiTouch=0 must be used.
FlicksMode=2
During run-time, if both multi-touch and the gesture interface are off, then normal
operation will occur, and flicks will be processed. The MultiTouchDLL.DLL must be
present, and the Touch Panel must be available. FlicksMode=0 will disable flick
processing. FlicksMode=1 means the keyboard window will be sent to the screen location
relative to the flick, i.e. up (north) means top center, down-left (south-east) means bottom
left, etc. FlicksMode=2 means the keyboard window will move in the horizontal/vertical
directions, and minimize on a diagonal direction.
ReturnOnScreen=0
The ReturnOnScreen setting controls how the keyboard window is positioned when
recalled from its off-screen position (when dismissed by the Touch Panel’s
Clear/Dismiss/Recall button). If ReturnOnScreen=0, then the left position of the
keyboard window is recorded when dismissed, and returned to that original position
when recalled. (Note: If using gestures, and the keyboard window is panned off-screen to
the left, then it will return at the left edge, and if panned off-screen to the right, then it
will return at the right edge). If ReturnOnScreen=1, then the keyboard window is
returned to the center of the screen (or primary monitor in a multi-monitor system). If
ReturnOnScreen=2, then the keyboard window is returned to the center of the entire
virtual space (in a multi-monitor system). If there is only 1 monitor, then
ReturnOnScreen=2 will operate the same as ReturnOnScreen=1.
TouchFadeAway=1
The TouchFadeAway setting indicates how the "on-screen" Touch Panel portion will react
when the keyboard window if "off-screen". If TouchFadeAway=1, then after a preset
amount of time (a few seconds), the visible portion of the Touch Panel (green section
when keyboard window off-screen) will fade away. A click/touch/mouse event is required
to reset and make the window visible. If TouchFadeAway=0, then the fade away action is
disabled, and the Touch Panel will always be visible.
(Added in 1.79)
[Region]
The [Region] section is used to create a region mask that can change the shape of the
visible window. For some versions, this section replaces the external REGION.INI file.
RoundedCorner=0
When RoundedCorner=0, region masks are not applied to round the corners of the
keyboard window. When RoundedCorner=1, 4 ellipses (circles), and 2 rectangles are
188
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
summed to create a rounded corner effect for the keyboard window. The circle size
(affecting the rounded corner) is calculated based on the current Size setting. If the
Region setting UseFixedArea is set, it will override the RoundedCorner setting. Be sure
to set UseFixedArea=0 when RoundedCorner=1.
UseFixedArea=0
Set UseFixedArea=1 to enable the use or specified areas to create a region mask that
affects the visible portion of the keyboard window. To disable these appearance options,
set UseFixedArea=0. Also reference RoundedCorner for a special case of these
appearance settings.
Area1=
Area2=
Area3=
Area4=
Area5=
Area6=
Area7=
Area8=
Up to 8 different Areas can be specified when UseFixedArea=1. For validly specified
areas, the different regions will be summed (logically OR’ed) to create more complex
regions. These regions must be set in sequential order, and each must be valid to properly
create a complex region. The Area entries must be of the form
"[Type],left,top,right,bottom" where [Type] can be "Rect" or "Ellipse", and left, top,
right, bottom are 0,0 based entries from the top/left of the keyboard window. The Rect
type region is defined by the rectangle area specified, where the Ellipse type results in the
ellipse that will fit within the rectangle area specified. (Example:
Area1=Rect,3,5,271,109) The areas are not required to be contiguous. The entries are
coordinates using the top/left of the window as 0,0, and for practical use, the right value
must be larger than the left value, and the bottom value must be larger than the top value.
Note these entries are not width/height, but absolute coordinates.
Warning
Be careful when using these settings, since the software can be
made unusable or inaccessible if the region area specified does
not map in a functional/usable way to the current keyboard window
configuration. Also, these are pixel settings based on a current
size/configuration - changing the size and/or configuration of
My-T-Soft may result in an unacceptable display.
[MouseButtons]
189
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
LeftButton=0
RightButton=2
MiddleButton=3
ShiftDisplay=1
The MouseButtons settings are used to track which actions are triggered by the Mouse
Button. LeftButton or RightButton must be set to 0 indicating the button that will press a
My-T-Soft button. The valid settings are 1-63, referenced as follows:
1=Ignore Button Press, 2=Move My-T-Soft 3=Look-Through My-T-Soft, 4=Open
My-T-Soft Menu, 5=Minimize My-T-Soft, 6=Enter Key, 7=Escape Key, 8=Tab Key,
9=Space Bar, 10=BackSpace Key, 11=Up-Arrow, 12=Down-Arrow, 13=Left-Arrow,
14=Right-Arrow, 15=Insert, 16=Delete, 17=Home, 18=End, 19=Page Up, 20=Page
Down, 21=F1 (Help), 22=F2, 23=F3, 24=F4, 25=F5, 26=F6, 27=F7, 28=F8, 29=F9,
30=F10 (Menu), 31=F11, 32=F12, 33=Shift Key, 34=Ctrl Key, 35=Alt Key, 36=Ctrl-Ins
(Copy), 37=Shift-Ins (Paste), 38=Shift-Del (Cut), 39=Ctrl-Del (Clear),
40=Alt-Backspace (Undo), 41=Alt-F4 (Close Window), 42=Alt-Tab (Next App),
43=Alt-Esc (Find App), 44=Alt-Space (System Menu), 45=Alt-Y (Yes), 46=Alt-N (No),
47=Shift-Tab, 48=Shift-F4 (Tile), 49=Shift-F5 (Cascade), 50=Ctrl-F4 (Close Child),
51=Ctrl-Tab (Select Child), 52=Ctrl-Esc (Task List), 53=Ctrl-Space, 54=Ctrl-Backspace,
55=Ctrl-Enter, 56=Ctrl-Home, 57=Ctrl-End, 58=Ctrl-Page Up, 59=Ctrl-Page Down,
60=Ctrl-Up, 61=Ctrl-Down, 62=Ctrl-Left, 63=Ctrl-Right
The ShiftDisplay is included for those users who use the Shift key as one of their buttons
- My-T-Soft repaints the shifted keys when the Shift state is on (Shift-Key Down), and
there is a slight delay on slower systems. To alleviate this delay, you may set
ShiftDisplay=0.
[StartUp]
QuickHelp=1
Magnifier=1
Calc=0
Alpha=1
Edit=1
Numeric=1
Window=1
Info=1
MacroBrd=0
MytCtl=1
(Added in 1.77)
190
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
MyTMPanel=1
The StartUp settings are used to indicate which My-T-Soft Panels will open at My-T-Soft
startup. If these are changed, My-T-Soft configuration will change and then open in the
new configuration from then on.
These settings can be manipulated thru the CONFGMTS utility (ConfigureMTS), the
following indicates the relationship to the available panels in My-T-Soft:
Alpha - Keyboard panel (letters, function keys)
Edit - Edit Panel (arrow keys, edit keys)
Numeric - Numeric Keypad panel
Window - Windows Controls panel
MacroBrd - Macro panel
Magnifier - Magnifier panel
Calc - Calculator panel
QuickHelp - QuickHelp panel
Info - System Information panel
MytCtl - Control panel
MyTMPanel - Tool bar panel
[SysInfo]
Time=1
Date=1
CurPos=1
FreeDsk=1
FreeMem=1
FreeRes=1
Order=TDMSRC
The settings Time, Date, CurPos, FreeDsk, FreeMem, FreeRes indicate if the display is
shown.
The Order indicates which order the information is displayed.
The relationships are as follows:
Time, Order T, Current System Time.
Date, Order D, Current System Date.
CurPos, Order C, Current Cursos Position.
FreeDsk, Order S, Free Disk Space.
191
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
FreeMem, Order M, Free System Memory.
FreeRes, Order R, Free System Resources.
(Added in 1.77)
TimeDisplayNoSeconds=0
This setting was requested by a My-T-Soft TS user to reduce network traffic when using
the time display on the System Information panel. When TimeDisplayNoSeconds=1,
instead of hours, minutes & seconds (HH:MM:SS), the display is hours & minutes
(HH:MM), and the update occurs only once 1 minute, instead of once a second.
[CalculatorTape]
CalcTapeActive=1
OpenTapeWithCalc=0
CalcSendWithCR=0
CalcSendWithEXE=0
Program=
DecimalDigits=6
CalcTapeActive=1 indicates that the Calculator Tape can be activated from the Calculator
Panel. When the Calculator Panel opens, the Back Space is changed to indicate "Tape." If
clicked, the Calculator Tape will open. At any time, by clicking on the Display, the
Calculator Tape will open, or if already open, will close. When the Calculator Panel is
closed, the Calculator Tape will automatically close. If CalcTapeActive=0, these features
will not be available. As an alternative, if OpenTapeWithCalc=1, the Calculator Tape will
open when the Calculator Panel is open. If CalcSendWithCR=1, the [Enter] Key will be
appended to the keystrokes sent when the SD (Send) button is clicked on the Calculator
Panel. If CalcSendWithEXE=1, the application specified with the Program= setting will
be launched when the SD (Send) button is clicked on the Calculator Panel. Program= is
used to specify the path & file name of the executable program to launch when
CalcSendWithEXE=1. Only short file names is recommended for maximum
compatibility. DecimalDigits sets the number of digits that the My-T-Soft calculator will
display to the right of the decimal place. Valid settings are 1 through 6.
[Colors]
Display3DKeys=1
If Display3DKeys=1, then the shaded bitmap is used as a background for the keys - this is
recommended for 16-bit color or higher (256 colors is not sufficient) Set
Display3DKeys=0 to disable the high-resolution display.
Note for sizes smaller than 8, the high-res is not supported because there are not enough
pixels to create an acceptable look.
SystemColors=0
192
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
If SystemColors=0, then the following section defines the colors available for the
different panels. If SystemColors=1, then the colors are retreived from the Windows
System, as setup in Display Properties, Appearance.
Colors are RGB values, listed RRR,GGG,BBB. If your monitor displays more than 16
colors, you may adjust these values here & avoid the Colors Options in My-T-Soft Setup.
ToolTextIn=0,0,0
Color of the Control Panel text if the Panel indicated is not displayed
ToolTextOut=0,0,255
Color of the Control Panel text if the Panel indicated is displayed
Text1=0,0,0
Face1=192,192,192
High1=255,255,255
Shadow1=128,128,128
Button Text, Button Face, Button Highlight, Button Shadow of the Magnifier Panel.
Text2=0,0,0
Face2=192,192,192
High2=255,255,255
Shadow2=128,128,128
Button Text, Button Face, Button Highlight, Button Shadow of the Keyboard Panel.
Text3=0,0,0
Face3=192,192,192
High3=255,255,255
Shadow3=128,128,128
Button Text, Button Face, Button Highlight, Button Shadow of the Edit Panel.
Text4=0,0,0
Face4=192,192,192
High4=255,255,255
Shadow4=128,128,128
Button Text, Button Face, Button Highlight, Button Shadow of the Numeric Panel.
Text5=0,0,128
Face5=192,192,192
High5=255,255,255
193
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
Shadow5=128,128,128
Button Text, Button Face, Button Highlight, Button Shadow of the Windows Controls
Panel.
Text6=128,0,0
Face6=192,192,192
High6=255,255,255
Shadow6=128,128,128
Button Text, Button Face, Button Highlight, Button Shadow of the Macro Panel.
Text7=0,0,0
Face7=192,192,192
High7=255,255,255
Shadow7=128,128,128
Button Text, Button Face, Button Highlight, Button Shadow of the Calculator Panel.
SysT=255,255,255
System Information: Time
SysD=0,255,255
System Information: Date
SysC=255,255,0
System Information: Cursor Position
SysS=255,0,0
System Information: Disk Space
SysM=255,0,255
System Information: System Memory Available
SysR=0,255,0
System Information: System Resources
SysQ=0,255,0
Quick Help Display
Sys#=0,255,0
Calculator Display
CalcMem=255,255,0
Calculator Memory indicator
[Help]
194
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
This is a lookup section to map internal help topics to various external help
manifestations. During the 19 years of releases, various help formats have been
introduced and then made obsolete. Currently HTML and PDF are in use, as the most
flexible and platform independent, in hopes that they might last a bit longer than
Windows only help formats. This is used by the HelpInterface function in
IMGVERS.DLL, and should not be modified by the user. Note that the INI file in the
same folder as IMGVERS.DLL is used for this lookup. If help reports a problem with the
help file, verifying the INI in the installation folder and this section may be helpful.
THE FOLLOWING ARE SPECIFIC APPLICATIONS IN WHICH My-T-Soft
REQUIRES SPECIAL SETTINGS
Certain Windows Applications may be affected by My-T-Soft because of the way they
were written. You may set My-T-Soft to act normally for any application by setting the
Configuration in My-T-Soft Setup or editing the MYTSOFT.INI file.
[Special]
MyTSpcl0000=Command Prompt
MyTSpcl0001=CMD.EXE
IMPORTANT: Because of the revised interface approach, and the general improvement
in quality of all windows software, many of these capabilities & settings are no longer
necessary. In fact, the settings included are for example purposes only and they are not
required for proper operation of the windowed command prompt. Because these
advanced special handling capabilities add a great deal of flexibility to the software, all
documentation and notes remain.
The Special area designates which applications require special consideration by
My-T-Soft. These are used internally and should not be modified by the user here. Refer
to My-T-Soft Setup to add, remove, or modify these settings.
The following MyTSpcl????= lists the application name that My-T-Soft will check in the
application section below for any special settings. This application name is the Window
Text (Caption Heading) for the Window. To add an application to this list, it must be
assigned the next sequential number for MyTSpcl????.
ADVANCED NOTES:
The Special settings are used internally by My-T-Soft to handle the vagaries of different
Windows applications - they are documented here in case of similar problems with other
Windows applications.
SPECIAL SETTINGS
Special=1 - is used to track internal window child controls for Edit, Buttons, List boxes,
Scroll bars, etc. - No application should set Special=1.
Special=2 - this is for Paintbrush and the fact that it loses the input focus and DOES NOT
regain it if another application is activated while text is being entered. This may not be
useful in any other application because of the specific internal windows messages
195
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
handled with this setting - if, however, an application is written in the same way, and
My-T-Soft is unable to send keystrokes to that application, the user may wish to try this
setting for that application. NOTE: This only applies if InterfaceApproach=0
Special=3 is used internally to handle the differences between Help in version 3.0 and 3.1.
Special=4 was used to handle the edit areas in the PIF editor for the main window. This
setting is specific to the PIF editor, and will not work in any other cases. The
InterfaceApproach=1 setting has eliminated the need for this special action. PIF editor
will not act properly if InterfaceApproach=0.
Special=5 is used to bring the Task Window over My-T-Soft in version 3.0 and handle
special screen repaint issues - this is specific to the Task List.
Action Settings:
Action=0 - ignore
Action=1 - minimize to button
Action=2 - minimize to icon
Action=3 - hide My-T-Soft behind Window as an icon
Action=4 - move My-T-Soft off of Window
Action=5 - resize Window, move My-T-Soft off
Action=6 - Dialog Type Window - Move My-T-Soft to bottom
Action=7 - Popup Type Window (Help) - Move Window off of My-T-Soft
Flags=1 - Window receives Focus
Flags=2 - Window does not get Input Focus
Action=8 - Screen Saver - My-T-Soft floats
Action=9 - Screen Saver - My-T-Soft bounces
Action=10 - My-T-Soft hides
Action=11 - 29 (RESERVED)
Action=30 - Use Secondary Strategy Win 3.0 Only
Action=31 - Use Secondary Strategy Win 3.1 Only
Action=32 - Use Secondary Strategy Always
The Flags entry is also checked for allowing a Button Move to a particular class of
windows. For example, if Action=0 and Flags=1 for a particular class, this class will be
ignored, AND the button will not move to this class of window. Essentially the Flags
setting should only be used for Action=7 as outlined above, or set Flags=1 to prevent the
button from moving to this class of window.
[Command Prompt]
196
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
Contention=1
Action=4
[CMD.EXE]
Contention=1
Action=4
[Classes]
MyTClass0000=#32770
MyTClass0001=bordlg
MyTClass0002=Dialog
MyTClass0003=MS_WINNOTE
MyTClass0004=tutor
MyTClass0005=tutprogman
MyTClass0006=tutwrite
MyTClass0007=ListBox
MyTClass0008=ComboBox
MyTClass0009=ComboLBox
MyTClass0010=WFS_Drives
MyTClass0011=WFS_Drive
MyTClass0012=WindowsScreenSaverClass
MyTClass0013=Sleep
MyTClass0014=FXPopup
MyTClass0015=C_TurboType
MyTClass0016=bosa_sdm_Microsoft Word 6.0
MyTClass0017=bosa_sdm_XL
MyTClass0018=LOGON
MyTClass0019=Blank Screen Saver
MyTClass0020=My-T-Soft Ctrl-Alt-Del
MyTClass0021=tooltips_class32
MyTClass0022=Button
[#32770]
Action=6
[bordlg]
197
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
Action=6
[Dialog]
Action=6
[MS_WINNOTE]
Action=7
Flags=1
[tutor]
Action=10
[tutprogman]
Action=10
[tutwrite]
Action=10
[ListBox]
Action=31
[ComboBox]
Action=32
[ComboLBox]
Action=31
[WFS_Drives]
Action=30
[WFS_Drive]
Action=30
[WindowsScreenSaverClass]
Action=10
[Sleep]
Action=10
[FXPopup]
Action=10
[C_TurboType]
Action=7
Flags=2
[bosa_sdm_Microsoft Word 6.0]
198
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
Action=6
[bosa_sdm_XL]
Action=6
[LOGON]
Action=10
[Blank Screen Saver]
Action=10
[My-T-Soft Ctrl-Alt-Del]
Action=6
[tooltips_class32]
Action=0
Flags=1
[Button]
Action=0
Flags=1
ADVANCED NOTES:
The Classes listed here are the classes that My-T-Soft must act in special ways. Primarily
this list is referenced internally during My-T-Soft operation against the active window. If
a match is found, the action My-T-Soft will take is given by the action.
IMPORTANT: Each Class on this list will affect the system memory that My-T-Soft
requires, and will affect the system operation speed within Windows since this list must
be checked against the active window. There is no reason to remove any of the entries on
this list, and if you do, proper operation of My-T-Soft cannot be ensured.
If My-T-Soft does not act the way you want it to act, cross check the My-T-Soft actions
listed above, and if applicable, add the class and action to the list, as documented below
in the example for screen savers.
NOTE: Screen Savers.
The main reason to add to this list would be to add a screen saver that you use which is
not currently on the list. To add an entry: Add the Next sequential entry to the [Classes]
section.
e.g.
MyTClass0028=MyScreenSaver
and then add an entry below it as:
[MyScreenSaver]
199
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
Action=10
This will result in My-T-Soft hiding behind the screen saver when the screen saver
becomes active.
NOTE: Reference the actions above for alternate screen saver actions.
Reference the ClassWatch setting in the [Configuration] \section to find out the class of
the active window.
[MenuClasses]
MyTClass0000=#32768
MyTClass0001=BaseBar
MyTClass0002=MsoCommandBarPopup
MyTClass0003=DV2ControlHost
These settings have been added to allow additions of application defined menus.
Windows 98 added to the original Popupmenu class with the BaseBar, and Office 97
added the MsoCommandBarPopup. Since these menus work better when displayed above
My-T-Soft, internal settings & action allow the classes of windows in this list to appear
above My-T-Soft. There is a maximum of 10 classes that can be entered in this list.
[StayBehindClasses]
MyTClass0000=The Magnifier
MyTClass0001=CrossScanner FingerScan
MyTClass0002=CrossScanner Desktop
MyTClass0003=Defer:WordComplete
These settings have been added to provide more flexibility for handling other windows in
the system. Because the MenuClasses setting are used for Menus and can affect focus
issues, an additional setting for other interface windows that affect the windows display
order has been added. My-T-Soft will not position above (visibly on top) of these
windows. The "Defer:" prefix indicates a modified logic approach internally, so that when
the mouse is positioned in the overlap between the keyboard window and the indicated
deferred window, an override state occurs. When the mouse slides onto the keyboard
window in this state, the keyboard will then stay above the indicated window class. This
lasts until the mouse pointer goes off the keyboard window. This allows a flexible
approach, designed specifically for the WordComplete window, which stays topmost,
unless the user wants to type a letter, which can be accomplished by sliding off the
deferred window onto the keyboard, bringing the keyboard on top of the (otherwise)
topmost window. There can be only 1 Defer entry in this list.
Important Note: The StayBehindClasses area ONLY refers to other windows that
have the Topmost attribute in the system. This cannot be used for normal type
windows. The Window manager sorts multiple Topmost windows, which in all cases
200
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
will be above other non-topmost windows. The StayBehindClasses is used to help
sort these topmost windows. In order to position the topmost My-T-Soft window below
some application window, the application window must also have the Topmost
attribute. For application level control of the keyboard window, refer to IMG’s
Build-A-Board.
(OnScreen only)
[DoNotArrangeClasses]
maximum 32 characters
MyTClass0000=CrossScanner
MyTClass0001=MyTSetup
MyTClass0002=Shell_TrayWnd
MyTClass0003=Calculator Tape
MyTClass0004=The Magnifier
MyTClass0005=The Right Touch
MyTClass0006=TouchRight Utilities
MyTClass0007=ScrlCtrl
MyTClass0008=DV2ControlHost
MyTClass0009=SmartClick
MyTClass0010=WorkerW
MyTClass0011=SysListView32
MyTClass0012=ImlWinCls
MyTClass0013=CrossScanner Cursor Park
These settings have been added to allow additions of applications that the user does not
want to be Auto-arranged when AutoArrange=1 - (see above for this setting). Because
certain OnScreen & CrossScanner windows should not be affected by Auto-Arrange
when enabled, this list provides the list of window classes that will not be arranged.
[MacroPanelsToOpen]
The default setting is to have no panels automatically open. The list that would appear
here is appended to the Window Names in the special MyTSpcl????= list above.
NOTE: If MacroPanelsToOpen includes one of the Special settings windows names, only
the Special Settings will work & the Macro Panel will not open.
IMPORTANT: Each Panel on this list will affect the system memory that My-T-Soft
requires, and will affect the system operation speed within Windows since this list must
be checked against the active window.
201
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
The list is built from OpenPanel????=MAC?????.KMF entries.
Example:
OpenPanel0000=MAC00032.KMF
OpenPanel0001=MAC00002.KMF
OpenPanel0002=MAC00008.KMF
where OpenPanel???? entries must be in sequential order starting at 0000. The numbers
must be sequential. The Macro File name with ID embedded in the name must be the
entry.
Since there is no easy way to view the Macro Panel at the file level, these settings should
be handled within My-T-Soft Setup.
[Keys]
MyTKeys0000=78,16384
The [Keys] section lists a sequential list of key IDs and enhanced settings code. The first
number in the list is the key ID for each MyTKeys???? entry, and the second number
(after the comma) lists the enhanced settings ID. See BUILD-A-MACRO notes above for
the Key IDs list.
The MyTKeys???? must be sequential starting at MyTKeys0000. e.g. Additional entries
to the above would be
MyTKeys0001=1,1
MyTKeys0002=12,64
The Enhanced setting is a binary code (decimally displayed) that is set as follows:
Enable/Disable is 1-128
Launch is 256-32768
For any particular key, the bits are "or"-ed, or summed as follows
0 - Key enabled
+1 Disable Keystroke
+2 Disable Shift + Keystroke
+4 Disable Ctrl + Keystroke
+8 Disable Alt + Keystroke
+16 Disable Alt-Shift + Keystroke
+32 Disable Ctrl-Shift + Keystroke
+64 Disable Alt-Ctrl + Keystroke
+128 Disable Alt-Ctrl-Shift + Keystroke
+256 Launch with Keystroke
202
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
+512 Launch with Shift + Keystroke
+1024 Launch with Ctrl + Keystroke
+2048 Launch with Alt + Keystroke
+4096 Launch with Alt-Shift + Keystroke
+8192 Launch with Ctrl-Shift + Keystroke
+16384 Launch with Alt-Ctrl + Keystroke
+32768 Launch with Alt-Ctrl-Shift + Keystroke
The above setting for MyTKeys0000 is for the Delete Key (with Ctrl and the Alt key
pressed) to launch the Key EXE below (for Key0078). The utility will force Windows to
restart, so Ctrl-Alt-Delete on the keyboard will result in a warm reboot. When the Logon
Utilities are enabled in Windows 2000 / XP, a Ctrl-Alt-Del will perform the same result
as if done on a physical keyboard, e.g. show a dialog in the secure WinLogon desktop. In
Windows Vista/7, a separate set of buttons will be displayed on the user desktop, allowing
similar functionality to the WinLogon options shown if a Ctrl-Alt-Del is performed by a
physical keyboard (the GINA interface has been dropped by Microsoft in Windows
Vista/7, so transferring to the secure WinLogon desktop does not occur). Options include:
Lock Workstation/Switch User, Log Off, Restart, Shutdown, and the Task Manager.
[Key0078]
Program=%PRODDIR%\CTALTDEL.EXE
NOTE: This assumes the default install on a normal windows setup - it is included
primarily for example. Each Key ID can have 1 Key EXE associated with it, and 1 or
more key combinations can launch this EXE based on the MyTKeys???? setting above in
[Keys].
Note that the Enable/Disable portion of a keystroke is independent of its Launch setting.
The Keystroke should be initiated prior to the launch of the EXE, but system & Windows
issues may affect this timing. The path & file name conform to "short" file names for
backwards compatibility. Make sure you do not use Long file names in the path.
Developer’s Kit Notes: The following sections are NOT in the default INI as shipped
with the product, but since they are valid & available entries, they are briefly listed
here for reference. For complete coverage, entry information, and further details on
these sections, please refer to the Developer’s Kit documentation.
AddOnDLL sections
There are 3 possible sections available - [AddOnDLL1], [AddOnDLL2], [AddOnDLL3].
Only a single section is listed here. The Developer’s Kit covers a sample AddOnDLL,
along with a Logging Log DLL using these capabilities.
[AddOnDLL1]
203
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
DLLName=%PRODDIR%ADDONDLL\ADDON.dll
InitializeFunctionName=InitFuncType7
InitializeFunctionType=7
TimerFunctionName=TimerFuncType9
TimerFunctionType=9
TimerDelay=1000
CleanupFunctionName=CleanupFuncType8
CleanupFunctionType=8
Value1=1
Value2=201
Value3=3302
PaintDLL section
The Paint DLL allows an external DLL to handle certain painting tasks within
My-T-Soft, allowing customization to the panel background, and the keys (both key
background image and key label) Refer to the Developer’s Kit for details and a sample
DLL that shows some custom painted images.
[PaintDLL]
DLLName=%PRODDIR%\PaintDLL\Release\PaintDLL.DLL
PaintFrame=1
PaintFrameFunc=PaintDLLPaintFrame
PaintKey=0
PaintKeyFunc=PaintDLLPaintKey
PaintKeyBackground=1
PaintKeyBackgroundFunc=PaintDLLPaintKeyBackground
PaintKeyModBackground=0
PaintKeyModBackgroundFunc=PaintDLLPaintKeyModBackground
PaintKeyLabel=1
PaintKeyLabelFunc=PaintDLLPaintKeyLabel
WordsDLL section
The Words DLL allows an external DLL to handle Word List functionality when the
WordComplete panel is available. Refer to the Developer’s Kit for details and a sample
DLL that shows the integration.
[WordsDLL]
204
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
DLLName=%PRODDIR%\WordsDLL\Release\WordsDLL.DLL
WordsGetWordListFunc=GetWordList
WordsTypedWordFunc=TypedWord
205
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation (MYTSOFT.INI)
206
Chapter 11. Error Messages and
Numbers
My-T-Soft Errors & Notes are listed is this section describing details and possible
resolutions.
My-T-Soft Error Messages
My-T-Soft Errors & Notes are listed below alphabetically with the following information:
Internal Error Codes
Explanations
Possible Solutions to resolve the problem
If you are unable to resolve the problem and require technical support please write down
the error code and refer to the Customer Support section of this manual.
My-T-Soft is Already Open! Cannot Open Another...
Internal Code: 1
Explanation: My-T-Soft is already running.
Solutions: My-T-Soft should be visible somewhere on your screen display - it may be
minimized to a button or icon.
If using the Developer’s Kit, if is possible that My-T-Soft is open, but off-screen, and not
accessible - you can try going to a higher resolution (Control Panel | Display | Settings,
and raise the resolution (e.g. 800x600 to 1024x768)). You can also use the
CLOSEMTS.EXE from the Developer’s Kit to force My-T-Soft to close. If you have
configured My-T-Soft to open off-screen, you may run My-T-Soft Setup | Configuration |
Special Options | Return to Installation Defaults. You may also try MOVEWMTS.EXE to
move back on the visible screen, then Save Settings & Save Position. Refer to
Developer’s Kit notes for further details.
My-T-Soft Initialization Error! Cannot access My-T-Soft Initialization File:
MYTSOFT.INI
Internal Code: 39
Explanation: My-T-Soft could not access the MYTSOFT.INI file.
Solutions: The My-T-Soft Initialization file is not in the Installation directory. You can
run My-T-Soft Setup from the Program Manager My-T-Soft group, select
Configuration-Special-Return To Installation Defaults, and select Yes, then retry
My-T-Soft.
207
Chapter 11. Error Messages and Numbers
My-T-Soft Initialization Error! Cannot access My-T-Soft Keyboard File:
KEYBOARD.KBF
Internal Codes: 4, 82, 83, 85, 86, 87, 88, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 97
Explanation: My-T-Soft could not access the KEYBOARD.KBF file.
Solutions: If My-T-Soft cannot access the KEYBOARD.KBF file located in the
My-T-Soft Installation Directory, My-T-Soft cannot be run. You may wish to exit
Windows, restart, and retry. If this does not work, you will have to re-install My-T-Soft
from diskette.
Internal Codes: 84, 89, 96
Explanation: The KEYBOARD.KBF file is corrupt.
Solutions: You can try to restore the original files by going into My-T-Soft Setup |
Configuration (Appearance [Advanced]) | Special Options and select Return to
Installation defaults, or you will need to re-install My-T-Soft.
My-T-Soft File Error! Cannot access My-T-Soft Macro File: MAC?????.KMF or
Keyboard Macro file KYBD????.KMF
Internal Code: 98, 108, 109, 110, 111, 112, 113, 114, 115, 116, 117, 118
Explanation: My-T-Soft could not access the file listed in the Error message.
Solutions: You may have deleted the Macro File listed, and the Macro Panel is not
available. Check all Macro Key assignments to verify that none are attempting to open a
non-existent Macro Panel. There may be some system or permissions issue that is
preventing access to the file - you can try as an Administrator to see if results are
different. You should verify the installation (or re-install).
There is not enough System Memory Available for My-T-Soft to run in this
Configuration. Consult Your Manual.
Internal Code: 103
Explanation: There is not enough Windows Global Memory available to operate
My-T-Soft in the current configuration.
Solutions: You may try to increase System Memory available to all applications within
Windows, or operate My-T-Soft in a smaller configuration and/or size. My-T-Soft
requires more System Memory as the screen display area increases. As you open Panels
or go to a larger size, the demand increases. You may try to increase the system memory
by increasing the Windows Swap File (see Virtual Memory under 386 Enhanced in the
Windows Control Panel), or physically adding more memory to your system.
This is a Single User Version of My-T-Soft. Please Contact Innovation Management
Group, Inc. for Multi-User Licensing.
Internal Code: 101
Explanation: This is a Single User Version.
208
Chapter 11. Error Messages and Numbers
Solutions: Contact Innovation Management Group, Inc. regarding Multi-User and Site
Licensing of My-T-Soft.
Too many clocks or timers! Close Some Windows or Stop Animations, then Retry.
Internal Code: 3
Explanation: There is not a System Timer available
Solutions: You can close some windows, or stop any animations, or try exiting Windows
and restart.
Window Creation Error! Cannot continue! Check System and Try again.
Internal Code: 1
Explanation: Windows could not create a Window for My-T-Soft
Solutions: You may have too many windows open, and there are not enough resources, or
the Windows Environment may have been corrupted, or some other system error. Either
Close other windows and try again, or exit Windows, and restart.
Window Tracking Error. Close My-T-Soft and Restart.
Internal Code: 1001, 1002, 1003, 1004, 1005
Explanation: InterfaceApproach is set to 0 in MYTSOFT.INI and there has been an
internal error in My-T-Soft.
Solutions: Close My-T-Soft, and reset the InterfaceApproach in the MYTSOFT.INI to 1,
then restart My-T-Soft.
Windows Internal Controls Are Active in Active Window! Cannot Remove
My-T-Soft! Close Active Window or Switch to Another Window, then Retry.
Internal Code 1000:
Explanation: InterfaceApproach is set to 0 in MYTSOFT.INI, and Windows Internal
Controls have been subclassed
Solution: Close Active Window, or Switch to Another Window and retry.
Windows Global Memory Allocation Error! Close My-T-Soft and Restart.
Internal Codes: 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25,
26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 40, 99. 100, DLL
Explanation: My-T-Soft attempted to Lock or Allocate Global Memory, and received an
error code from Windows.
Solutions: See Solutions under "There is not enough System Memory..." above.
Windows Local Memory Allocation Error! Close My-T-Soft and Restart.
Internal Codes: 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 60,
61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78, 79, 80, 81, 102, 104,
105, 106, 107, 118, 119, 120, 121, 122, 123
209
Chapter 11. Error Messages and Numbers
Explanation: My-T-Soft is unable to access Local Memory to My-T-Soft. You should
never see this error.
Solutions: Close My-T-Soft and Restart. If that is not successful, Exit Windows and
Restart.
210
Index
AltGr Key operation, 30
AltGrLock - INI setting, 185
AltLock - INI setting, 185
Application (Launch from Macro
Key), 79
Application Notes, 105
Area (Area1,Area2,Area3,etc.) - INI
setting, 189
Auto Logon, 96
Auto-Open (Macro Panel), 32
AutoArrange - INI setting, 165
AutoArrangeActive - INI setting, 165
AutoCapI - INI setting, 165
Automatic Keystrokes, 48
Automatic Logon, 91, 96
Automatic Typing, 48
AutomaticU - INI setting, 164
AutoSaveMove - INI setting, 165
AutoSpace - INI setting, 164
AutoSpaceDisable - INI setting, 164
Symbols
101 Keyboard, 29
104 Keyboard, 29
2-Button Mouse, 86
2037 / 2038 year limitation, 123
3-Button Mouse, 86
3D Key Display, 46
A
ABC Keyboard, 64
About this product, 108
Action Button, 86
Action Button Move, 49
ActionPanel - INI setting, 164
ActionPanelEnabled - INI setting,
166
Activate Keystroke Macro, 75
Active Application (Active Window),
29
Add A Panel, 73
Add/Remove Programs, 2, 8
Additional Keyboard Notes, 65
addresses, 73
Administrator, 9, 39
Administrator Rights, 91, 92
Advanced User Notes, 101
Allow Action Button Move, 49
AllowFrameMove - INI setting, 155
AllowGrayedKey - INI setting, 172
AllowReadOnlyOperation - INI
setting, 174
AllowThemeChange - INI setting,
186
Alt Key operation, 29
Alternate Virtual Interface, 49
AltGr, 65
B
background, 27
Background (Keyboard), 60
BackgroundColor - INI setting, 149
BIOS, 21
border, 47
Border - Key, 50
BorderNoHit - INI setting, 156
Build-A-Board, 125
Build-A-Board layout support, 135
Build-A-Macro, 73
Build-A-Macro Notes, 125
Button (Minimize to button) Position
Options, 147
Button Display, 136
ButtonIgnoreWindowXY - INI
setting, 148
ButtonOffsetX - INI setting, 147
ButtonOffsetY - INI setting, 147
ButtonOverrideH - INI setting, 147
211
Index
ButtonOverrideW - INI setting, 147
ButtonOverrideX - INI setting, 148
ButtonOverrideY - INI setting, 148
ButtonSingleMonitorLimit - INI
setting, 149
C
212
Calc (Calculator panel), 28
calculator display, 33
Calculator Panel, 33
Calculator section [CalculatorTape]
(INI file), 192
Calculator Tape, 33
Caps Lock setting, 159
CapsLockMode - INI setting, 160
CaptionWatch - INI setting, 147
Caret (text cursor), 29
Catalog, 23
CD (CD-ROM or DVD), 1, 7
Center - INI setting, 150
CenterOversize - INI setting, 171
Certificate of Authenticity, 1, 7
Change Theme (menu), 39
CheckFloppies - INI setting, 151
CheckMinMax - INI setting, 151
Classes section [Classes] (INI file),
197
ClassWatch - INI setting, 152
Clear Key (Macro), 80
Click (Sound feedback), 137
Close (Calculator Tape), 33
Close (Child Window), 30
Close (Exit), 38
Close (Exit) (Quit), 28
Close (My-T-Soft), 38
Close (Panels), 28
Close (Tool bar), 27
CLOSE (Window), 30
Close a panel, 28
Colors Dialog, 59
Colors section [Colors] (INI file), 192
Command Line Options, 130
Commonly Asked Questions, 19
ConfigPath - INI setting, 143
Configuration - Special, 136
Configuration Dialog, 43
Configuration section [Configuration]
(INI file), 143
Configure Automatic Logon, 96
Configure your Mouse Buttons, 85
Contacting IMG, 107
Contention - INI setting, 144
context menu, 103
Context Sensitive Help, 43
Control Key operation, 29
Control Panel, 28
ControlLock - INI setting, 185
ControlLogo - INI setting, 154
ControlPanel - INI setting, 155
ControlPanelKeyboard - INI setting,
155
ControlPanelToggleButtons - INI
setting, 171
Copy (Macro editing), 83
Copy (Windows Control Panel), 30
Copy Key (Macro), 80
Copyrights, 3
Create Keystroke Macro, 75
CrossScanner - INI setting, 172
CrossScanner section [CrossScanner]
(INI file), 172
CTRL+ALT+DEL Logon Utility, 93
Current Settings, 37
Cursor (display/selecting), 87
Cursor (Magnifier Panel), 34
Cursor (within Magnifier), 47
Cursor - INI setting, 145
Cursors, 88
Custom Logo, 56
Customer Service, 22
Customer Suggestions, 109
Customer Support, 22
Cut (Macro editing), 83
Cut (Windows Control Panel), 30
Index
E
D
Edit (edit (keyboard) panel), 28
Edit (Keyboard Panel), 29
Editing Macros, 76
Editor - INI setting, 155
EGA Users, 123
Enable Auto Logon, 97
EnableDwell - INI setting, 166
EnableMouseScroll - INI setting, 171
EnableOperator - INI setting, 153
EnableScan - INI setting, 177
EnableScreenScroll - INI setting, 171
equipment, 7
Error Messages and Numbers, 207
Evaulation License, 13
Example Macro Panels, 32
Exit (Close), 38
Exit (Close) (Quit), 28
ExpandAKey - INI setting, 170
ExpandAKeyFactor - INI setting, 170
Date (System Information panel), 34
Debugging Options - MYTSOFT.INI,
152
Default Logon Name, 97
Default Password, 97
Default User Name, 97
DefaultDrive - INI setting, 151
Delete (Macro editing), 83
Delete Macro Panel, 77
Delete Panel, 73
Deployment Information, 119
Developer Utilities, 114
Developers, 107
Dialogs (react to), 48
Display, 19
Display Cursor (within Magnifier), 47
Display Notes, 136
Display Options, 46
DisplayChangeEnabled - INI setting,
173
Document All Macro Panels, 78
F
Document All Panels, 73
Fast User Switching, 137
Features, 6
File Notes, 111
Files - Product Files Installed, 111
Final Release Notes, 101
Find (Child Window), 30
FIND (Window), 30
Flicks, 35
FlicksMode - INI setting, 188
focus (active window), 29
Fonts, 62
ForceUnHook - INI setting, 156
four function calculator, 33
Document Macro Panel, 77
Post to Clipboard, 78
Save to File, 78
Document Panel, 73
Documentation File Save, 78
DoNotArrange section
[DoNotArrange] (INI file), 201
DOS Windows, 124
DragMode - INI setting, 160
Drivers, 21
DriveTypesToCheck - INI setting,
151
DVD (CD-ROM or DVD), 1, 7
Dvorak layout, 64
DwellTime - INI setting, 166
G
Gestures, 35
213
Index
Guide (Using), 4
Install - Silent, 117
Install Developer’s Kit, 9
Installation Information, 117
InstallPath - INI setting, 155
Interface Settings, 50
Internal Error Codes, 207
International (keyboard) operation, 30
International keyboard, 65
International Keyboard Layouts and
Windows, 67
IntlWordComplete - INI setting, 164
Invisible (Cursor), 88
H
hard disk space, 7
hardware requirements, 7
Help, 37
Help (accessing), 43
Help (Quick Help panel), 28
Help section [Help] (INI file), 194
Hide Keys (Show & Hide), 46
HideZoomWindow - INI setting, 170
HoldShiftCtrl - INI setting, 160
J
Joysticks, 21
I
214
Icon (display/selecting), 87
Icon - INI setting, 146
Icons, 88
IgnoreSystemCapsLock - INI setting,
159
IMG, 9, 10
Important User Information, 4
incompatibilities, 103
Info (System Information panel), 28
Information Display (System
Information Panel), 58
Information Panel, 34
Information panel (display), 45
INI - File Documentation
(MYTSOFT.INI), 143
Initialization File Documentation
(MYTSOFT.INI), 143
InitTouchPanel - INI setting, 187
Innovation Management Group, Inc.,
22
input device, 103
Input Device options, 49
Install
Installing, 1, 8
Installing / Un-Installing, 7
K
KBF Files, 125
Key Border, 50
Key Click, 137
Key Display, 136
Key EXE, 53
Key Options, 45, 51
KeyBlockTime - INI setting, 186
Keyboard
Physical Keyboard, 21
Keyboard - INI setting, 150
Keyboard Background, 60
Keyboard display (Fonts), 62
Keyboard Layouts, 63
Keyboard Layouts and Windows, 67
Keyboard Logon, 92
Keyboard Notes, 124
Keyboard Panel, 29
Keyboard Panels
(alpha/edit/numeric), 29
Keyboard Select dialog, 63
Keyboard1SizeAdjBase - INI setting,
157
Index
Keyboard1SizeAdjLarge - INI
setting, 157
Keyboard1SizeAdjMedium - INI
setting, 157
KeyboardCharSetBase - INI setting,
157
KeyboardCharSetLarge - INI setting,
157
KeyboardCharSetMedium - INI
setting, 157
KeyboardEnabled - INI setting, 166
KeyboardFile - INI setting, 163
KeyboardFontBase - INI setting, 157
KeyboardFontLarge - INI setting, 157
KeyboardFontMedium - INI setting,
157
KeyboardUpdate - INI setting, 157
KeyDelay - INI setting, 145
Keys
Alt-Backspace, 30
Alt-Esc, 30
Alt-F4, 30, 46
Alt-Space, 30
Alt-Tab, 124
Control-Tab, 30
Ctrl-Alt-Del, 124
Ctrl-Break, 124
Pause Key, 20, 124
Print Screen Key, 20, 124
Shift-F10, 30, 124
Sys-Rq, 124
Keys - special keyboard keys, 124
Keys section [Keys] (INI file), 202
KeysOnlyAssist - INI setting, 173
KeysOnlyAssistNumbers - INI
setting, 173
Keystroke (sequence, down and up),
49
Keystroke per single click, 49
Keystroke script (macro), 73
Keystroke sequence (macro), 32, 73
Keystrokes (Automatic), 48
KeyWatch - INI setting, 152
KMF Files, 125
Korean Windows IME Usage, 137
Kybd (Keyboard panel), 28
L
language (Keyboard layout), 64
Launch Application (Macro Key), 79
Launch Key EXE, 52
Layout (international keyboards), 30
Layouts (keyboards), 63
Left Button (action button), 86
Left-Hand (cursor), 87
LetterAssist - INI setting, 172
letters, 73
License Key, 1, 7, 10
License Manager, 10
Licensing, 10
Licensing Information, 9
Logo (Custom), 45, 56
Logon - Automatic, 96
LOGON Folder, 93
Logon Utilities, 46
Administrator Rights, 91, 92
Build-A-Board Layouts, 93
CTRL+ALT+DEL Logon Utility,
93
LOGON Folder, 93
My-T-Soft 2 - small, medium,
large, 93
My-T-Soft 2 Keyboard, 92
My-T-Soft 2 Technical Notes, 93
Windows 7, 91
Windows Vista, 91
LowerCaseDisplay - INI setting, 159
M
Macro
Build-A-Macro, 73
Macro (Macro panels), 28
Macro Key, 79
215
Index
216
Macro Panel Description, 76
Macro Panel Dialog, 80
Macro Panel ID, 76
Macro Panels, 32
Add A Panel, 73
Delete Panel, 73
Document All Panels, 73
Document Panel, 73
Macro Zoom Dialog, 82
MacroPanelsToOpen section
[MacroPanelsToOpen] (INI file), 201
Macros
Activate Keystroke Macro, 75
Clear Key, 80
Copy Key, 80
Create Keystroke Macro, 75
Delete Macro Panel, 77
Document All Macro Panels, 78
Document Macro Panel, 77
Editing (Advanced), 76
Launch Application, 79
Open Macro Panel, 79
Panel Description, 76
Panel ID, 76
Paste Key, 80
Mag (Magnifier panel), 28
Magnification, 34
Magnifier Panel, 34
Main Macro Panel, 32, 55, 74, 77
ManualToolControl - INI setting, 175
MAX (Windows Control Panel), 30
Memory, 130
MenuClasses section [MenuClasses]
(INI file), 200
MenuForceForeground - INI setting,
176
MenuOffset - INI setting, 160
Menus - Windows menu operation
notes, 123
messaging information, 107
MIN (Windows Control Panel), 30
Minimize (opening minimized) Command Line, 130
Minimize Options, 37
Button, 37
Icon, 37
Taskbar Icon (tray), 37
MinimizeToButton - INI setting, 147
Motion Dialog Box, 56
Mouse
Physical Mouse, 21
Required, 21
Touchscreen / Pen / Pointing
Device, 21
Mouse - Drivers, 21
Mouse Buttons, 85
Mouse Buttons - 2 or 3-Button
Mouse, 86
Mouse Buttons - Left Button (action
button), 86
Mouse Driver - 2 or 3-Button Mouse,
86
Mouse pointer (cursor), 87
MouseButtons section
[MouseButtons] (INI file), 189
MouseOverHilite - INI setting, 170
MSI Install, 117
Multi-Touch, 35
MYTSOFT.INI File Documentation,
143
Button Position, 147
Debugging Options, 152
N
New Macro, 75
New Macro Panel, 74
NoAnnounce - INI setting, 167
NoHooksEver - INI setting, 157
NoSplash - INI setting, 145
Num (Keyboard Panel), 29
Num (numeric (keyboard) panel), 28
NumPadAlways - INI setting, 173
Index
O
Paste (Macro editing), 83
Paste (Windows Control Panel), 30
Off-Screen - Screen-Edge Scroll, 37
Opaque, 38
Open a panel, 28
Open Macro Panel, 79
OpenAbout - INI setting, 145
OpenCentered - INI setting, 145
OpenFirst - INI setting, 145
Operation
General, 27
Operation Notes, 123
Operation Options, 45, 48
Operator - Disable Minimize, 56
Operator Mode, 27
Operator Security, 55
OperatorNoMin - INI setting, 154
Paste Key (Macro), 80
Patents, 3
Pause Key, 20
Pens, 21
Physical Keyboard
BIOS settings, booting, 21
Caps Lock operation, 159
Ctrl-Alt-Del, 202
layout, 64
mechanical emulation, 156
Numeric Keypad operation option,
173
operation, 49
Pointing Devices
P
Joysticks, 21
Panel Colors, 59
Panel Motion, 56
Panel Selection, 47
Panels
Calculator Panel, 33
Closing, 28
Control Panel, 28
Keyboard Panel, 29
Macro Panels, 32
Magnifier Panel, 34
Opening, 28
Quick Help Panel, 33
Selection, 47
System Information Panel, 34
Tool Bar Panel, 27
Touch Panel, 35
Window Control Panels, 30
PanelWatch, 39
Parallax Settings - INI setting, 186
Parameters (to EXE) - Command
Line, 130
Password (default), 55
Password - INI setting, 153
Mouse, 21
Pens, 21
Touchscreens, 21
Position, 38
Print Screen Key, 20
Product Catalog, 23
Programming Information, 107
Q
Questions
Commonly Asked Questions, 19
Quick Help, 37
Quick Help Panel, 33
Quick Start, 1
Quit (Exit) (Close), 28
QWERTY (Keyboard Layout), 63
217
Index
R
React to Dialogs and other Windows,
48
ReadOnlyOK - INI setting, 174
Region section [Region] (INI file),
188
Regional (International) settings
(Keyboard Layouts and Windows), 67
Release Information, 1, 8, 117
Release Notes, 101
reposition, 27, 38
requirements, 7
restart, 202
Restart - Developer Utilities, 114
Restore Position, 38
Restore Settings, 37
RestorePosition - INI setting, 150
Return to Installation Defaults, 55
ReturnOnScreen - INI setting, 188
right click, 103
Right Mouse Button, 85
Right-Hand (cursor), 87
RoundedCorner - INI setting, 188
S
218
Save Current Settings, 37
Save Position, 38
SaveAfterChange - INI setting, 176
SaveAfterMove - INI setting, 176
SaveAtClose - INI setting, 176
SaveAtEndSession - INI setting, 176
ScanCalculator - INI setting, 185
ScanColor - INI setting, 177
ScanControlPanel - INI setting, 183
ScanEnableDisableSound - INI
setting, 177
ScanKeyboardAlpha - INI setting,
182
ScanKeyboardEdit - INI setting, 183
ScanKeyboardNum - INI setting, 183
ScanLeftClickMode - INI setting, 179
ScanMacro - INI setting, 184
ScanOpenPanels - INI setting, 180
ScanOrder - INI setting, 180
ScanReverseAfterNumScans - INI
setting, 180
ScanRightClickMode - INI setting,
178
ScanShowAllOptions - INI setting,
180
ScanSound - INI setting, 177
ScanTime - INI setting, 178
ScanToolBar - INI setting, 183
ScanTransparencyLevel - INI setting,
178
ScanWindowsControls - INI setting,
184
ScanWordComplete - INI setting, 181
Screen-Edge Scroll, 37
Screen-Saver options, 195
script - Keystroke macro, 73
Scroll (Screen-Edge), 37
ScrollMovePixels - INI setting, 171
SecondSpace - INI setting, 165
See Through, 38
Select All (Macro editing), 83
Select Key, 52
Select Key Modifier, 52
Select Keyboard Background, 60
Select Keyboard Layouts, 63
sequence of keystrokes, 73
Serial Number, 1, 7, 10
SessionChangeEnabled - INI setting,
174
Set Position, 38
SetActiveWindowWatch - INI setting,
152
Settings section [Settings] (INI file),
186
Setup, 2, 16
Installation Options, 117
Product Installation, 117
Quiet Install, 117
Setup (Product), 17, 37
SetupMode - INI setting, 163
Index
SetupSaveSettings - INI setting, 153
Shift Key operation, 29
ShiftLock - INI setting, 185
Short-Cut, 6
short-cuts - menu, 123
Show & Hide Keys, 46
ShowAsGrayed - INI setting, 172
ShowKeys - INI setting, 155
Silent Installation, 117
SingleKeyPerClick - INI setting, 156
Size, 37
Size 12, 37
Size Down, 37
Size Up, 37
Size - INI setting, 149
Size Selections, 57
SizeMax - INI setting, 149
SizeMin - INI setting, 149
SkipTopMostAction - INI setting, 152
Slide-Out Panels, 56
SlideOption - INI setting, 149
Snap-Out Panels, 56
Sound - INI setting, 167
Sounds - Key Click, 137
Special Handling, 53
Special Options, 45, 53, 136
Special section [Special] (INI file),
195
Splash (disable opening splash) Command Line, 130
Splash Screen (opening My-T-Soft),
145
standard configuration, 15
standard settings, 15
StartDelay - INI setting, 145
StartUp group, 39
Startup of My-T-Soft, 145
StartUp section [StartUp] (INI file),
190
StayBehindClasses section
[StayBehindClasses] (INI file), 200
Suffixes - INI setting, 164
Suggestions, 109
Supervisor/Operator, 45
Support
Customer Support, 22
website, 22
SysInfo section [SysInfo] (INI file),
191
System Colors, 59
System Information Display, 58
System Information Panel, 34
System requirements, 7
T
Tablet PC Input Panel, 39, 137
TabletPCEnabled - INI setting, 175
Tape key (Calculator Tape), 33
Taskbar button, 44
Technical Documentation Section,
101
Technical Notes, 104
Terminal Server / Terminal Services,
2
TerminalServerConsoleEnable - INI
setting, 177
Text-To-Speech - no announcing, 167
Theme - INI setting, 187
ThemeList - INI setting, 187
Themes, 35
ThemesFolder - INI setting, 187
three-button mouse, 86
Tile (Windows), 30
Time (System Information panel), 34
Tool Bar Control (Manual), 39
Tool Bar Panel, 27
TopOffset - INI setting, 167
Touch Panel, 35
Touch Panel (menu), 39
TouchFadeAway - INI setting, 188
touchscreens, 21
Track Pointing Device Input at all
times, 49
Trademarks, 3
Transparency, 38
219
Index
Transparency - INI setting, 161
TransparencyLevel - INI setting, 161
TrapDialAKeyCursor - INI setting,
146
Tray Icon, 45
TTSAvailable - INI setting, 168
TTSDelay - INI setting, 168
TTSRepeat - INI setting, 168
TTSScanWordComplete - INI setting,
169
TTSSingleCharKey - INI setting, 169
TTSSpeakWord - INI setting, 168
TTSWordComplete - INI setting, 169
TTSWordsKey - INI setting, 169
Tutorial, 2, 37
Tutorial and Standard Settings, 15
two-button mouse, 86
TwoButtonMouse - INI setting, 150
TypeMatic - INI setting, 145
Typematic Operation, 48
Virtual Pointer in Use, 49
VirtualPointer - INI setting, 155
visually impaired, 34
W
WantATVersion - INI setting, 163
WantGestures - INI setting, 188
WantMultiTouch - INI setting, 187
WantTouchPanel - INI setting, 187
Wave File - sound integration, 137
website, 22
What is My-T-Soft, 5
What You Need, 7
Why Do I Need My-T-Soft?, 5
Win (Windows Controls panel), 28
Win2000ShutDown - INI setting, 173
Window (minimize), 45
Window Contention (reaction), 48
Windows Applications, 19
U
Windows Control Panels, 30
Windows Controls panel, 28
Un-Install, 9
Undo (Macro editing), 83
Undo (Windows Control Panel), 30
Upper Case Characters Always
(Keyboard), 50
UseFixedArea - INI setting, 189
UseOrgCutCopyPasteUndo - INI
setting, 160
User Notes, 103
user-defined panels, 73
Using this guide, 4
Windows Developers, 107
Windows Installer, 117
Windows Logon, 92
Windows Menus, 123
Windows Notes, 137
WindowsKeysGraphics - INI setting,
175
WindowsKeyWndsLatch - INI
setting, 175
WindowWatch - INI setting, 152
without a keyboard, 21
WordComplete - INI setting, 163
V
220
Version (history), 101
view the cursor, 20
Virtual Machines - Technical Notes,
104
X
XParallax - INI setting, 186
Index
Y
YParallax - INI setting, 186
Z
Zoom - Keystroke Macro, 75
221
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising